In the wake of commit f21599311, we don't need to set table columns'
align specs retail. Undo a few such settings I'd added in commit
5545b69ae. (The column width adjustments stay, though.)
I concluded that we really just ought to force all tables in PDF output
to default to "left" alignment (instead of "justify"); that is what the
HTML toolchain does and that's what most people have been designing the
tables to look good with. There are few if any places where "justify"
produces better-looking output, and there are many where it looks
horrible. So change stylesheet-fo.xsl to make that true.
Also tweak column widths in a few more tables to make them look better
and avoid "exceed the available area" warnings. This commit fixes
basically everything that can be fixed through that approach. The
remaining tables that give warnings either are scheduled for redesign
as per recent discussions, or need a fundamental rethink because they
Just Don't Work in a narrow view.
Moving this setting into the main configuration file was ill-considered,
perhaps, because that typically causes it to be set before
timezone_abbreviations has been set. Which in turn means that zone
abbreviations don't work, only full zone names.
We could imagine hacking things so that such cases do work, but the
stability of the hack would be questionable, and the value isn't really
that high. Instead just document that you should use a numeric zone
offset or a full zone name.
Per bug #16404 from Reijo Suhonen.
Back-patch to v12 where this was changed.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16404-4603a99603fbd04c@postgresql.org
The following docs are updated:
- High-availaility section
- pg_basebackup
- pg_receivewal
Per the principle of least privilege, we want to encourage users to
interact with those areas using roles that have replication rights, but
superusers were mentioned first.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ECEBD212-7101-41EB-84F3-2F356E4B6401@yesql.se
In commit 33e05f89c5, we have added the option to display WAL usage
statistics in Explain and auto_explain. The display format used two spaces
between each field which is inconsistent with Buffer usage statistics which
is using one space between each field. Change the format to make WAL usage
statistics consistent with Buffer usage statistics.
This commit also changed the usage of "full page writes" to
"full page images" for WAL usage statistics to make it consistent with
other parts of code and docs.
Author: Julien Rouhaud, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Kyotaro Horiguchi and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
The PDF toolchain defaults to laying out all columns of a table with
equal widths, in contrast to the HTML rendering which automatically
varies the column widths to fit the data. In many places, this
results in very badly laid-out tables, with lots of useless whitespace
in some places and text that overruns its cell in other places.
For tables that have reasonably static content, we can improve
matters by adding <colspec> entries to hand-assign the column widths.
This commit does that for a few of the tables that were worst off;
it eliminates close to 200 "contents ... exceed the available area"
warnings in an A4 PDF build.
I also forced align="left" in these tables, overriding the PDF
toolchain's default which is evidently "justify". (The HTML toolchain
seems to default to that already.) Anyplace where things are tight
enough that we need to worry about this, forced justification tends to
look truly awful.
We had a mishmash of <replaceable>, <replaceable class="parameter">,
and <parameter> markup for operator/function arguments. Use <parameter>
consistently for things that are in fact names of parameters (including
OUT parameters), reserving <replaceable> for things that aren't. The
latter class includes some made-up-by-the-docs type class names, like
"numeric_type", as well as placeholders for arguments that don't have
well-defined types. Possibly we could do better with those categories
as well, but for the moment I'm content not to have parameter names
marked up in different ways in different places.
(This commit aligns the earlier sections of chapter 9 with a policy
that I'd arrived at while working on commit 1ad23335f, which is why
the last few sections need no changes.)
The pg_rewind docs currently assert that the state of the target's
data directory after rewind is equivalent to the source's data
directory. This clarifies the documentation to describe that the base
state is further back in time and that the target's data directory will
include the current state from the source of any copied blocks since the
point of divergence.
This commit also improves the section "How It Works":
- Describe the update of the pg_control file.
- Reorganize the list of files and directories ignored during the
rewind.
Author: James Coleman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe-sgqCos7MXF4XiY8rUPy3CEmaCY9EvfhX-DhPhPBF5_A@mail.gmail.com
The libpq parameters ssl{max|min}protocolversion are renamed to use
underscores, to become ssl_{max|min}_protocol_version. The related
environment variables still use the names introduced in commit ff8ca5f
that added the feature.
Per complaint from Peter Eisentraut (this was also mentioned by me in
the original patch review but the issue got discarded).
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b319e449-318d-e691-4997-1327e166fcc4@2ndquadrant.com
Make the markup a bit less ad-hoc. A function-table cell now contains
several <para> units, and we label the ones that contain function
signatures with role="func_signature". The CSS or FO stylesheets then
key off of that to decide how to set the indentation. A very useful
win from this approach is that we can have more than one signature
entry per table cell, simplifying the documentation of closely-related
operators and functions.
This patch mostly just replaces the markup in the tables I converted so
far. But I did alter a couple of places where multiple signatures were
helpful.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5561.1587922854@sss.pgh.pa.us
This includes the usual amount of editorial cleanup, such as
correcting wrong or less-helpful-than-they-could-be examples.
I moved the two tsvector-updating triggers into "9.28 Trigger
Functions", which seems like a better home for them. (I believe
that section didn't exist when this text was originally written.)
Also rearrange that page a bit for more consistency and less
duplication.
In passing, fix erroneous examples of the results of abbrev(cidr)
in datatype.sgml, and do a bit of copy-editing there.
David Johnston reminded me that the per-point calculations being done
by these operators are equivalent to complex multiplication/division.
(Once I would've recognized that immediately, but it's been too long
since I did any of that sort of math.)
Also put in a footnote mentioning that "rotation" of a box doesn't do
what you might expect, as I'd griped about in the referenced thread.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158110996889.1089.4224139874633222837@wrigleys.postgresql.org
This also makes an attempt to flesh out the docs for some of the more
severely underdocumented geometric operators and functions.
This effort exposed that the point <^ point (point_below) and
point >^ point (point_above) operators are misnamed; they should be
<<| and |>>, because they act like the other operators named that
way and not like the other operators named <^ and >^. But I just
documented them that way; fixing it is matter for another patch.
The haphazard datatype coverage of many of the operators is also
now depressingly obvious.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158110996889.1089.4224139874633222837@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Add a couple of lines to make it explicit that indexes, constraints,
triggers are added, removed, or left alone.
Backpatch to pg11.
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200421162038.GA18628@alvherre.pgsql
When a partition is detached, any triggers that had been cloned from its
parent were not properly disentangled from its parent triggers.
This resulted in triggers that could not be dropped because they
depended on the trigger in the trigger in the no-longer-parent table:
ALTER TABLE t DETACH PARTITION t1;
DROP TRIGGER trig ON t1;
ERROR: cannot drop trigger trig on table t1 because trigger trig on table t requires it
HINT: You can drop trigger trig on table t instead.
Moreover the table can no longer be re-attached to its parent, because
the trigger name is already taken:
ALTER TABLE t ATTACH PARTITION t1 FOR VALUES FROM (1)TO(2);
ERROR: trigger "trig" for relation "t1" already exists
The former is a bug introduced in commit 86f575948c. (The latter is
not necessarily a bug, but it makes the bug more uncomfortable.)
To avoid the complexity that would be needed to tell whether the trigger
has a local definition that has to be merged with the one coming from
the parent table, establish the behavior that the trigger is removed
when the table is detached.
Backpatch to pg11.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20200408152412.GZ2228@telsasoft.com
Previously in the "Standby Server Operation" section, pg_ctl promote and
protmote_trigger_file were documented as a method to trigger standby
promotion, but pg_promote() function not.
This commit also adds parentheses into <function>pg_promote</function>
in some docs to make it clearer that a function is being referred to.
Author: Masahiro Ikeda
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Laurenz Albe, Tom Lane, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/de0068417a9f4046bac693cbcc00bdc9@oss.nttdata.com
Commit f2fcad27d5 (9.6 era) added the ability to mark objects as
dependent an extension, but forgot to add a way for such dependencies to
be removed. This commit fixes that oversight.
Strictly speaking this should be backpatched to 9.6, but due to lack of
demand we're not doing so at this time.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200217225333.GA30974@alvherre.pgsql
Reviewed-by: ahsan hadi <ahsan.hadi@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed <ibrar.ahmad@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Along the way, update the older examples for bytea to use "hex"
output format. That lets us get rid of the lame disclaimer about
how the examples assume bytea_output = escape, which was only half
true anyway because none of the more-recently-added examples had
paid any attention to that.
I took the opportunity to do some copy-editing in this area as well,
and to add some new material such as a note about BETWEEN's syntactical
peculiarities.
Of note is that quite a few of the examples of transcendental functions
needed to be updated, because the displayed output no longer matched
what you get on a modern server. I believe some of these cases are
side-effects of the new Ryu algorithm in float8out. Others appear to be
because the examples predate the addition of type numeric, and were
expecting that float8 calculations would be done although the given
syntax would actually lead to calling the numeric function nowadays.
Jonathan Katz felt that slightly different indentation settings made
for a better-looking result, so sync stylesheet-fo.xsl (for PDF) and
stylesheet.css (for non-website-style HTML) with those choices.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/31464.1587156281@sss.pgh.pa.us
The table layout ideas proposed in commit e894c6183 were not as widely
popular as I'd hoped. After discussion, we've settled on a layout
that's effectively a single-column table with cell contents much like a
<varlistentry> description of the function or operator; though we're not
actually using <varlistentry>, because it'd add way too much vertical
space. Instead the effect is accomplished using line-break processing
instructions to separate the description and example(s), plus CSS or FO
customizations to produce indentation of all but the first line in each
cell. While technically this is a bit grotty, it does have the
advantage that we won't need to write nearly as much boilerplate markup.
This patch updates tables 9.30, 9.31, and 9.33 (which were touched by
the previous patch) to the revised style, and additionally converts
table 9.10. A lot of work still remains to do, but hopefully it won't
be too controversial.
Thanks to Andrew Dunstan, Pierre Giraud, Robert Haas, Alvaro Herrera,
David Johnston, Jonathan Katz, Isaac Morland for valuable ideas.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8691.1586798003@sss.pgh.pa.us
Earlier we were inconsistent in allowing the usage of parallel and
full options. Change it such that we disallow them only when they are
combined in a way that we don't support.
In passing, improve the comments in some of the existing tests of parallel
vacuum.
Reported-by: Tushar Ahuja
Author: Justin Pryzby, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Sawada Masahiko, Michael Paquier, Mahendra Singh Thalor and
Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/58c8d171-e665-6fa3-a9d3-d9423b694dae%40enterprisedb.com
This commit prevents pg_basebackup from receiving backup_manifest file
when --no-manifest is specified. Previously, when pg_basebackup was
writing a tarfile to stdout, it tried to receive backup_manifest file even
when --no-manifest was specified, and reported an error.
Also remove unused -m option from pg_basebackup.
Also fix typo in BASE_BACKUP command documentation.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/01e3ed3a-8729-5aaa-ca84-e60e3ca59db8@oss.nttdata.com
Now that warnings are enabled across the board, this code that tries to
print an undef variable emits one. Silently printing the empty string
achieves the previous behavior.
Author: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan <andrew.dunstan@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E1jO1VT-0008Qk-TM@gemulon.postgresql.org
We've had a mixture of the warnings pragma, the -w switch on the shebang
line, and no warnings at all. This patch removes the -w swicth and add
the warnings pragma to all perl sources missing it. It raises the
severity of the TestingAndDebugging::RequireUseWarnings perlcritic
policy to level 5, so that we catch any future violations.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200412074245.GB623763@rfd.leadboat.com
We've long fought with the draconian space limitations of our
traditional table layout for describing SQL functions and operators.
This commit introduces a new approach, though so far I've only applied
it to a few of those tables. The new way makes use of DocBook's support
for different layouts in different rows of a table, and allows the
descriptions and examples for a function or operator to run to several
lines without as much ugliness and wasted space as before.
The core layout concept is now
Name Signature
Description
Example Example Result
so that a function or operator really has three table rows not one,
but we group them to look like one row by having the name column
have only one entry for all three rows. (Actually, there could be
four or more rows if you wanted to have more than one example, which
is another thing that was painful before but works easily now.)
This is handled by a "morerows" annotation on the name entry, which
isn't perfect (notably, the toolchain is not smart enough to avoid
breaking these row groups across PDF pages) but there seems no better
solution in DocBook. The name column is normally fairly narrow,
allowing plenty of space for the other column(s), and not wasting too
much space when one of the other components runs to multiple lines.
The varying row layout is managed by defining named "spans" and then
tagging entries with a "spanname" of "name", "sig", "desc", "example",
or "exresult". This provides a bit of semantic annotation to go with
the formatting improvement, which seems like a good thing. (It seems
that we have to re-define these spans afresh for each table, which is
annoying, but it's not any worse than the duplication involved in
the table headers. At least that gives us an opportunity to vary the
relative column widths per-table, which is handy since function tables
sometimes need much wider name columns than operator tables.)
Signature entries should be written in the style
<function>fname</function>(<type>typename</type> ...)
<returnvalue>typename</returnvalue>
The <returnvalue> tag produces a right arrow before the result type
name. (I'll document that convention in a user-visible place later.)
While this provides significantly more horizontal space than before
for examples, it's still true that PDF output is a lot narrower than
typical webpage viewing windows, so some examples need to be broken
in places where there is no whitespace. I've added &zwsp; markers in
suitable places to allow the tables to render warning-free in PDF.
I've so far converted only the date/time operator, date/time function,
and enum function tables in sections 9.9 and 9.10; these were chosen
to provide a reasonable sample of the formatting problems that need
to be solved. Assuming that this looks good on the website and doesn't
provoke howls of anguish, I'll work on the other similar tables in the
near future.
There's a moderate amount of new editorial content in this patch along
with the raw formatting changes; for instance I had to write text
descriptions for operators that lacked them. I failed to resist the
temptation to improve some other descriptions and examples, too.
Patch by me, with thanks to Alexander Lakhin for assistance with
figuring out some formatting issues.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9326.1581457869@sss.pgh.pa.us
We already had a couple of places using zero-width spaces for formatting
hackery, and we're going to need more if we ever want the PDF manuals to
look decent. But please let's not write hard-coded Unicode escapes.
We can avoid that by using a custom entity, which also provides a place
to put a teeny bit of documentation about what it is and how to use it.
I'd previously posted a patch using "&break;" for this, but on reflection
that would be horrible to grep for. Instead let's use "&zwsp;", based
on the name of the Unicode symbol ("zero width space").
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9326.1581457869@sss.pgh.pa.us
Commit ac8623760 "fixed" a typo in an example of what would happen in
the event of a typo. Restore the original typo and add a comment about
its intentionality. Backpatch to 12 where the error was introduced.
Per report from irc user Nicolás Alvarez.
Add a DEBUG1 message indicating that verification of the index structure
is underway. Also reduce the severity level of the existing "tree
level" debug message to DEBUG1. It should never have been made DEBUG2.
Any B-Tree index with more than a couple of levels will generally also
have so many pages that the per-page DEBUG2 messages will become
completely unmanageable.
In passing, add a new "Tip" to the docs that advises users that run into
corruption that the debug messages might provide useful additional
context.
The docs explained that a SHARE ROW EXCLUSIVE lock is needed on the
referenced table, but failed to say the same about the table being
altered. Since the page says that ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock is taken
unless otherwise stated, this left readers with the wrong conclusion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/834603375.3470346.1586482852542@mail.yahoo.com
CREATE GROUP is an exact alias for CREATE ROLE, and CREATE USER is
almost an exact alias, as can easily be confirmed by checking the
code. So the man page syntax descriptions ought to match up. The
last few additions of role options seem to have forgotten to update
create_group.sgml, though. Fix that, and add a naggy reminder to
create_role.sgml in hopes of not forgetting again.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158647836143.655.9853963229391401576@wrigleys.postgresql.org
The added note explains that the numbers of planning and execution in
the statement are not always expected to match because their statistics are
updated at their respective end phase, and only for successful operations.
Author: Pascal Legrand, Julien Rouhaud, tweaked a bit by Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1585857868967-0.post@n3.nabble.com
To control whether partition changes are replicated using their own
identity and schema or an ancestor's, add a new parameter that can be
set per publication named 'publish_via_partition_root'.
This allows replicating a partitioned table into a different partition
structure on the subscriber.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
0f5ca02f53 introduces 3 new keywords. It appears to be too much for relatively
small feature. Given now we past feature freeze, it's already late for
discussion of the new syntax. So, revert.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28209.1586294824%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Previously, the partitionwise join technique only allowed partitionwise
join when input partitioned tables had exactly the same partition
bounds. This commit extends the technique to some cases when the tables
have different partition bounds, by using an advanced partition-matching
algorithm introduced by this commit. For both the input partitioned
tables, the algorithm checks whether every partition of one input
partitioned table only matches one partition of the other input
partitioned table at most, and vice versa. In such a case the join
between the tables can be broken down into joins between the matching
partitions, so the algorithm produces the pairs of the matching
partitions, plus the partition bounds for the join relation, to allow
partitionwise join for computing the join. Currently, the algorithm
works for list-partitioned and range-partitioned tables, but not
hash-partitioned tables. See comments in partition_bounds_merge().
Ashutosh Bapat and Etsuro Fujita, most of regression tests by Rajkumar
Raghuwanshi, some of the tests by Mark Dilger and Amul Sul, reviewed by
Dmitry Dolgov and Amul Sul, with additional review at various points by
Ashutosh Bapat, Mark Dilger, Robert Haas, Antonin Houska, Amit Langote,
Justin Pryzby, and Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFjFpRdjQvaUEV5DJX3TW6pU5eq54NCkadtxHX2JiJG_GvbrCA@mail.gmail.com
Replication slots are useful to retain data that may be needed by a
replication system. But experience has shown that allowing them to
retain excessive data can lead to the primary failing because of running
out of space. This new feature allows the user to configure a maximum
amount of space to be reserved using the new option
max_slot_wal_keep_size. Slots that overrun that space are invalidated
at checkpoint time, enabling the storage to be released.
Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <sawada.mshk@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais <jgdr@dalibo.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170228.122736.123383594.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
We invented \gx to allow the "\pset expanded" flag to be forced on
for the duration of one command output, but that turns out to not
be nearly enough to satisfy the demand for variant output formats.
Hence, make it possible to change any pset option(s) for the duration
of a single command output, by writing "option=value ..." inside
parentheses, for example
\g (format=csv csv_fieldsep='\t') somefile
\gx can now be understood as a shorthand for including expanded=on
inside the parentheses.
Patch by me, expanding on a proposal by Pavel Stehule
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRBx9OnBPRJVtfA5ycUpySge-XootAXAsv_4rrkHxJ8eRg@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds following optional clause to BEGIN and START TRANSACTION
commands.
WAIT FOR LSN lsn [ TIMEOUT timeout ]
New clause pospones transaction start till given lsn is applied on standby.
This clause allows user be sure, that changes previously made on primary would
be visible on standby.
New shared memory struct is used to track awaited lsn per backend. Recovery
process wakes up backend once required lsn is applied.
Author: Ivan Kartyshov, Anna Akenteva
Reviewed-by: Craig Ringer, Thomas Munro, Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Ants Aasma, Dmitry Ivanov, Simon Riggs
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0240c26c-9f84-30ea-fca9-93ab2df5f305%40postgrespro.ru
WITH TIES is an option to the FETCH FIRST N ROWS clause (the SQL
standard's spelling of LIMIT), where you additionally get rows that
compare equal to the last of those N rows by the columns in the
mandatory ORDER BY clause.
There was a proposal by Andrew Gierth to implement this functionality in
a more powerful way that would yield more features, but the other patch
had not been finished at this time, so we decided to use this one for
now in the spirit of incremental development.
Author: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CALAY4q9ky7rD_A4vf=FVQvCGngm3LOes-ky0J6euMrg=_Se+ag@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87o8wvz253.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
Since the existing bit number argument can't exceed INT32_MAX, it's
not possible for these functions to manipulate bits beyond the first
256MB of a bytea value. Lift that restriction by redeclaring the
bit number arguments as int8 (which requires a catversion bump,
hence is not back-patchable).
The similarly-named functions for bit/varbit don't really have a
problem because we restrict those types to at most VARBITMAXLEN bits;
hence leave them alone.
While here, extend the encode/decode functions in utils/adt/encode.c
to allow dealing with values wider than 1GB. This is not a live bug
or restriction in current usage, because no input could be more than
1GB, and since none of the encoders can expand a string more than 4X,
the result size couldn't overflow uint32. But it might be desirable
to support more in future, so make the input length values size_t
and the potential-output-length values uint64.
Also add some test cases to improve the miserable code coverage
of these functions.
Movead Li, editorialized some by me; also reviewed by Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200312115135445367128@highgo.ca
The txid_XXX family of fmgr functions exposes 64 bit transaction IDs to
users as int8. Now that we have an SQL type xid8 for FullTransactionId,
define a new set of functions including pg_current_xact_id() and
pg_current_snapshot() based on that. Keep the old functions around too,
for now.
It's a bit sneaky to use the same C functions for both, but since the
binary representation is identical except for the signedness of the
type, and since older functions are the ones using the wrong signedness,
and since we'll presumably drop the older ones after a reasonable period
of time, it seems reasonable to switch to FullTransactionId internally
and share the code for both.
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Takao Fujii <btfujiitkp@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai <imai.yoshikazu@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190725000636.666m5mad25wfbrri%40alap3.anarazel.de
Similar to xid, but 64 bits wide. This new type is suitable for use in
various system views and administration functions.
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Takao Fujii <btfujiitkp@oss.nttdata.com>
Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai <imai.yoshikazu@fujitsu.com>
Reviewed-by: Mark Dilger <mark.dilger@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190725000636.666m5mad25wfbrri%40alap3.anarazel.de
Incremental Sort is an optimized variant of multikey sort for cases when
the input is already sorted by a prefix of the requested sort keys. For
example when the relation is already sorted by (key1, key2) and we need
to sort it by (key1, key2, key3) we can simply split the input rows into
groups having equal values in (key1, key2), and only sort/compare the
remaining column key3.
This has a number of benefits:
- Reduced memory consumption, because only a single group (determined by
values in the sorted prefix) needs to be kept in memory. This may also
eliminate the need to spill to disk.
- Lower startup cost, because Incremental Sort produce results after each
prefix group, which is beneficial for plans where startup cost matters
(like for example queries with LIMIT clause).
We consider both Sort and Incremental Sort, and decide based on costing.
The implemented algorithm operates in two different modes:
- Fetching a minimum number of tuples without check of equality on the
prefix keys, and sorting on all columns when safe.
- Fetching all tuples for a single prefix group and then sorting by
comparing only the remaining (non-prefix) keys.
We always start in the first mode, and employ a heuristic to switch into
the second mode if we believe it's beneficial - the goal is to minimize
the number of unnecessary comparions while keeping memory consumption
below work_mem.
This is a very old patch series. The idea was originally proposed by
Alexander Korotkov back in 2013, and then revived in 2017. In 2018 the
patch was taken over by James Coleman, who wrote and rewrote most of the
current code.
There were many reviewers/contributors since 2013 - I've done my best to
pick the most active ones, and listed them in this commit message.
Author: James Coleman, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andreas Karlsson, Marti Raudsepp, Peter Geoghegan, Robert Haas, Thomas Munro, Antonin Houska, Andres Freund, Alexander Kuzmenkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdscOX5an71nHd8WSUH6GNOCf=V7wgDaTXdDd9=goN-gfA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfds1waRZ=NOmueYq0sx1ZSCnt+5QJvizT8ndT2=etZEeAQ@mail.gmail.com
Mainly, this adds support code in logical/worker.c for applying
replicated operations whose target is a partitioned table to its
relevant partitions.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds a new option WAL similar to existing option BUFFERS in the
EXPLAIN command. This option allows to include information on WAL record
generation added by commit df3b181499 in EXPLAIN output.
This also allows the WAL usage information to be displayed via
the auto_explain module. A new parameter auto_explain.log_wal controls
whether WAL usage statistics are printed when an execution plan is logged.
This parameter has no effect unless auto_explain.log_analyze is enabled.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds three new columns in pg_stat_statements output to
display WAL usage statistics added by commit df3b181499.
This commit doesn't bump the version of pg_stat_statements as the
same is done for this release in commit 17e0328224.
Author: Kirill Bychik and Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Fujii Masao, Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB-hujrP8ZfUkvL5OYETipQwA=e3n7oqHFU=4ZLxWS_Cza3kQQ@mail.gmail.com
Until now, only selected bulk operations (e.g. COPY) did this. If a
given relfilenode received both a WAL-skipping COPY and a WAL-logged
operation (e.g. INSERT), recovery could lose tuples from the COPY. See
src/backend/access/transam/README section "Skipping WAL for New
RelFileNode" for the new coding rules. Maintainers of table access
methods should examine that section.
To maintain data durability, just before commit, we choose between an
fsync of the relfilenode and copying its contents to WAL. A new GUC,
wal_skip_threshold, guides that choice. If this change slows a workload
that creates small, permanent relfilenodes under wal_level=minimal, try
adjusting wal_skip_threshold. Users setting a timeout on COMMIT may
need to adjust that timeout, and log_min_duration_statement analysis
will reflect time consumption moving to COMMIT from commands like COPY.
Internally, this requires a reliable determination of whether
RollbackAndReleaseCurrentSubTransaction() would unlink a relation's
current relfilenode. Introduce rd_firstRelfilenodeSubid. Amend the
specification of rd_createSubid such that the field is zero when a new
rel has an old rd_node. Make relcache.c retain entries for certain
dropped relations until end of transaction.
Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC, since this introduces XLOG_GIST_ASSIGN_LSN.
Future servers accept older WAL, so this bump is discretionary.
Kyotaro Horiguchi, reviewed (in earlier, similar versions) by Robert
Haas. Heikki Linnakangas and Michael Paquier implemented earlier
designs that materially clarified the problem. Reviewed, in earlier
designs, by Andrew Dunstan, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Tom Lane,
Fujii Masao, and Simon Riggs. Reported by Martijn van Oosterhout.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20150702220524.GA9392@svana.org
A manifest is a JSON document which includes (1) the file name, size,
last modification time, and an optional checksum for each file backed
up, (2) timelines and LSNs for whatever WAL will need to be replayed
to make the backup consistent, and (3) a checksum for the manifest
itself. By default, we use CRC-32C when checksumming data files,
because we are trying to detect corruption and user error, not foil an
adversary. However, pg_basebackup and the server-side BASE_BACKUP
command now have options to select a different algorithm, so users
wanting a cryptographic hash function can select SHA-224, SHA-256,
SHA-384, or SHA-512. Users not wanting file checksums at all can
disable them, or disable generating of the backup manifest altogether.
Using a cryptographic hash function in place of CRC-32C consumes
significantly more CPU cycles, which may slow down backups in some
cases.
A new tool called pg_validatebackup can validate a backup against the
manifest. If no checksums are present, it can still check that the
right files exist and that they have the expected sizes. If checksums
are present, it can also verify that each file has the expected
checksum. Additionally, it calls pg_waldump to verify that the
expected WAL files are present and parseable. Only plain format
backups can be validated directly, but tar format backups can be
validated after extracting them.
Robert Haas, with help, ideas, review, and testing from David Steele,
Stephen Frost, Andrew Dunstan, Rushabh Lathia, Suraj Kharage, Tushar
Ahuja, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, Mark Dilger, Davinder Singh, Jeevan
Chalke, Amit Kapila, Andres Freund, and Noah Misch.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZV8dw1H2bzZ9xkKwdrk8+XYa+DC9H=F7heO2zna5T6qg@mail.gmail.com
More work is still needed, but this is a good start.
Co-authored-by: Corey Huinker <corey.huinker@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Jürgen Purtz <juergen@purtz.de>
Co-authored-by: Roger Harkavy <rogerharkavy@gmail.com>
Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADkLM=eP6HOeqDjn0FdXuGRusQu4oWH_LFsKjjafmhvWD=aSpQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit introduces new wait events RecoveryConflictSnapshot and
RecoveryConflictTablespace. The former is reported while waiting for
recovery conflict resolution on a vacuum cleanup. The latter is reported
while waiting for recovery conflict resolution on dropping tablespace.
Also this commit changes the code so that the wait event Lock is reported
while waiting in ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs() for recovery
conflict resolution on a lock. Basically the wait event Lock is reported
during that wait, but previously was not reported only when that wait
happened in ResolveRecoveryConflictWithVirtualXIDs().
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+fd4k4mXWTwfQLS3RPwGr4xnfAEs1ysFfgYHvmmoUgv6Zxvmg@mail.gmail.com
This option is similar to \gset, except that it is able to store all
results from combined SQL queries into separate variables. If a query
returns multiple rows, the last result is stored and if a query returns
no rows, nothing is stored.
While on it, add a TAP test for \gset to check for a failure when a
query returns multiple rows.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Ibrar Ahmed, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904081914200.2529@lancre
The primary motivation for this change is that it will be used by the
upcoming patch to add backup manifests, but it also seems to have some
potential more general use.
Andres Freund and Robert Haas
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20200330020814.nspra4mvby42yoa4@alap3.anarazel.de
This patch replaces the boolean GUC log_parameters_on_error introduced
by commit ba79cb5dc with an integer log_parameter_max_length_on_error,
adding the ability to specify how many bytes to trim each logged
parameter value to. (The previous coding hard-wired that choice at
64 bytes.)
In addition, add a new parameter log_parameter_max_length that provides
similar control over truncation of query parameters that are logged in
response to statement-logging options, as opposed to errors. Previous
releases always logged such parameters in full, possibly causing log
bloat.
For backwards compatibility with prior releases,
log_parameter_max_length defaults to -1 (log in full), while
log_parameter_max_length_on_error defaults to 0 (no logging).
Per discussion, log_parameter_max_length is SUSET since the DBA should
control routine logging behavior, but log_parameter_max_length_on_error
is USERSET because it also affects errcontext data sent back to the
client.
Alexey Bashtanov, editorialized a little by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b10493cc-a399-a03a-67c7-068f2791ee50@imap.cc
This adds SQL expressions NORMALIZE() and IS NORMALIZED to convert and
check Unicode normal forms, per SQL standard.
To support fast IS NORMALIZED tests, we pull in a new data file
DerivedNormalizationProps.txt from Unicode and build a lookup table
from that, using techniques similar to ones already used for other
Unicode data. make update-unicode will keep it up to date. We only
build and use these tables for the NFC and NFKC forms, because they
are too big for NFD and NFKD and the improvement is not significant
enough there.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson <andreas@proxel.se>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/c1909f27-c269-2ed9-12f8-3ab72c8caf7a@2ndquadrant.com
This commit makes pg_stat_statements support new GUC
pg_stat_statements.track_planning. If this option is enabled,
pg_stat_statements tracks the planning statistics of the statements,
e.g., the number of times the statement was planned, the total time
spent planning the statement, etc. This feature is useful to check
the statements that it takes a long time to plan. Previously since
pg_stat_statements tracked only the execution statistics, we could
not use that for the purpose.
The planning and execution statistics are stored at the end of
each phase separately. So there are not always one-to-one relationship
between them. For example, if the statement is successfully planned
but fails in the execution phase, only its planning statistics are stored.
This may cause the users to be able to see different pg_stat_statements
results from the previous version. To avoid this,
pg_stat_statements.track_planning needs to be disabled.
This commit bumps the version of pg_stat_statements to 1.8
since it changes the definition of pg_stat_statements function.
Author: Julien Rouhaud, Pascal Legrand, Thomas Munro, Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Tomas Vondra, Yoshikazu Imai, Haribabu Kommi, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwFx_=DO-Gu-MfPW3VQ4qC7TfVdH2zHmvZfrGv6fQ3D-Tw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0e59Y_6Q_YXYCTHZkqOc6H2pJ54C_Xe=VFu50Aqqp_sA@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DB6PR0301MB21352F6210E3B11934B0DCC790B00@DB6PR0301MB2135.eurprd03.prod.outlook.com
There's a number of SLRU caches used to access important data like clog,
commit timestamps, multixact, asynchronous notifications, etc. Until now
we had no easy way to monitor these shared caches, compute hit ratios,
number of reads/writes etc.
This commit extends the statistics collector to track this information
for a predefined list of SLRUs, and also introduces a new system view
pg_stat_slru displaying the data.
The list of built-in SLRUs is fixed, but additional SLRUs may be defined
in extensions. Unfortunately, there's no suitable registry of SLRUs, so
this patch simply defines a fixed list of SLRUs with entries for the
built-in ones and one entry for all additional SLRUs. Extensions adding
their own SLRU are fairly rare, so this seems acceptable.
This patch only allows monitoring of SLRUs, not tuning. The SLRU sizes
are still fixed (hard-coded in the code) and it's not entirely clear
which of the SLRUs might need a GUC to tune size. In a way, allowing us
to determine that is one of the goals of this patch.
Bump catversion as the patch introduces new functions and system view.
Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20200119143707.gyinppnigokesjok@development
Quite a few matching operators such as JSONB's @> used "contsel" and
"contjoinsel" as their selectivity estimators. That was a bad idea,
because (a) contsel is only a stub, yielding a fixed default estimate,
and (b) that default is 0.001, meaning we estimate these operators as
five times more selective than equality, which is surely pretty silly.
There's a good model for improving this in ltree's ltreeparentsel():
for any "var OP constant" query, we can try applying the operator
to all of the column's MCV and histogram values, taking the latter
as being a random sample of the non-MCV values. That code is
actually 100% generic, except for the question of exactly what
default selectivity ought to be plugged in when we don't have stats.
Hence, migrate the guts of ltreeparentsel() into the core code, provide
wrappers "matchingsel" and "matchingjoinsel" with a more-appropriate
default estimate, and use those for the non-geometric operators that
formerly used contsel (mostly JSONB containment operators and tsquery
matching).
Also apply this code to some match-like operators in hstore, ltree, and
pg_trgm, including the former users of ltreeparentsel as well as ones
that improperly used contsel. Since commit 911e70207 just created new
versions of those extensions that we haven't released yet, we can sneak
this change into those new versions instead of having to create an
additional generation of update scripts.
Patch by me, reviewed by Alexey Bashtanov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/12237.1582833074@sss.pgh.pa.us
The previously listed total of 179 does not appear to be correct for
SQL:2016 anymore. (Previous SQL versions had slightly different
feature sets, so it's plausible that it was once correct.) The
currently correct count is the number of rows in the respective tables
in appendix F in SQL parts 2 and 11, minus 2 features that are listed
twice. Thus the correct count is currently 177. This also matches
the number of Core entries the built documentation currently shows, so
it's internally consistent.
Old versions of opclass parameters patch supported ability to specify DEFAULT
as the opclass name in CREATE INDEX command. This ability was removed in the
final version, but 911e702077 still mentions that in the documentation.
pg_rewind needs to copy from the source cluster to the target cluster a
set of relation blocks changed from the previous checkpoint where WAL
forked up to the end of WAL on the target. Building this list of
relation blocks requires a range of WAL segments that may not be present
anymore on the target's pg_wal, causing pg_rewind to fail. It is
possible to work around this issue by copying manually the WAL segments
needed but this may lead to some extra and actually useless work.
This commit introduces a new option allowing pg_rewind to use a
restore_command while doing the rewind by grabbing the parameter value
of restore_command from the target cluster configuration. This allows
the rewind operation to be more reliable, so as only the WAL segments
needed by the rewind are restored from the archives.
In order to be able to do that, a new routine is added to src/common/ to
allow frontend tools to restore files from archives using an
already-built restore command. This version is more simple than the
backend equivalent as there is no need to handle the non-recovery case.
Author: Alexey Kondratov
Reviewed-by: Andrey Borodin, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Alexander
Korotkov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a3acff50-5a0d-9a2c-b3b2-ee36168955c1@postgrespro.ru
The existing implementation of the ltree ~ lquery match operator is
sufficiently complex and undocumented that it's hard to tell exactly
what it does. But one thing it clearly gets wrong is the combination
of NOT symbols (!) and '*' symbols. A pattern such as '*.!foo.*'
should, by any ordinary understanding of regular expression behavior,
match any ltree that has at least one label that's not "foo". As best
we can tell by experimentation, what it's actually matching is any
ltree in which *no* label is "foo". That's surprising, and not at all
what the documentation says.
Now, that's arguably a useful behavior, so if we rewrite to fix the
bug we should provide some other way to get it. To do so, add the
ability to attach lquery quantifiers to non-'*' items as well as '*'s.
Then the pattern '!foo{,}' expresses "any ltree in which no label is
foo". For backwards compatibility, the default quantifier for non-'*'
items has to be "{1}", although the default for '*' items is '{,}'.
I wouldn't have done it like that in a green field, but it's not
totally horrible.
Armed with that, rewrite checkCond() from scratch. Treating '*' and
non-'*' items alike makes it simpler, not more complicated, so that
the function actually gets a lot shorter than it was.
Filip Rembiałkowski, Tom Lane, Nikita Glukhov, per a very
ancient bug report from M. Palm
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rww=waX2Oo6q+MbMSiZ9ktdj6eaJj0cQzNu=Ry2cCDij5fw@mail.gmail.com
The original implementation disallowed using OVERRIDING USER VALUE on
identity columns defined as GENERATED ALWAYS, which is not per
standard. So allow that now.
Expand documentation and tests around this.
Author: Dean Rasheed <dean.a.rasheed@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Vik Fearing <vik@postgresfriends.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAEZATCVrh2ufCwmzzM%3Dk_OfuLhTTPBJCdFkimst2kry4oHepuQ%40mail.gmail.com
PostgreSQL provides set of template index access methods, where opclasses have
much freedom in the semantics of indexing. These index AMs are GiST, GIN,
SP-GiST and BRIN. There opclasses define representation of keys, operations on
them and supported search strategies. So, it's natural that opclasses may be
faced some tradeoffs, which require user-side decision. This commit implements
opclass parameters allowing users to set some values, which tell opclass how to
index the particular dataset.
This commit doesn't introduce new storage in system catalog. Instead it uses
pg_attribute.attoptions, which is used for table column storage options but
unused for index attributes.
In order to evade changing signature of each opclass support function, we
implement unified way to pass options to opclass support functions. Options
are set to fn_expr as the constant bytea expression. It's possible due to the
fact that opclass support functions are executed outside of expressions, so
fn_expr is unused for them.
This commit comes with some examples of opclass options usage. We parametrize
signature length in GiST. That applies to multiple opclasses: tsvector_ops,
gist__intbig_ops, gist_ltree_ops, gist__ltree_ops, gist_trgm_ops and
gist_hstore_ops. Also we parametrize maximum number of integer ranges for
gist__int_ops. However, the main future usage of this feature is expected
to be json, where users would be able to specify which way to index particular
json parts.
Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/d22c3a18-31c7-1879-fc11-4c1ce2f5e5af%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Nikita Glukhov, revised by me
Reviwed-by: Nikolay Shaplov, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Tomas Vondra, Alvaro Herrera
When certain parameters are changed on a physical replication primary,
this is communicated to standbys using the XLOG_PARAMETER_CHANGE WAL
record. The standby then checks whether its own settings are at least
as big as the ones on the primary. If not, the standby shuts down
with a fatal error.
The correspondence of settings between primary and standby is required
because those settings influence certain shared memory sizings that
are required for processing WAL records that the primary might send.
For example, if the primary sends a prepared transaction, the standby
must have had max_prepared_transaction set appropriately or it won't
be able to process those WAL records.
However, fatally shutting down the standby immediately upon receipt of
the parameter change record might be a bit of an overreaction. The
resources related to those settings are not required immediately at
that point, and might never be required if the activity on the primary
does not exhaust all those resources. If we just let the standby roll
on with recovery, it will eventually produce an appropriate error when
those resources are used.
So this patch relaxes this a bit. Upon receipt of
XLOG_PARAMETER_CHANGE, we still check the settings but only issue a
warning and set a global flag if there is a problem. Then when we
actually hit the resource issue and the flag was set, we issue another
warning message with relevant information. At that point we pause
recovery, so a hot standby remains usable. We also repeat the last
warning message once a minute so it is harder to miss or ignore.
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <masahiko.sawada@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/4ad69a4c-cc9b-0dfe-0352-8b1b0cd36c7b@2ndquadrant.com
The documentation says that the max length is 255 bytes, but
code inspection says it's actually 255 characters; and relevant
lengths are stored as uint16 so that that works.
These uint16 fields could be overflowed by excessively long input,
producing strange results. Complain for invalid input.
Likewise check for out-of-range values of the repeat counts in lquery.
(We don't try too hard on that one, notably not bothering to detect
if atoi's result has overflowed.)
Also detect length overflow in ltree_concat.
In passing, be more consistent about whether "syntax error" messages
include the type name. Also, clarify the documentation about what
the size limit is.
This has been broken for a long time, so back-patch to all supported
branches.
Nikita Glukhov, reviewed by Benjie Gillam and Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rww=waX2Oo6q+MbMSiZ9ktdj6eaJj0cQzNu=Ry2cCDij5fw@mail.gmail.com
Traditionally autovacuum has only ever invoked a worker based on the
estimated number of dead tuples in a table and for anti-wraparound
purposes. For the latter, with certain classes of tables such as
insert-only tables, anti-wraparound vacuums could be the first vacuum that
the table ever receives. This could often lead to autovacuum workers being
busy for extended periods of time due to having to potentially freeze
every page in the table. This could be particularly bad for very large
tables. New clusters, or recently pg_restored clusters could suffer even
more as many large tables may have the same relfrozenxid, which could
result in large numbers of tables requiring an anti-wraparound vacuum all
at once.
Here we aim to reduce the work required by anti-wraparound and aggressive
vacuums in general, by triggering autovacuum when the table has received
enough INSERTs. This is controlled by adding two new GUCs and reloptions;
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold and
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_scale_factor. These work exactly the same as the
existing scale factor and threshold controls, only base themselves off the
number of inserts since the last vacuum, rather than the number of dead
tuples. New controls were added rather than reusing the existing
controls, to allow these new vacuums to be tuned independently and perhaps
even completely disabled altogether, which can be done by setting
autovacuum_vacuum_insert_threshold to -1.
We make no attempt to skip index cleanup operations on these vacuums as
they may trigger for an insert-mostly table which continually doesn't have
enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum for the purpose of removing
those dead tuples. If we were to skip cleaning the indexes in this case,
then it is possible for the index(es) to become bloated over time.
There are additional benefits to triggering autovacuums based on inserts,
as tables which never contain enough dead tuples to trigger an autovacuum
are now more likely to receive a vacuum, which can mark more of the table
as "allvisible" and encourage the query planner to make use of Index Only
Scans.
Currently, we still obey vacuum_freeze_min_age when triggering these new
autovacuums based on INSERTs. For large insert-only tables, it may be
beneficial to lower the table's autovacuum_freeze_min_age so that tuples
are eligible to be frozen sooner. Here we've opted not to zero that for
these types of vacuums, since the table may just be insert-mostly and we
may otherwise freeze tuples that are still destined to be updated or
removed in the near future.
There was some debate to what exactly the new scale factor and threshold
should default to. For now, these are set to 0.2 and 1000, respectively.
There may be some motivation to adjust these before the release.
Author: Laurenz Albe, Darafei Praliaskouski
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Masahiko Sawada, Chris Travers, Andres Freund, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC8Q8t%2Bj36G_bLF%3D%2B0iMo6jGNWnLnWb1tujXuJr-%2Bx8ZCCTqoQ%40mail.gmail.com
The parameters primary_conninfo, primary_slot_name and
wal_receiver_create_temp_slot can now be changed with a simple "reload"
signal, no longer requiring a server restart. This is achieved by
signalling the walreceiver process to terminate and having it start
again with the new values.
Thanks to Andres Freund, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Fujii Masao for discussion.
Author: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/19513901543181143@sas1-19a94364928d.qloud-c.yandex.net
Commit 3297308278 gave walreceiver the ability to create and use a
temporary replication slot, and made it controllable by a GUC (enabled
by default) that can be changed with SIGHUP. That's useful but has two
problems: one, it's possible to cause the origin server to fill its disk
if the slot doesn't advance in time; and also there's a disconnect
between state passed down via the startup process and GUCs that
walreceiver reads directly.
We handle the first problem by setting the option to disabled by
default. If the user enables it, its on their head to make sure that
disk doesn't fill up.
We handle the second problem by passing the flag via startup rather than
having walreceiver acquire it directly, and making it PGC_POSTMASTER
(which ensures a walreceiver always has the fresh value). A future
commit can relax this (to PGC_SIGHUP again) by having the startup
process signal walreceiver to shutdown whenever the value changes.
Author: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200122055510.GH174860@paquier.xyz
The new command-line switch --include-foreign-data=PATTERN lets the user
specify foreign servers from which to dump foreign table data. This can
be refined by further inclusion/exclusion switches, so that the user has
full control over which tables to dump.
A limitation is that this doesn't work in combination with parallel
dumps, for implementation reasons. This might be lifted in the future,
but requires shuffling some code around.
Author: Luis Carril <luis.carril@swarm64.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Surafel Temesgen <surafel3000@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: vignesh C <vignesh21@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndQuadrant.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/LEJPR01MB0185483C0079D2F651B16231E7FC0@LEJPR01MB0185.DEUPRD01.PROD.OUTLOOK.DE
Now that we require C99, we can depend on __VA_ARGS__ to work, and
revising ereport() to use it has several significant benefits:
* The extra parentheses around the auxiliary function calls are now
optional. Aside from being a bit less ugly, this removes a common
gotcha for new contributors, because in some cases the compiler errors
you got from forgetting them were unintelligible.
* The auxiliary function calls are now evaluated as a comma expression
list rather than as extra arguments to errfinish(). This means that
compilers can be expected to warn about no-op expressions in the list,
allowing detection of several other common mistakes such as forgetting
to add errmsg(...) when converting an elog() call to ereport().
* Unlike the situation with extra function arguments, comma expressions
are guaranteed to be evaluated left-to-right, so this removes platform
dependency in the order of the auxiliary function calls. While that
dependency hasn't caused us big problems in the past, this change does
allow dropping some rather shaky assumptions around errcontext() domain
handling.
There's no intention to make wholesale changes of existing ereport
calls, but as proof-of-concept this patch removes the extra parens
from a couple of calls in postgres.c.
While new code can be written either way, code intended to be
back-patched will need to use extra parens for awhile yet. It seems
worth back-patching this change into v12, so as to reduce the window
where we have to be careful about that by one year. Hence, this patch
is careful to preserve ABI compatibility; a followup HEAD-only patch
will make some additional simplifications.
Andres Freund and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+fd4k6N8EjNvZpM8nme+y+05mz-SM8Z_BgkixzkA34R+ej0Kw@mail.gmail.com
Previously if a promotion was triggered while recovery was paused,
the paused state continued. Also recovery could be paused by executing
pg_wal_replay_pause() even while a promotion was ongoing. That is,
recovery pause had higher priority over a standby promotion.
But this behavior was not desirable because most users basically wanted
the recovery to complete as soon as possible and the server to become
the master when they requested a promotion.
This commit changes recovery so that it prefers a promotion over
recovery pause. That is, if a promotion is triggered while recovery
is paused, the paused state ends and a promotion continues. Also
this commit makes recovery pause functions like pg_wal_replay_pause()
throw an error if they are executed while a promotion is ongoing.
Internally, this commit adds new internal function PromoteIsTriggered()
that returns true if a promotion is triggered. Since the name of
this function and the existing function IsPromoteTriggered() are
confusingly similar, the commit changes the name of IsPromoteTriggered()
to IsPromoteSignaled, as more appropriate name.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Atsushi Torikoshi, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/00c194b2-dbbb-2e8a-5b39-13f14048ef0a@oss.nttdata.com
This commit introduces new wait events BackupWaitWalArchive and
RecoveryPause. The former is reported while waiting for the WAL files
required for the backup to be successfully archived. The latter is
reported while waiting for recovery in pause state to be resumed.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Atsushi Torikoshi, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f0651f8c-9c96-9f29-0ff9-80414a15308a@oss.nttdata.com
Previously 0 was reported in pg_stat_progress_basebackup.total_backup
if the total backup size was not estimated. Per discussion, our consensus
is that NULL is better choise as the value in total_backup in that case.
So this commit makes pg_stat_progress_basebackup view report NULL
in total_backup column if the estimation is disabled.
Bump catversion.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Magnus Hagander, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevExnhOD89zBDuPvfAAh243RzNpwCPEWNLtMYpKHMB8gbAQ@mail.gmail.com
src/port/getopt_long.c failed on such an argument, always seeing it
as an unrecognized switch. This is unhelpful; better is to treat such
an item as a non-switch argument. That behavior is what we find in
GNU's getopt_long(); it's what src/port/getopt.c does; and it is
required by POSIX for getopt(), which getopt_long() ought to be
generally a superset of. Moreover, it's expected by ecpg, which
intends an argument of "-" to mean "read from stdin". So fix it.
Also add some documentation about ecpg's behavior in this area, since
that was miserably underdocumented. I had to reverse-engineer it
from the code.
Per bug #16304 from James Gray. Back-patch to all supported branches,
since this has been broken forever.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16304-c662b00a1322db7f@postgresql.org
Until now, only selected bulk operations (e.g. COPY) did this. If a
given relfilenode received both a WAL-skipping COPY and a WAL-logged
operation (e.g. INSERT), recovery could lose tuples from the COPY. See
src/backend/access/transam/README section "Skipping WAL for New
RelFileNode" for the new coding rules. Maintainers of table access
methods should examine that section.
To maintain data durability, just before commit, we choose between an
fsync of the relfilenode and copying its contents to WAL. A new GUC,
wal_skip_threshold, guides that choice. If this change slows a workload
that creates small, permanent relfilenodes under wal_level=minimal, try
adjusting wal_skip_threshold. Users setting a timeout on COMMIT may
need to adjust that timeout, and log_min_duration_statement analysis
will reflect time consumption moving to COMMIT from commands like COPY.
Internally, this requires a reliable determination of whether
RollbackAndReleaseCurrentSubTransaction() would unlink a relation's
current relfilenode. Introduce rd_firstRelfilenodeSubid. Amend the
specification of rd_createSubid such that the field is zero when a new
rel has an old rd_node. Make relcache.c retain entries for certain
dropped relations until end of transaction.
Back-patch to 9.5 (all supported versions). This introduces a new WAL
record type, XLOG_GIST_ASSIGN_LSN, without bumping XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC. As
always, update standby systems before master systems. This changes
sizeof(RelationData) and sizeof(IndexStmt), breaking binary
compatibility for affected extensions. (The most recent commit to
affect the same class of extensions was
089e4d405d0f3b94c74a2c6a54357a84a681754b.)
Kyotaro Horiguchi, reviewed (in earlier, similar versions) by Robert
Haas. Heikki Linnakangas and Michael Paquier implemented earlier
designs that materially clarified the problem. Reviewed, in earlier
designs, by Andrew Dunstan, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Tom Lane,
Fujii Masao, and Simon Riggs. Reported by Martijn van Oosterhout.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20150702220524.GA9392@svana.org
This patch adds the pseudo-types anycompatible, anycompatiblearray,
anycompatiblenonarray, and anycompatiblerange. They work much like
anyelement, anyarray, anynonarray, and anyrange respectively, except
that the actual input values need not match precisely in type.
Instead, if we can find a common supertype (using the same rules
as for UNION/CASE type resolution), then the parser automatically
promotes the input values to that type. For example,
"myfunc(anycompatible, anycompatible)" can match a call with one
integer and one bigint argument, with the integer automatically
promoted to bigint. With anyelement in the definition, the user
would have had to cast the integer explicitly.
The new types also provide a second, independent set of type variables
for function matching; thus with "myfunc(anyelement, anyelement,
anycompatible) returns anycompatible" the first two arguments are
constrained to be the same type, but the third can be some other
type, and the result has the type of the third argument. The need
for more than one set of type variables was foreseen back when we
first invented the polymorphic types, but we never did anything
about it.
Pavel Stehule, revised a bit by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRDna7VqNi8gR+Tt2Ktmz0cq5G93guc3Sbn_NVPLdXAkqA@mail.gmail.com
This commit changes pg_basebackup so that it specifies PROGRESS option in
BASE_BACKUP replication command whether --progress is specified or not.
This causes the server to estimate the total backup size and report it in
pg_stat_progress_basebackup.backup_total, by default. This is reasonable
default because the time required for the estimation would not be so large
in most cases.
Also this commit adds new option --no-estimate-size to pg_basebackup.
This option prevents the server from the estimation, and so is useful to
avoid such estimation time if it's too long.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander, Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEyDPPSjP7KRvfTXPdqOdY5aWNkqsB5aAXs3bco5ZwtGHg@mail.gmail.com
This commit renames RecoveryWalAll and RecoveryWalStream wait events to
RecoveryWalStream and RecoveryRetrieveRetryInterval, respectively,
in order to make the names and what they are more consistent. For example,
previously RecoveryWalAll was reported as a wait event while the recovery
was waiting for WAL from a stream, and which was confusing because the name
was very different from the situation where the wait actually could happen.
The names of macro variables for those wait events also are renamed
accordingly.
This commit also changes the category of RecoveryRetrieveRetryInterval to
Timeout from Activity because the wait event is reported while waiting based
on wal_retrieve_retry_interval.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/124997ee-096a-5d09-d8da-2c7a57d0816e@oss.nttdata.com
While performing hash aggregation, track memory usage when adding new
groups to a hash table. If the memory usage exceeds work_mem, enter
"spill mode".
In spill mode, new groups are not created in the hash table(s), but
existing groups continue to be advanced if input tuples match. Tuples
that would cause a new group to be created are instead spilled to a
logical tape to be processed later.
The tuples are spilled in a partitioned fashion. When all tuples from
the outer plan are processed (either by advancing the group or
spilling the tuple), finalize and emit the groups from the hash
table. Then, create new batches of work from the spilled partitions,
and select one of the saved batches and process it (possibly spilling
recursively).
Author: Jeff Davis
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Adam Lee, Justin Pryzby, Taylor Vesely, Melanie Plageman
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/507ac540ec7c20136364b5272acbcd4574aa76ef.camel@j-davis.com
Commit d06215d03b added a new attribute to pg_statistic_ext catalog, but
failed to add it to document it properly.
Reported-by: Noriyoshi Shinoda <noriyoshi.shinoda@hpe.com>
This commit corrects the descriptions of RecoveryWalAll and RecoveryWalStream
wait events in the documentation.
Back-patch to v10 where those wait events were added.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/124997ee-096a-5d09-d8da-2c7a57d0816e@oss.nttdata.com
Add missing index entries, add missing information on pg_upgrade man
page, order things alphabetical instead of (apparently) in the order
they were implemented, reduce repetitiveness a bit.
Use a varlistentry id for the deduplicate_items storage parameter that
is derived from the name of the parameter itself.
This oversight happened because the storage parameter was renamed
relatively late during the development of the patch that became commit
0d861bbb.
I noticed that we completely failed to document the restriction
that an "anyrange" result type has to be inferred from an "anyrange"
input. The docs also were less clear than they could be about the
relationship between "anyrange" and "anyarray".
It's been like this all along, so back-patch.
If pkg-config is installed and knows about libxml2, use its information
rather than asking xml2-config. Otherwise proceed as before. This
patch allows "configure --with-libxml" to succeed on platforms that
have pkg-config but not xml2-config, which is likely to soon become
a typical situation.
The old mechanism can be forced by setting XML2_CONFIG explicitly
(hence, build processes that were already doing so will certainly
not need adjustment). Also, it's now possible to set XML2_CFLAGS
and XML2_LIBS explicitly to override both programs.
There is a small risk of this breaking existing build processes,
if there are multiple libxml2 installations on the machine and
pkg-config disagrees with xml2-config about which to use. The
only case where that seems really likely is if a builder has tried
to select a non-default xml2-config by putting it early in his PATH
rather than setting XML2_CONFIG. Plan to warn against that in the
minor release notes.
Back-patch to v10; before that we had no pkg-config infrastructure,
and it doesn't seem worth adding it for this.
Hugh McMaster and Tom Lane; Peter Eisentraut also made an earlier
attempt at this, from which I lifted most of the docs changes.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN9BcdvfUwc9Yx5015bLH2TOiQ-M+t_NADBSPhMF7dZ=pLa_iw@mail.gmail.com
This extends the fixes made in commit 085b6b667 to other SRFs with the
same bug, namely pg_logdir_ls(), pgrowlocks(), pg_timezone_names(),
pg_ls_dir(), and pg_tablespace_databases().
Also adjust various comments and documentation to warn against
expecting to clean up resources during a ValuePerCall SRF's final
call.
Back-patch to all supported branches, since these functions were
all born broken.
Justin Pryzby, with cosmetic tweaks by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200308173103.GC1357@telsasoft.com
It's strange that a directory-listing function does not list all entries
in a directory, so let's at least document it. This involves
pg_ls_logdir
pg_ls_waldir
pg_ls_archive_statusdir
pg_ls_tmpdir
Backpatch as far back as it applies cleanly (and as far as as each
function exists). REL_10_STABLE uses different wording, but hopefully
people are not reading docs so old to write new apps anyway.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200305161838.GJ684@telsasoft.com
Introduce a GUC and a tablespace option to control I/O prefetching, much
like effective_io_concurrency, but for work that is done on behalf of
many client sessions.
Use the new setting in heapam.c instead of the hard-coded formula
effective_io_concurrency + 10 introduced by commit 558a9165e0. Go with
a default value of 10 for now, because it's a round number pretty close
to the value used for that existing case.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA%2BhUKGJUw08dPs_3EUcdO6M90GnjofPYrWp4YSLaBkgYwS-AqA%40mail.gmail.com
The backend type, which corresponds to what
pg_stat_activity.backend_type shows, is added as a column to the
csvlog and can optionally be added to log_line_prefix using the new %b
placeholder.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Kuntal Ghosh <kuntalghosh.2007@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/c65e5196-4f04-4ead-9353-6088c19615a3@2ndquadrant.com
Until now functional dependencies supported only simple equality clauses
and clauses that can be trivially translated to equalities. This commit
allows estimation of some ScalarArrayOpExpr (IN/ANY) clauses.
For IN clauses we can do this thanks to using operator with equality
semantics, which means an IN clause
WHERE c IN (1, 2, ..., N)
can be translated to
WHERE (c = 1 OR c = 2 OR ... OR c = N)
IN clauses are now considered compatible with functional dependencies,
and rely on the same assumption of consistency of queries with data
(which is an assumption we already used for simple equality clauses).
This applies also to ALL clauses with an equality operator, which can be
considered equivalent to IN clause.
ALL clauses are still considered incompatible, although there's some
discussion about maybe relaxing this in the future.
Author: Pierre Ducroquet
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Dean Rasheed
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/13902317.Eha0YfKkKy%40pierred-pdoc
This should of course be just "PG_ARGISNULL()".
Also reorder a couple of paras to make the discussion of PG_ARGISNULL
less disjointed.
Back-patch to v10 where the error was introduced.
Laurenz Albe and Tom Lane, per an anonymous docs comment
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/158399487096.5708.10696365251766477013@wrigleys.postgresql.org
This commit eliminates lossiness in check for missing parent downlinks in
B-tree. Instead of collecting lossy bitmap, we check for missing downlinks
while visiting child pages referenced by downlinks of target level. We
traverse from previous child page to the subsequent child page by right links.
Intermediate pages are candidates to have lost parent downlinks.
Also this commit introduces matching of child high key to the pivot key of
it's parent.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfduoF-c4RhOyOm%3D4-Y367%2B8txq9Q6iM_ty0OYc8si1Abww%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan
Fix up some imprecise comments and poor markup from ba79cb5dc. Also try
to convert the documentation of log_min_duration_sample and friends into
passable English.
When a partitioned table is added to a publication, changes of all of
its partitions (current or future) are published via that publication.
This change only affects which tables a publication considers as its
members. The receiving side still sees the data coming from the
individual leaf partitions. So existing restrictions that partition
hierarchies can only be replicated one-to-one are not changed by this.
Author: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.pghackers@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CA+HiwqH=Y85vRK3mOdjEkqFK+E=ST=eQiHdpj43L=_eJMOOznQ@mail.gmail.com
This addresses a couple of issues in the documentation:
- Description of PG_COLOR was missing for some tools (pg_archivecleanup
and pg_test_fsync), while the other descriptions had grammar mistakes.
- pgbench supports more environment variables: PGUSER, PGHOST and
PGPORT.
- vacuumlo, oid2name and pgbench support coloring (HEAD only)
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Daniel Gustafsson, Juan José Santamaría
Flecha
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200304075418.GJ2593@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 12
This commit provides psql commands for listing operator classes, operator
families and its contents in psql. New commands will be useful for exploring
capabilities of both builtin opclasses/opfamilies as well as
opclasses/opfamilies defined in extensions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1529675324.14193.5.camel%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Sergey Cherkashin, Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Alvaro Herrera, Arthur Zakirov
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Andres Freund
Some reference pages contained id attributes on refname elements.
These were apparently copied around from ancient times, but they don't
serve a purpose. FOP issues minor warnings about them. So it's
easiest to just remove them.
plperl's default handling of bool arguments or results is not terribly
satisfactory, since Perl doesn't consider the string 'f' to be false.
Ideally we'd just fix that, but the backwards-compatibility hazard
would be substantial. Instead, build a TRANSFORM module that can
be optionally applied to provide saner semantics.
Perhaps usefully, this is also about the minimum possible skeletal
example of a plperl transform module; so it might be a better starting
point for user-written transform modules than hstore_plperl or
jsonb_plperl.
Ivan Panchenko
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1583013317.881182688@f390.i.mail.ru
SQL includes provisions for numeric Unicode escapes in string
literals and identifiers. Previously we only accepted those
if they represented ASCII characters or the server encoding
was UTF-8, making the conversion to internal form trivial.
This patch adjusts things so that we'll call the appropriate
encoding conversion function in less-trivial cases, allowing
the escape sequence to be accepted so long as it corresponds
to some character available in the server encoding.
This also applies to processing of Unicode escapes in JSONB.
However, the old restriction still applies to client-side
JSON processing, since that hasn't got access to the server's
encoding conversion infrastructure.
This patch includes some lexer infrastructure that simplifies
throwing errors with error cursors pointing into the middle of
a string (or other complex token). For the moment I only used
it for errors relating to Unicode escapes, but we might later
expand the usage to some other cases.
Patch by me, reviewed by John Naylor.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/2393.1578958316@sss.pgh.pa.us
Specifically, this patch allows ALTER TYPE to:
* Change the default TOAST strategy for a toastable base type;
* Promote a non-toastable type to toastable;
* Add/remove binary I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove typmod I/O functions for a type;
* Add/remove a custom ANALYZE statistics functions for a type.
The first of these can be done by the type's owner; all the others
require superuser privilege since misuse could cause problems.
The main motivation for this patch is to allow extensions to
upgrade the feature sets of their data types, so the set of
alterable properties is biased towards that use-case. However
it's also true that changing some other properties would be
a lot harder, as they get baked into physical storage and/or
stored expressions that depend on the type.
Along the way, refactor GenerateTypeDependencies() to make it easier
to call, refactor DefineType's volatility checks so they can be shared
by AlterType, and teach typcache.c that it might have to reload data
from the type's pg_type row, a scenario it never handled before.
Also rearrange alter_type.sgml a bit for clarity (put the
composite-type operations together).
Tomas Vondra and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200228004440.b23ein4qvmxnlpht@development
A long time ago, it was necessary to declare datatype I/O functions,
triggers, and language handler support functions in a very type-unsafe
way involving a single pseudo-type "opaque". We got rid of those
conventions in 7.3, but there was still support in various places to
automatically convert such functions to the modern declaration style,
to be able to transparently re-load dumps from pre-7.3 servers.
It seems unnecessary to continue to support that anymore, so take out
the hacks; whereupon the "opaque" pseudo-type itself is no longer
needed and can be dropped.
This is part of a group of patches removing various server-side kluges
for transparently upgrading pre-8.0 dump files. Since we've had few
complaints about dropping pg_dump's support for dumping from pre-8.0
servers (commit 64f3524e2), it seems okay to now remove these kluges.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4110.1583255415@sss.pgh.pa.us
to_char() has long allowed the TM (translation mode) prefix to
specify output of translated month or day names; but that prefix
had no effect in input format strings. Now it does. to_date()
and to_timestamp() will now recognize the same month or day names
that to_char() would output for the same format code. Matching is
case-insensitive (per the active collation's notion of what that
means), just as it has always been for English month/day names
without the TM prefix.
(As per the discussion thread, there are lots of cases that this
feature will not handle, such as alternate day names. But being
able to accept what to_char() will output seems useful enough.)
In passing, fix some shaky English and violations of message
style guidelines in jsonpath errors for the .datetime() method,
which depends on this code.
Juan José Santamaría Flecha, reviewed and modified by me,
with other commentary from Alvaro Herrera, Tomas Vondra,
Arthur Zakirov, Peter Eisentraut, Mark Dilger.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC+AXB3u1jTngJcoC1nAHBf=M3v-jrEfo86UFtCqCjzbWS9QhA@mail.gmail.com
Previously the documentation explains that WAL segment files
start at 000000010000000000000000. But the first WAL segment file
that initdb creates is 000000010000000000000001 not
000000010000000000000000. This change was caused by old
commit 8c843fff2d, but the documentation had not been updated
a long time.
Back-patch to all supported branches.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: David Zhang
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHOmGe2OqGOmp8cOfNVDivq7dbV74L5nUGr+3eVd2CU2Q@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds pg_stat_progress_basebackup view that reports
the progress while an application like pg_basebackup is taking
a base backup. This uses the progress reporting infrastructure
added by c16dc1aca5, adding support for streaming base backup.
Bump catversion.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Amit Langote, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9ed8b801-8215-1f3d-62d7-65bff53f6e94@oss.nttdata.com
The backend was using strings to represent command tags and doing string
comparisons in multiple places, but that's slow and unhelpful. Create a
new command list with a supporting structure to use instead; this is
stored in a tag-list-file that can be tailored to specific purposes with
a caller-definable C macro, similar to what we do for WAL resource
managers. The first first such uses are a new CommandTag enum and a
CommandTagBehavior struct.
Replace numerous occurrences of char *completionTag with a
QueryCompletion struct so that the code no longer stores information
about completed queries in a cstring. Only at the last moment, in
EndCommand(), does this get converted to a string.
EventTriggerCacheItem no longer holds an array of palloc’d tag strings
in sorted order, but rather just a Bitmapset over the CommandTags.
Author: Mark Dilger, with unsolicited help from Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: John Naylor, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/981A9DB4-3F0C-4DA5-88AD-CB9CFF4D6CAD@enterprisedb.com
Add a new bt_metap() column to display the metapage's allequalimage
field. Also add three new columns to contrib/pageinspect's
bt_page_items() function:
* Add a boolean column ("dead") that displays the LP_DEAD bit value for
each non-pivot tuple.
* Add a TID column ("htid") that displays a single heap TID value for
each tuple. This is the TID that is returned by BTreeTupleGetHeapTID(),
so comparable values are shown for pivot tuples, plain non-pivot tuples,
and posting list tuples.
* Add a TID array column ("tids") that displays TIDs from each tuple's
posting list, if any. This works just like the "tids" column from
pageinspect's gin_leafpage_items() function.
No version bump for the pageinspect extension, since there hasn't been a
stable Postgres release since the last version bump (the last bump was
part of commit 58b4cb30).
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmSMmU2eNvY9+a4MNP+z02h6sa-uxZvN3un6jY02ZVBSw@mail.gmail.com
Access to this module is granted to the pg_monitor role, not
pg_read_all_stats. (Given the view's performance impact,
it seems wise to be restrictive, so I think this was the
correct decision --- and anyway it was clearly intentional.)
Per bug #16279 from Philip Semanchuk.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16279-fcaac33c68aab0ab@postgresql.org
Deduplication reduces the storage overhead of duplicates in indexes that
use the standard nbtree index access method. The deduplication process
is applied lazily, after the point where opportunistic deletion of
LP_DEAD-marked index tuples occurs. Deduplication is only applied at
the point where a leaf page split would otherwise be required. New
posting list tuples are formed by merging together existing duplicate
tuples. The physical representation of the items on an nbtree leaf page
is made more space efficient by deduplication, but the logical contents
of the page are not changed. Even unique indexes make use of
deduplication as a way of controlling bloat from duplicates whose TIDs
point to different versions of the same logical table row.
The lazy approach taken by nbtree has significant advantages over a GIN
style eager approach. Most individual inserts of index tuples have
exactly the same overhead as before. The extra overhead of
deduplication is amortized across insertions, just like the overhead of
page splits. The key space of indexes works in the same way as it has
since commit dd299df8 (the commit that made heap TID a tiebreaker
column).
Testing has shown that nbtree deduplication can generally make indexes
with about 10 or 15 tuples for each distinct key value about 2.5X - 4X
smaller, even with single column integer indexes (e.g., an index on a
referencing column that accompanies a foreign key). The final size of
single column nbtree indexes comes close to the final size of a similar
contrib/btree_gin index, at least in cases where GIN's posting list
compression isn't very effective. This can significantly improve
transaction throughput, and significantly reduce the cost of vacuuming
indexes.
A new index storage parameter (deduplicate_items) controls the use of
deduplication. The default setting is 'on', so all new B-Tree indexes
automatically use deduplication where possible. This decision will be
reviewed at the end of the Postgres 13 beta period.
There is a regression of approximately 2% of transaction throughput with
synthetic workloads that consist of append-only inserts into a table
with several non-unique indexes, where all indexes have few or no
repeated values. The underlying issue is that cycles are wasted on
unsuccessful attempts at deduplicating items in non-unique indexes.
There doesn't seem to be a way around it short of disabling
deduplication entirely. Note that deduplication of items in unique
indexes is fairly well targeted in general, which avoids the problem
there (we can use a special heuristic to trigger deduplication passes in
unique indexes, since we're specifically targeting "version bloat").
Bump XLOG_PAGE_MAGIC because xl_btree_vacuum changed.
No bump in BTREE_VERSION, since the representation of posting list
tuples works in a way that's backwards compatible with version 4 indexes
(i.e. indexes built on PostgreSQL 12). However, users must still
REINDEX a pg_upgrade'd index to use deduplication, regardless of the
Postgres version they've upgraded from. This is the only way to set the
new nbtree metapage flag indicating that deduplication is generally
safe.
Author: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Peter Geoghegan, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/55E4051B.7020209@postgrespro.ruhttps://postgr.es/m/4ab6e2db-bcee-f4cf-0916-3a06e6ccbb55@postgrespro.ru
Invent the concept of a B-Tree equalimage ("equality implies image
equality") support function, registered as support function 4. This
indicates whether it is safe (or not safe) to apply optimizations that
assume that any two datums considered equal by an operator class's order
method must be interchangeable without any loss of semantic information.
This is static information about an operator class and a collation.
Register an equalimage routine for almost all of the existing B-Tree
opclasses. We only need two trivial routines for all of the opclasses
that are included with the core distribution. There is one routine for
opclasses that index non-collatable types (which returns 'true'
unconditionally), plus another routine for collatable types (which
returns 'true' when the collation is a deterministic collation).
This patch is infrastructure for an upcoming patch that adds B-Tree
deduplication.
Author: Peter Geoghegan, Anastasia Lubennikova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzn3Ee49Gmxb7V1VJ3-AC8fWn-Fr8pfWQebHe8rYRxt5OQ@mail.gmail.com
The documentation included some outdated instructions to change the
architecture, build type or target OS of a build done with MSVC. This
commit updates the documentation to include the modern options
available, down to Visual Studio 2013.
Reported-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Juan José Santamaría Flecha
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC+AXB0J7tAqW_2F1fCE4Dh2=Ccz96TcLpsGXOCvka7VvWG9Qw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 12
Creating a bunch of non-overlapping partial indexes is generally
a bad idea, so add an example saying not to do that.
Back-patch to v10. Before that, the alternative of using (real)
partitioning wasn't available, so that the tradeoff isn't quite
so clear cut.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKVFrvFY-f7kgwMRMiPLbPYMmgjc8Y2jjUGK_Y0HVcYAmU6ymg@mail.gmail.com
Andres Freund pointed out that allowing non-superusers to run
"CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM unpackaged" has security risks, since
the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts don't try to verify that the existing
objects they're modifying are what they expect. Just attaching such
objects to an extension doesn't seem too dangerous, but some of them
do more than that.
We could have resolved this, perhaps, by still requiring superuser
privilege to use the FROM option. However, it's fair to ask just what
we're accomplishing by continuing to lug the unpackaged-to-1.0 scripts
forward. None of them have received any real testing since 9.1 days,
so they may not even work anymore (even assuming that one could still
load the previous "loose" object definitions into a v13 database).
And an installation that's trying to go from pre-9.1 to v13 or later
in one jump is going to have worse compatibility problems than whether
there's a trivial way to convert their contrib modules into extension
style.
Hence, let's just drop both those scripts and the core-code support
for "CREATE EXTENSION ... FROM".
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200213233015.r6rnubcvl4egdh5r@alap3.anarazel.de
This fixes and updates a couple of comments related to outdated Windows
versions. Particularly, src/common/exec.c had a fallback implementation
to read a file's line from a pipe because stdin/stdout/stderr does not
exist in Windows 2000 that is removed to simplify src/common/ as there
are unlikely versions of Postgres running on such platforms.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Juan José Santamaría Flecha
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191219021526.GC4202@paquier.xyz
This commit also updates wait event enum into alphabetical order.
Previously the enum entry for GSSOpenServer was added out-of-order.
Back-patch to v12 where commit b0b39f72b9 introduced
GSSOpenServer wait event. In v12, the commit doesn't include
the update of wait event enum, not to break ABI.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/949931aa-4ed4-d867-a7b5-de9c02b2292b@oss.nttdata.com
The stylesheets used for the HTML documentation rendered on
postgresql.org have shifted, and no longer matched what was expected by
"make STYLE=website html" builds performed locally. Local doc builds
did not reflect other aspects of the website, including font and
margins.
This patch updates the references to use the current set of stylesheets
that are used by the documentation on postgresql.org. This also wraps
the documentation preview in a HTML container so it can keep the content
within similar margins to those found on the website.
The documentation on building the docs is updated to reflect this
change, and to let the documentation builder know that an external
network connection is required to properly preview documentation built
with "make STYLE=website html" (which was true prior to this patch too,
but not mentioned).
Author: Jonathan Katz
Reported-By: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1375.1581446233@sss.pgh.pa.us
This allows these modules to be installed into a database without
superuser privileges (assuming that the DBA or sysadmin has installed
the module's files in the expected place). You only need CREATE
privilege on the current database, which by default would be
available to the database owner.
The following modules are marked trusted:
btree_gin
btree_gist
citext
cube
dict_int
earthdistance
fuzzystrmatch
hstore
hstore_plperl
intarray
isn
jsonb_plperl
lo
ltree
pg_trgm
pgcrypto
seg
tablefunc
tcn
tsm_system_rows
tsm_system_time
unaccent
uuid-ossp
In the future we might mark some more modules trusted, but there
seems to be no debate about these, and on the whole it seems wise
to be conservative with use of this feature to start out with.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/32315.1580326876@sss.pgh.pa.us
Use a top-level "variablelist", with one item per B-Tree support
function. This structure matches the structure used by various
"Extensibility" sections in other documentation chapters for other index
access methods.
An explicit list makes it much clearer where each item begins and ends.
This wasn't really a problem before now, but an upcoming patch that adds
deduplication to nbtree will need to have its own new B-Tree support
function. Ease the burden of translators by tidying up btree.sgml ahead
of committing the deduplication patch.
The GRANTED BY clause in GRANT/REVOKE ROLE has been there since 2005
but was never documented. I'm not sure now whether that was just an
oversight or was intentional (given the limited capability of the
option). But seeing that pg_dumpall does emit code that uses this
option, it seems like not documenting it at all is a bad idea.
Also, when we upgraded the syntax to allow CURRENT_USER/SESSION_USER
as the privilege recipient, the role form of GRANT was incorrectly
not modified to show that, and REVOKE's docs weren't touched at all.
Although I'm not that excited about GRANTED BY, the other oversight
seems serious enough to justify a back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3070.1581526786@sss.pgh.pa.us
%d can be used to track if the current connection is in a transaction
block or not, and adding it by default to the prompt has the advantage
to not need a modification of .psqlrc, something not possible depending
on the environment.
This discussion has happened across various sources, and there was a
strong consensus in favor of this change.
Author: Vik Fearing
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/09502c40-cfe1-bb29-10f9-4b3fa7b2bbb2@2ndquadrant.com
When running TRUNCATE CASCADE on a child of a partitioned table
referenced by another partitioned table, the truncate was not applied to
partitions of the referencing table; this could leave rows violating the
constraint in the referencing partitioned table. Repair by walking the
pg_constraint chain all the way up to the topmost referencing table.
Note: any partitioned tables containing FKs that reference other
partitioned tables should be checked for possible violating rows, if
TRUNCATE has occurred in partitions of the referenced table.
Reported-by: Christophe Courtois
Author: Jehan-Guillaume de Rorthais
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20200204183906.115f693e@firost
This new field tracks the PID of the group leader used with parallel
query. For parallel workers and the leader, the value is set to the
PID of the group leader. So, for the group leader, the value is the
same as its own PID. Note that this reflects what PGPROC stores in
shared memory, so as leader_pid is NULL if a backend has never been
involved in parallel query. If the backend is using parallel query or
has used it at least once, the value is set until the backend exits.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Guillaume Lelarge, Michael Paquier, Tomas
Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOBaU_Yy5bt0vTPZ2_LUM6cUcGeqmYNoJ8-Rgto+c2+w3defYA@mail.gmail.com
The docs are ambiguous as to which tables would be copied over when the
copy_data parameter is true in ALTER SUBSCRIPTION ... REFRESH PUBLICATION.
Make it clear that it only applies to tables which are new in the
publication.
Author: David Christensen (reword by Álvaro Herrera)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/95339420-7F09-4F8C-ACC0-8F1CFAAD9CD7@endpoint.com
Advancing a physical replication slot with pg_replication_slot_advance()
did not mark the slot as dirty if any advancing was done, preventing the
follow-up checkpoint to flush the slot data to disk. This caused the
advancing to be lost even on clean restarts. This does not happen for
logical slots as any advancing marked the slot as dirty. Per
discussion, the original feature has been implemented so as in the event
of a crash the slot may move backwards to a past LSN. This property is
kept and more documentation is added about that.
This commit adds some new TAP tests to check the persistency of physical
and logical slots after advancing across clean restarts.
Author: Alexey Kondratov, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Craig Ringer
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/059cc53a-8b14-653a-a24d-5f867503b0ee@postgrespro.ru
Backpatch-through: 11
This patch creates a new extension property, "trusted". An extension
that's marked that way in its control file can be installed by a
non-superuser who has the CREATE privilege on the current database,
even if the extension contains objects that normally would have to be
created by a superuser. The objects within the extension will (by
default) be owned by the bootstrap superuser, but the extension itself
will be owned by the calling user. This allows replicating the old
behavior around trusted procedural languages, without all the
special-case logic in CREATE LANGUAGE. We have, however, chosen to
loosen the rules slightly: formerly, only a database owner could take
advantage of the special case that allowed installation of a trusted
language, but now anyone who has CREATE privilege can do so.
Having done that, we can delete the pg_pltemplate catalog, moving the
knowledge it contained into the extension script files for the various
PLs. This ends up being no change at all for the in-core PLs, but it is
a large step forward for external PLs: they can now have the same ease
of installation as core PLs do. The old "trusted PL" behavior was only
available to PLs that had entries in pg_pltemplate, but now any
extension can be marked trusted if appropriate.
This also removes one of the stumbling blocks for our Python 2 -> 3
migration, since the association of "plpythonu" with Python 2 is no
longer hard-wired into pg_pltemplate's initial contents. Exactly where
we go from here on that front remains to be settled, but one problem
is fixed.
Patch by me, reviewed by Peter Eisentraut, Stephen Frost, and others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5889.1566415762@sss.pgh.pa.us
Before, if a recovery target is configured, but the archive ended
before the target was reached, recovery would end and the server would
promote without further notice. That was deemed to be pretty wrong.
With this change, if the recovery target is not reached, it is a fatal
error.
Based-on-patch-by: Leif Gunnar Erlandsen <leif@lako.no>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horikyota.ntt@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/993736dd3f1713ec1f63fc3b653839f5@lako.no
Commit 40d964ec99 allowed vacuum command to leverage multiple CPUs by
invoking parallel workers to process indexes. This commit provides a
'--parallel' option to specify the parallel degree used by vacuum command.
Author: Masahiko Sawada, with few modifications by me
Reviewed-by: Mahendra Singh and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.com
These two new parameters, named sslminprotocolversion and
sslmaxprotocolversion, allow to respectively control the minimum and the
maximum version of the SSL protocol used for the SSL connection attempt.
The default setting is to allow any version for both the minimum and the
maximum bounds, causing libpq to rely on the bounds set by the backend
when negotiating the protocol to use for an SSL connection. The bounds
are checked when the values are set at the earliest stage possible as
this makes the checks independent of any SSL implementation.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Cary Huang
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4F246AE3-A7AE-471E-BD3D-C799D3748E03@yesql.se
This function allows us to fsync the specified file or directory.
It's useful, for example, when we want to sync the file that
pg_file_write() writes out or that COPY TO exports the data into,
for durability.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-By: Julien Rouhaud, Arthur Zakirov, Michael Paquier, Atsushi Torikoshi
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAHGQGwGY8uzZ_k8dHRoW1zDcy1Z7=5GQ+So4ZkVy2u=nLsk=hA@mail.gmail.com
Detection of WAL records having references to invalid pages
during recovery causes PostgreSQL to raise a PANIC-level error,
aborting the recovery. Setting ignore_invalid_pages to on causes
the system to ignore those WAL records (but still report a warning),
and continue recovery. This behavior may cause crashes, data loss,
propagate or hide corruption, or other serious problems.
However, it may allow you to get past the PANIC-level error,
to finish the recovery, and to cause the server to start up.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAHGQGwHCK6f77yeZD4MHOnN+PaTf6XiJfEB+Ce7SksSHjeAWtg@mail.gmail.com
Attempting to use CREATE INDEX, DROP INDEX or REINDEX with CONCURRENTLY
on a temporary relation with ON COMMIT actions triggered unexpected
errors because those operations use multiple transactions internally to
complete their work. Here is for example one confusing error when using
ON COMMIT DELETE ROWS:
ERROR: index "foo" already contains data
Issues related to temporary relations and concurrent indexing are fixed
in this commit by enforcing the non-concurrent path to be taken for
temporary relations even if using CONCURRENTLY, transparently to the
user. Using a non-concurrent path does not matter in practice as locks
cannot be taken on a temporary relation by a session different than the
one owning the relation, and the non-concurrent operation is more
effective.
The problem exists with REINDEX since v12 with the introduction of
CONCURRENTLY, and with CREATE/DROP INDEX since CONCURRENTLY exists for
those commands. In all supported versions, this caused only confusing
error messages to be generated. Note that with REINDEX, it was also
possible to issue a REINDEX CONCURRENTLY for a temporary relation owned
by a different session, leading to a server crash.
The idea to enforce transparently the non-concurrent code path for
temporary relations comes originally from Andres Freund.
Reported-by: Manuel Rigger
Author: Michael Paquier, Heikki Linnakangas
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+u7OA6gP7YAeCguyseusYcc=uR8+ypjCcgDDCTzjQ+k6S9ksQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
The behavior of something like
ALTER TABLE transactions
ADD COLUMN status varchar(30) DEFAULT 'old',
ALTER COLUMN status SET default 'current';
is to fill existing table rows with 'old', not 'current'. That's
intentional and desirable for a couple of reasons:
* It makes the behavior the same whether you merge the sub-commands
into one ALTER command or give them separately;
* If we applied the new default while filling the table, there would
be no way to get the existing behavior in one SQL command.
The same reasoning applies in cases that add a column and then
manipulate its GENERATED/IDENTITY status in a second sub-command,
since the generation expression is really just a kind of default.
However, that wasn't very obvious (at least not to me; earlier in
the referenced discussion thread I'd thought it was a bug to be
fixed). And it certainly wasn't documented.
Hence, add documentation, code comments, and a test case to clarify
that this behavior is all intentional.
In passing, adjust ATExecAddColumn's defaults-related relkind check
so that it matches up exactly with ATRewriteTables, instead of being
effectively (though not literally) the negated inverse condition.
The reasoning can be explained a lot more concisely that way, too
(not to mention that the comment now matches the code, which it
did not before).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/10365.1558909428@sss.pgh.pa.us
This feature allows the vacuum to leverage multiple CPUs in order to
process indexes. This enables us to perform index vacuuming and index
cleanup with background workers. This adds a PARALLEL option to VACUUM
command where the user can specify the number of workers that can be used
to perform the command which is limited by the number of indexes on a
table. Specifying zero as a number of workers will disable parallelism.
This option can't be used with the FULL option.
Each index is processed by at most one vacuum process. Therefore parallel
vacuum can be used when the table has at least two indexes.
The parallel degree is either specified by the user or determined based on
the number of indexes that the table has, and further limited by
max_parallel_maintenance_workers. The index can participate in parallel
vacuum iff it's size is greater than min_parallel_index_scan_size.
Author: Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila, Robert Haas, Tomas Vondra,
Mahendra Singh and Sergei Kornilov
Tested-by: Mahendra Singh and Prabhat Sahu
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.comhttps://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1J-VoR9gzS5E75pcD-OH0mEyCdp8RihcwKrcuw7J-Q0+w@mail.gmail.com
Rather than intermixing the discussion of text-string and binary-string
functions, make a clean break, moving all discussion of binary-string
operations into section 9.5. This involves some duplication of
function descriptions between 9.4 and 9.5, but it seems cleaner on the
whole since the individual descriptions are clearer (and on the other
side of the coin, it gets rid of some duplicated descriptions, too).
Move the convert*/encode/decode functions to a separate table, because
they don't quite seem to fit under the heading of "binary string
functions".
Also provide full documentation of the textual formats supported by
encode() and decode() (which was the original goal of this patch
series, many moons ago).
Also move the table of built-in encoding conversions out of section 9.4,
where it no longer had any relevance whatsoever, and put it into section
23.3 about character sets. I chose to put both that and table 23.2
(multibyte-translation-table) into a new <sect2> so as not to break up
the flow of discussion in 23.3.3.
Also do a bunch of minor copy-editing on the function descriptions
in 9.4 and 9.5.
Karl Pinc, reviewed by Fabien Coelho, further hacking by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190304163347.7bca4897@slate.meme.com
jsonb_set_lax() is the same as jsonb_set, except that it takes and extra
argument that specifies what to do if the value argument is NULL. The
default is 'use_json_null'. Other possibilities are 'raise_exception',
'return_target' and 'delete_key', all these behaviours having been
suggested as reasonable by various users.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/375873e2-c957-3a8d-64f9-26c43c2b16e7@2ndQuadrant.com
Reviewed by: Pavel Stehule
This uses the progress reporting infrastructure added by c16dc1aca5,
adding support for ANALYZE.
Co-authored-by: Álvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Co-authored-by: Tatsuro Yamada <tatsuro.yamada.tf@nttcom.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Robert Haas, Anthony Nowocien, Kyotaro Horiguchi,
Vignesh C, Amit Langote
Introduce new fields amusemaintenanceworkmem and amparallelvacuumoptions
in IndexAmRoutine for parallel vacuum. The amusemaintenanceworkmem tells
whether a particular IndexAM uses maintenance_work_mem or not. This will
help in controlling the memory used by individual workers as otherwise,
each worker can consume memory equal to maintenance_work_mem. The
amparallelvacuumoptions tell whether a particular IndexAM participates in
a parallel vacuum and if so in which phase (bulkdelete, vacuumcleanup) of
vacuum.
Author: Masahiko Sawada and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Amit Kapila, Tomas Vondra and Robert Haas
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDTPMgzSkV4E3SFo1CH_x50bf5PqZFQf4jmqjk-C03BWg@mail.gmail.comhttps://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1LmcD5aPogzwim5Nn58Ki+74a6Edghx4Wd8hAskvHaq5A@mail.gmail.com
If no permanent replication slot is configured using
primary_slot_name, the walreceiver now creates and uses a temporary
replication slot. A new setting wal_receiver_create_temp_slot can be
used to disable this behavior, for example, if the remote instance is
out of replication slots.
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada <masahiko.sawada@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA%2Bfd4k4dM0iEPLxyVyme2RAFsn8SUgrNtBJOu81YqTY4V%2BnqZA%40mail.gmail.com
This tells you about allocations that have been made from the main
shared memory segment. The original patch also tried to show information
about dynamic shared memory allocation as well, but I decided to
leave that problem for another time.
Andres Freund and Robert Haas, reviewed by Michael Paquier, Marti
Raudsepp, Tom Lane, Álvaro Herrera, and Kyotaro Horiguchi.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/20140504114417.GM12715@awork2.anarazel.de
Supporting very old Python versions is a maintenance burden,
especially with the several variant test files to maintain for Python
<2.6.
Since we have dropped support for older OpenSSL versions in
7b283d0e1d, RHEL 5 is now effectively
desupported, and that was also the only mainstream operating system
still using Python versions before 2.6, so it's a good time to drop
those as well.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/98b69261-298c-13d2-f34d-836fd9c29b21%402ndquadrant.com
Use the parser's standard type coercion machinery to convert the
output column(s) of a SQL function's final SELECT or RETURNING
to the type(s) they should have according to the function's declared
result type. We'll allow any case where an assignment-level
coercion is available. Previously, we failed unless the required
coercion was a binary-compatible one (and the documentation ignored
this, falsely claiming that the types must match exactly).
Notably, the coercion now accounts for typmods, so that cases where
a SQL function is declared to return a composite type whose columns
are typmod-constrained now behave as one would expect. Arguably
this aspect is a bug fix, but the overall behavioral change here
seems too large to consider back-patching.
A nice side-effect is that functions can now be inlined in a
few cases where we previously failed to do so because of type
mismatches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/18929.1574895430@sss.pgh.pa.us
Support is out of scope from all the major vendors for these versions
(for example RHEL5 uses a version based on 0.9.8, and RHEL6 uses 1.0.1),
and it created some extra maintenance work. Upstream has stopped
support of 0.9.8 in December 2015 and of 1.0.0 in February 2016.
Since b1abfec, note that the default SSL protocol version set with
ssl_min_protocol_version is TLSv1.2, whose support was added in OpenSSL
1.0.1, so there is no point to enforce ssl_min_protocol_version to TLSv1
in the SSL tests.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191205083252.GE5064@paquier.xyz
Change the exception syntax used in the documentation to use the more
current
except Exception as ex:
rather than the old
except Exception, ex:
We keep the old syntax in the test code since Python <2.6 is still
supported there, but the documentation might as well use the modern
syntax.
Column defaults may be specified separately for each partition.
But INSERT via a partitioned table ignores those partition's default values.
The former is documented, but the latter restriction not.
This commit adds the note about that restriction into the document.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwEs-59omrfGF7hOHz9iMME3RbKy5ny+iftDx3LHTEn9sA@mail.gmail.com
We realized years ago that it's better for libpq to accept all
connection parameters syntactically, even if some are ignored or
restricted due to lack of the feature in a particular build.
However, that lesson from the SSL support was for some reason never
applied to the GSSAPI support. This is causing various buildfarm
members to have problems with a test case added by commit 6136e94dc,
and it's just a bad idea from a user-experience standpoint anyway,
so fix it.
While at it, fix some places where parameter-related infrastructure
was added with the aid of a dartboard, or perhaps with the aid of
the anti-pattern "add new stuff at the end". It should be safe
to rearrange the contents of struct pg_conn even in released
branches, since that's private to libpq (and we'd have to move
some fields in some builds to fix this, anyway).
Back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/11297.1576868677@sss.pgh.pa.us
Currently postgres_fdw doesn't permit a non-superuser to connect to a
foreign server without specifying a password, or to use an
authentication mechanism that doesn't use the password. This is to avoid
using the settings and identity of the user running Postgres.
However, this doesn't make sense for all authentication methods. We
therefore allow a superuser to set "password_required 'false'" for user
mappings for the postgres_fdw. The superuser must ensure that the
foreign server won't try to rely solely on the server identity (e.g.
trust, peer, ident) or use an authentication mechanism that relies on the
password settings (e.g. md5, scram-sha-256).
This feature is a prelude to better support for sslcert and sslkey
settings in user mappings.
Author: Craig Ringer.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/075135da-545c-f958-fed0-5dcb462d6dae@2ndQuadrant.com
A new function EmitProcSignalBarrier() can be used to emit a global
barrier which all backends that participate in the ProcSignal
mechanism must absorb, and a new function WaitForProcSignalBarrier()
can be used to wait until all relevant backends have in fact
absorbed the barrier.
This can be used to coordinate global state changes, such as turning
checksums on while the system is running.
There's no real client of this mechanism yet, although two are
proposed, but an enum has to have at least one element, so this
includes a placeholder type (PROCSIGNAL_BARRIER_PLACEHOLDER) which
should be replaced by the first real client of this mechanism to
get committed.
Andres Freund and Robert Haas, reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson and,
in earlier versions, by Magnus Hagander.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZwDk=BguVDVa+qdA6SBKef=PKbaKDQALTC_9qoz1mJqg@mail.gmail.com
The "auth-methods" <sect1> used to include descriptions of all our
authentication methods. Commit 56811e573 promoted its child <sect2>'s
to <sect1>'s, which has advantages but also created some issues:
* The auth-methods page itself is essentially empty/useless.
* Links that pointed to "auth-methods" as a placeholder for all
auth methods were rendered a bit nonsensical.
* DocBook no longer provides a subsection table-of-contents here,
which formerly was a useful if terse summary of available auth methods.
To improve matters, add a handwritten list of all the auth methods.
Per gripe from Dave Cramer. Back-patch to v11 where the previous
commit came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADK3HH+xQLhcPgg=kWqfogtXGGZr-JdSo=x=WQC0PkAVyxUWyQ@mail.gmail.com
This makes such log entries more useful, since the cause of the error
can be dependent on the parameter values.
Author: Alexey Bashtanov, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0146a67b-a22a-0519-9082-bc29756b93a2@imap.cc
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Andres Freund, Tom Lane
AfterTriggerExecute() retrieves a fresh tuple or pair of tuples from a
tuplestore and then stores the tuple(s) in the passed-in slot(s) if
AFTER_TRIGGER_FDW_FETCH, while it uses the most-recently-retrieved
tuple(s) stored in the slot(s) if AFTER_TRIGGER_FDW_REUSE. This was
done correctly before 12, but commit ff11e7f4b broke it by mistakenly
clearing the tuple(s) stored in the slot(s) in that function, leading to
an assertion failure as reported in bug #16139 from Alexander Lakhin.
Also, fix some other issues with the aforementioned commit in passing:
* For tg_newslot, which is a slot added to the TriggerData struct by the
commit to store new updated tuples, it didn't ensure the slot was NULL
if there was no such tuple.
* The commit failed to update the documentation about the trigger
interface.
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Backpatch-through: 12
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16139-94f9ccf0db6119ec%40postgresql.org
Commit 5770172cb0 wrote, incorrectly, that
certain schema usage patterns are secure against CREATEROLE users and
database owners. When an untrusted user is the database owner or holds
CREATEROLE privilege, a query is secure only if its session started with
SELECT pg_catalog.set_config('search_path', '', false) or equivalent.
Back-patch to 9.4 (all supported versions).
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191013013512.GC4131753@rfd.leadboat.com
This partially reverts commit 4dc6355210.
The information returned by the function can be obtained by calling
PQconninfo(), so the function is redundant.
Change default of ssl_min_protocol_version to TLSv1.2 (from TLSv1,
which means 1.0). Older versions are still supported, just not by
default.
TLS 1.0 is widely deprecated, and TLS 1.1 only slightly less so. All
OpenSSL versions that support TLS 1.1 also support TLS 1.2, so there
would be very little reason to, say, set the default to TLS 1.1
instead on grounds of better compatibility.
The test suite overrides this new setting, so it can still run with
older OpenSSL versions.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b327f8df-da98-054d-0cc5-b76a857cfed9%402ndquadrant.com
This patch providies for support for password protected SSL client
keys in libpq, and for DER format keys, both encrypted and unencrypted.
There is a new connection parameter sslpassword, which is supplied to
the OpenSSL libraries via a callback function. The callback function can
also be set by an application by calling PQgetSSLKeyPassHook(). There is
also a function to retreive the connection setting, PQsslpassword().
Craig Ringer and Andrew Dunstan
Reviewed by: Greg Nancarrow
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f7ee88ed-95c4-95c1-d4bf-7b415363ab62@2ndQuadrant.com
Make allow_system_table_mods settable at run time by superusers. It
was previously postmaster start only.
We don't want to make system catalog DDL wide-open, but there are
occasionally useful things to do like setting reloptions or statistics
on a busy system table, and blocking those doesn't help anyone. Also,
this enables the possibility of writing a test suite for this setting.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/8b00ea5e-28a7-88ba-e848-21528b632354%402ndquadrant.com
This build option was once useful to maintain compatibility with
version-0 functions, but those are no longer supported, so this option
is no longer useful for end users. We keep the option available to
developers in pg_config_manual.h so that it is easy to test the
pass-by-reference code paths without having to fire up a 32-bit
machine.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/f3e1e576-2749-bbd7-2d57-3f9dcf75255a@2ndquadrant.com
Up to now, whatever you'd edited was put back into the query buffer
but not redisplayed, which is less than user-friendly. But we can
improve that just by printing the text along with a prompt, if we
enforce that the editing result ends with a newline (which it
typically would anyway). You then continue typing more lines if
you want, or you can type ";" or do \g or \r or another \e.
This is intentionally divorced from readline's processing,
for simplicity and so that it works the same with or without
readline enabled. We discussed possibly integrating things
more closely with readline; but that seems difficult, uncertainly
portable across different readline and libedit versions, and
of limited real benefit anyway. Let's try the simple way and
see if it's good enough.
Patch by me, thanks to Fabien Coelho and Laurenz Albe for review
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/13192.1572318028@sss.pgh.pa.us
This adds the statistics about transactions spilled to disk from
ReorderBuffer. Users can query the pg_stat_replication view to check
these stats.
Author: Tomas Vondra, with bug-fixes and minor changes by Dilip Kumar
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/688b0b7f-2f6c-d827-c27b-216a8e3ea700@2ndquadrant.com
Specifying '-f' will add the 'force' option to the DROP DATABASE command
sent to the server. This will try to terminate all existing connections
to the target database before dropping it.
Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Vignesh C and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
The existing text stated that "Default privileges that are specified
per-schema are added to whatever the global default privileges are for
the particular object type". However, that bare-bones observation is
not quite clear enough, as demonstrated by the complaint in bug #16124.
Flesh it out by stating explicitly that you can't revoke built-in
default privileges this way, and by providing an example to drive
the point home.
Back-patch to all supported branches, since it's been like this
from the beginning.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16124-423d8ee4358421bc@postgresql.org
Instead of deciding to serialize a transaction merely based on the
number of changes in that xact (toplevel or subxact), this makes
the decisions based on amount of memory consumed by the changes.
The memory limit is defined by a new logical_decoding_work_mem GUC,
so for example we can do this
SET logical_decoding_work_mem = '128kB'
to reduce the memory usage of walsenders or set the higher value to
reduce disk writes. The minimum value is 64kB.
When adding a change to a transaction, we account for the size in
two places. Firstly, in the ReorderBuffer, which is then used to
decide if we reached the total memory limit. And secondly in the
transaction the change belongs to, so that we can pick the largest
transaction to evict (and serialize to disk).
We still use max_changes_in_memory when loading changes serialized
to disk. The trouble is we can't use the memory limit directly as
there might be multiple subxact serialized, we need to read all of
them but we don't know how many are there (and which subxact to
read first).
We do not serialize the ReorderBufferTXN entries, so if there is a
transaction with many subxacts, most memory may be in this type of
objects. Those records are not included in the memory accounting.
We also do not account for INTERNAL_TUPLECID changes, which are
kept in a separate list and not evicted from memory. Transactions
with many CTID changes may consume significant amounts of memory,
but we can't really do much about that.
The current eviction algorithm is very simple - the transaction is
picked merely by size, while it might be useful to also consider age
(LSN) of the changes for example. With the new Generational memory
allocator, evicting the oldest changes would make it more likely
the memory gets actually pfreed.
The logical_decoding_work_mem can be set in postgresql.conf, in which
case it serves as the default for all publishers on that instance.
Author: Tomas Vondra, with changes by Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar and Amit Kapila
Tested-By: Vignesh C
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/688b0b7f-2f6c-d827-c27b-216a8e3ea700@2ndquadrant.com
Commit 6b76f1bb5 changed all the RADIUS auth parameters to be lists
rather than single values. But its use of SplitIdentifierString
to parse the list format was not very carefully thought through,
because that function thinks it's parsing SQL identifiers, which
means it will (a) downcase the strings and (b) truncate them to
be shorter than NAMEDATALEN. While downcasing should be harmless
for the server names and ports, it's just wrong for the shared
secrets, and probably for the NAS Identifier strings as well.
The truncation aspect is at least potentially a problem too,
though typical values for these parameters would fit in 63 bytes.
Fortunately, we now have a function SplitGUCList that is exactly
the same except for not doing the two unwanted things, so fixing
this is a trivial matter of calling that function instead.
While here, improve the documentation to show how to double-quote
the parameter values. I failed to resist the temptation to do
some copy-editing as well.
Report and patch from Marcos David (bug #16106); doc changes by me.
Back-patch to v10 where the aforesaid commit came in, since this is
arguably a regression from our previous behavior with RADIUS auth.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16106-7d319e4295d08e70@postgresql.org
This new option terminates the other sessions connected to the target
database and then drop it. To terminate other sessions, the current user
must have desired permissions (same as pg_terminate_backend()). We don't
allow to terminate the sessions if prepared transactions, active logical
replication slots or subscriptions are present in the target database.
Author: Pavel Stehule with changes by me
Reviewed-by: Dilip Kumar, Vignesh C, Ibrar Ahmed, Anthony Nowocien,
Ryan Lambert and Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP_rwwmLJJbn70vLOZFpxGw3XD7nLB_7+NKz46H5EOO2k5H7OQ@mail.gmail.com
The example of expansion of multiple views claimed that the resulting
subquery nest would not get fully flattened because of an aggregate
function. There's no aggregate in the example, though, only a user
defined function confusingly named MIN(). In a modern server, the
reason for the non-flattening is that MIN() is volatile, but I'm
unsure whether that was true back when this text was written.
Let's reduce the confusion level by using LEAST() instead (which
we didn't have at the time this example was created). And then
we can just say that the planner will flatten the sub-queries, so
the rewrite system doesn't have to.
Noted by Paul Jungwirth. This text is old enough to vote, so
back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+renyXZFnmp9PcvX1EVR2dR=XG5e6E-AELr8AHCNZ8RYrpnPw@mail.gmail.com
The previous statement that using a passphrase disables the ability to
change the server's SSL configuration without a server restart was no
longer completely true since the introduction of
ssl_passphrase_command_supports_reload.
Add some support for automatically showing backtraces in certain error
situations in the server. Backtraces are shown on assertion failure;
also, a new setting backtrace_functions can be set to a list of C
function names, and all ereport()s and elog()s from the mentioned
functions will have backtraces generated. Finally, the function
errbacktrace() can be manually added to an ereport() call to generate a
backtrace for that call.
Authors: Peter Eisentraut, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m//5f48cb47-bf1e-05b6-7aae-3bf2cd01586d@2ndquadrant.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsr+YGL+yfWE=JvbUbnpWtrRZNey7hJ07+zT4bYJdVp4Szdrg@mail.gmail.com
Currently, postgres_fdw does not support preparing a remote transaction
for two-phase commit even in the case where the remote transaction is
read-only, but the old error message appeared to imply that that was not
supported only if the remote transaction modified remote tables. Change
the message so as to include the case where the remote transaction is
read-only.
Also fix a comment above the message.
Also add a note about the lack of supporting PREPARE TRANSACTION to the
postgres_fdw documentation.
Reported-by: Gilles Darold
Author: Gilles Darold and Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier and Kyotaro Horiguchi
Backpatch-through: 9.4
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/08600ed3-3084-be70-65ba-279ab19618a5%40darold.net
This allows logging a sample of statements, without incurring excessive
log traffic (which may impact performance). This can be useful when
analyzing workloads with lots of short queries.
The sampling is configured using two new GUC parameters:
* log_min_duration_sample - minimum required statement duration
* log_statement_sample_rate - sample rate (0.0 - 1.0)
Only statements with duration exceeding log_min_duration_sample are
considered for sampling. To enable sampling, both those GUCs have to
be set correctly.
The existing log_min_duration_statement GUC has a higher priority, i.e.
statements with duration exceeding log_min_duration_statement will be
always logged, irrespectedly of how the sampling is configured. This
means only configurations
log_min_duration_sample < log_min_duration_statement
do actually sample the statements, instead of logging everything.
Author: Adrien Nayrat
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Vik Fearing, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bbe0a1a8-a8f7-3be2-155a-888e661cc06c@anayrat.info
The docs do say which GUCs can be changed only by superusers, but we
forgot to mention this for the new log_transaction_sample_rate. This
GUC was introduced in PostgreSQL 12, so backpatch accordingly.
Author: Adrien Nayrat
Backpatch-through: 12
Since commit d26a810eb, we've defined bool as being either _Bool from
<stdbool.h>, or "unsigned char"; but that commit overlooked the fact
that probes.d has "#define bool char". For consistency, make it say
"unsigned char" instead. This should be strictly a cosmetic change,
but it seems best to be in sync.
Formally, in the now-normal case where we're using <stdbool.h>, it'd
be better to write "#define bool _Bool". However, then we'd need
some build infrastructure to inject that configuration choice into
probes.d, and it doesn't seem worth the trouble. We only use
<stdbool.h> if sizeof(_Bool) is 1, so having DTrace think that
bool parameters are "unsigned char" should be close enough.
Back-patch to v12 where d26a810eb came in.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAA4eK1LmaKO7Du9M9Lo=kxGU8sB6aL8fa3sF6z6d5yYYVe3BuQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit allows --init-steps option in pgbench to accept "G" character
meaning server-side data generation as an initialization step.
With "G", only limited queries are sent from pgbench client and
then data is actually generated in the server. This might make
the initialization phase faster if the bandwidth between pgbench client
and the server is low.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Anna Endo, Ibrar Ahmed, Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1904061826420.3678@lancre
Since 898e5e32, this command uses partially ShareUpdateExclusiveLock,
but the docs did not get the call.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 12
This clarifies more how to use and how to take advantage of constraints
when attaching a new partition.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191028001207.GB23808@telsasoft.com
Backpatch-through: 10
When we added the GUC units feature, we didn't make any great effort
to adjust the documentation of individual GUCs; they tended to still
say things like "this is the number of milliseconds that ...", even
though users might prefer to write some other units, and SHOW might
even show the value in other units. Commit 6c9fb69f2 made an effort
to improve this situation, but I thought it made things less readable
by injecting units information in mid-sentence. It also wasn't very
consistent, and did not touch all the GUCs that have units.
To improve matters, standardize on the phrasing "If this value is
specified without units, it is taken as <units>". Also, try to
standardize where this is mentioned, right before the specification
of the default. (In a couple of places, doing that would've required
more rewriting than seemed justified, so I wasn't 100% consistent
about that.) I also tried to use the phrases "amount of time",
"amount of memory", etc rather than describing the contents of GUCs
in other ways, as those were the majority usage in places that weren't
overcommitting to a particular unit. (I left "length of time" alone
in a couple of places, though.)
I failed to resist the temptation to copy-edit some awkward text, too.
Backpatch to v12, like 6c9fb69f2, mainly because v12 hasn't diverged
much from HEAD yet.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15882.1571942223@sss.pgh.pa.us
Remove SQL_LANGUAGES, which was eliminated in SQL:2008, and
SQL_PACKAGES and SQL_SIZING_PROFILES, which were eliminated in
SQL:2011. Since they were dropped by the SQL standard, the
information in them was no longer updated and therefore no longer
useful.
This also removes the feature-package association information in
sql_feature_packages.txt, but for the time begin we are keeping the
information which features are in the Core package (that is, mandatory
SQL features). Maybe at some point someone wants to invent a way to
store that that does not involve using the "package" mechanism
anymore.
Discussion https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/91334220-7900-071b-9327-0c6ecd012017%402ndquadrant.com
Historically, we started the timer (if StatementTimeout > 0) at the
beginning of a simple-Query message and usually let it run until the
end, so that the timeout limit applied to the entire query string,
and intra-string changes of the statement_timeout GUC had no effect.
But, confusingly, a COMMIT within the string would reset the state
and allow a fresh timeout cycle to start with the current setting.
Commit f8e5f156b changed the behavior of statement_timeout for extended
query protocol, and as an apparently-unintended side effect, a change in
the statement_timeout GUC during a multi-statement simple-Query message
might have an effect immediately --- but only if it was going from
"disabled" to "enabled".
This is all pretty confusing, not to mention completely undocumented.
Let's change things so that the timeout is always reset between queries
of a multi-query string, whether they're transaction control commands
or not. Thus the active timeout setting is applied to each query in
the string, separately. This costs a few more cycles if statement_timeout
is active, but it provides much more intuitive behavior, especially if one
changes statement_timeout in one of the queries of the string.
Also, add something to the documentation to explain all this.
Per bug #16035 from Raj Mohite. Although this is a bug fix, I'm hesitant
to back-patch it; conceivably somebody has worked out the old behavior
and is depending on it. (But note that this change should make the
behavior less restrictive in most cases, since the timeout will now
be applied to shorter segments of code.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16035-456e6e69ebfd4374@postgresql.org
In v11 or before, this setting could not take effect in crash recovery
because it's specified in recovery.conf and crash recovery always
starts without recovery.conf. But commit 2dedf4d9a8 integrated
recovery.conf into postgresql.conf and which unexpectedly allowed
this setting to take effect even in crash recovery. This is definitely
not good behavior.
To fix the issue, this commit makes crash recovery always ignore
recovery_min_apply_delay setting.
Back-patch to v12 where the issue was added.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwEyD6HdZLfdWc+95g=VQFPR4zQL4n+yHxQgGEGjaSVheQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e445616d-023e-a268-8aa1-67b8b335340c@pgmasters.net
Using glibc's version string to detect potential collation definition
changes is not 100% reliable, but it's better than nothing. Currently
this affects only collations explicitly provided by "libc". More work
will be needed to handle the default collation.
Author: Thomas Munro, based on a suggestion from Christoph Berg
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4b76c6d4-ae5e-0dc6-7d0d-b5c796a07e34%402ndquadrant.com
This fixes multiple areas of the documentation:
- COPY for its past compatibility section.
- SET ROLE mentioning INHERITS instead of INHERIT
- PREPARE referring to stmt_name, that is not present.
- Extension documentation about format name with upgrade scripts.
Backpatch down to 9.4 for the relevant parts.
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/bf95233a-9943-b341-e2ff-a860c28af481@gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.4
Previously, our docs would say "Specifies the number of milliseconds"
but it wasn't clear that "milliseconds" was merely the default unit.
New text says "Specifies duration (defaults to milliseconds)", which is
clearer.
Reported-by: basil.bourque@gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15912-2e35e9026f61230b@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 12
This includes a couple of changes around the new behavior of pg_rewind
which enforces recovery to happen once on a cluster not shut down
cleanly:
- Some comments and documentation improvements.
- Shutdown the cluster to rewind with immediate mode in all the tests,
this allows to check after the forced recovery behavior which is wanted
as new default.
- Use -F for the forced recovery step, so as postgres does not use
fsync. This was useless as a final sync is done once the tool is done.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Alexey Kondratov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20191004083721.GA1829@paquier.xyz
Commit aa087ec64 was a bit over-hasty about the doc changes needed
while splitting pg_statistic_ext_data off from pg_statistic_ext.
It duplicated one para and inserted another in what seems to me
to be the wrong section. Fix that up, and in passing do some minor
copy-editing.
Per report from noborusai.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAM3qnLXLUz4mOBkqa8jxigpKhKNxzSuvwpjvCRPvO5EqWjxSg@mail.gmail.com
These new options allow users to partition the pgbench_accounts table by
specifying the number of partitions and partitioning method. The values
allowed for partitioning method are range and hash.
This feature allows users to measure the overhead of partitioning if any.
Author: Fabien COELHO
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila, Amit Langote, Dilip Kumar, Asif Rehman, and
Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1907230826190.7008@lancre
The behavior described in the PREPARE man page applies only for the
default plan_cache_mode setting, so explain that properly. Rewrite
some of the text while I'm here. Per suggestion from Bruce.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190930155505.GA21095@momjian.us
This commit adds a mention that the order of columns specified during
multi-column most-common-value statistics is insignificant, and tries to
simplify examples.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190828162238.GA8360@momjian.us
Backpatch-through: 12
If we don't do this, the rewind fails if the server wasn't cleanly shut
down, which seems unhelpful serving no purpose.
Also provide a new option --no-ensure-shutdown to suppress this
behavior, for alleged advanced usage that prefers to avoid the crash
recovery.
Authors: Paul Guo, Jimmy Yih, Ashwin Agrawal
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEET0ZEffUkXc48pg2iqARQgGRYDiiVxDu+yYek_bTwJF+q=Uw@mail.gmail.com
The documentation states that no target settings will be used when
standby.signal is present, but this is not quite the case since
recovery_target_timeline is a valid recovery target for a standby.
Update the documentation with this exception.
Author: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/e445616d-023e-a268-8aa1-67b8b335340c%40pgmasters.net
This commit implements jsonpath .datetime() method as it's specified in
SQL/JSON standard. There are no-argument and single-argument versions of
this method. No-argument version selects first of ISO datetime formats
matching input string. Single-argument version accepts template string as
its argument.
Additionally to .datetime() method itself this commit also implements
comparison ability of resulting date and time values. There is some difficulty
because exising jsonb_path_*() functions are immutable, while comparison of
timezoned and non-timezoned types involves current timezone. At first, current
timezone could be changes in session. Moreover, timezones themselves are not
immutable and could be updated. This is why we let existing immutable functions
throw errors on such non-immutable comparison. In the same time this commit
provides jsonb_path_*_tz() functions which are stable and support operations
involving timezones. As new functions are added to the system catalog,
catversion is bumped.
Support of .datetime() method was the only blocker prevents T832 from being
marked as supported. sql_features.txt is updated correspondingly.
Extracted from original patch by Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Oleg Bartunov.
Heavily revised by me. Comments were adjusted by Liudmila Mantrova.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsZgYEra_PeCLGNoXOWYx6iU-S3wF8aX0ObQUcZU%2B4XTw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Eisentraut
The array <@ and @> operators do not worry about duplicates: if every
member of array X matches some element of array Y, then X is contained
in Y, even if several members of X get matched to the same Y member.
This was not explicitly stated in the docs though, so improve matters.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/156614120484.1310.310161642239149585@wrigleys.postgresql.org
This reverts commit bd7c95f0c1,
along with assorted follow-on fixes. There are some questions
about the definition and implementation of that statement, and
we don't have time to resolve them before v13 release. Rather
than ship the feature and then have backwards-compatibility
concerns constraining any redesign, let's remove it for now
and try again later.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/TY2PR01MB2443EC8286995378AEB7D9F8F5B10@TY2PR01MB2443.jpnprd01.prod.outlook.com
Provide some documentation about the differences between XQuery
regular expressions and those supported by Spencer's regex engine.
Since SQL now exposes XQuery regexps with the LIKE_REGEX operator,
I made this a standalone section designed to help somebody who
has to translate a LIKE_REGEX query to Postgres. (Eventually we might
extend Spencer's engine to allow precise implementation of XQuery,
but not today.)
Reference that in the jsonpath docs, provide definitions of the
XQuery flag letters, and add a description of the JavaScript-inspired
string literal syntax used within jsonpath. Also point out explicitly
that backslashes used within like_regex patterns will need to be doubled.
This also syncs the docs with the decision implemented in commit
d5b90cd64 to desupport XQuery's 'x' flag for now.
Jonathan Katz and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdvDci4iqNF9fhRkTqhe-5_8HmzeLt56drH%2B_Rv2rNRqfg@mail.gmail.com
It's important users be able to know (without looking at the source code)
that running DDL or DDL-like commands can interrupt autovacuum which can
lead to a lot of dead tuples and hence slower database operations.
Reported-by: James Coleman
Author: James Coleman
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 9.4
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAAaqYe-XYyNwML1=f=gnd0qWg46PnvD=BDrCZ5-L94B887XVxQ@mail.gmail.com
After more discussion, the new function added by ddbd5d8 could have been
designed in a better way. Based on an idea from Álvaro, instead of
returning one column which includes both the raw and combined flags, use
two columns, with one for the raw flags and one for the combined flags.
This also takes care of some issues with HEAP_LOCKED_UPGRADED and
HEAP_XMAX_IS_LOCKED_ONLY which are not really combined flags as they
depend on conditions defined by other raw bits, as mentioned by Amit.
While on it, fix an extra issue with combined flags. A combined flag
was returned if at least one of its bits was set, but all its bits need
to be set to include it in the result.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190913114950.GA3824@alvherre.pgsql
1. Commit 7086be6e3 should have documented the limitation that the direct
modification is disabled when WCO constraints are present, but didn't,
which is definitely my fault. Update the documentation (Postgres 9.6
onwards).
2. Commit fc22b6623 should have documented the limitation that the direct
modification is disabled when generated columns are defined, but
didn't. Update the documentation (Postgres 12 onwards).
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPmGK14AYCPunLb6TRz1CQsW5Le01Z2ox8LSOKH0P-cOVDcQRA%40mail.gmail.com
SQL Standard 2016 defines SSSSS format pattern for seconds past midnight in
jsonpath .datetime() method and CAST (... FORMAT ...) SQL clause. In our
datetime parsing engine we currently support it with SSSS name.
This commit adds SSSSS as an alias for SSSS. Alias is added in favor of
upcoming jsonpath .datetime() method. But it's also supported in to_date()/
to_timestamp() as positive side effect.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsZgYEra_PeCLGNoXOWYx6iU-S3wF8aX0ObQUcZU%2B4XTw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Eisentraut
SQL Standard 2016 defines FF1-FF9 format patters for fractions of seconds in
jsonpath .datetime() method and CAST (... FORMAT ...) SQL clause. Parsing
engine of upcoming .datetime() method will be shared with to_date()/
to_timestamp().
This patch implements FF1-FF6 format patterns for upcoming jsonpath .datetime()
method. to_date()/to_timestamp() functions will also get support of this
format patterns as positive side effect. FF7-FF9 are not supported due to
lack of precision in our internal timestamp representation.
Extracted from original patch by Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Oleg Bartunov.
Heavily revised by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPpHfdsZgYEra_PeCLGNoXOWYx6iU-S3wF8aX0ObQUcZU%2B4XTw%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Oleg Bartunov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Peter Eisentraut
The example used to explain 'Looping Through Query Results' uses
pseudo-materialized views. Replace it with a more up-to-date example
which does the same thing with actual materialized views, which have
been available since PostgreSQL 9.3.
In the passing, change '%' as format specifier instead of '%s' as is used
in other examples in plpgsql.sgml.
Reported-by: Ian Barwick
Author: Ian Barwick
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 9.4
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9a70d393-7904-4918-c97c-649f6d114b6a@2ndquadrant.com
Flags of t_infomask and t_infomask2 for each tuple are already included
in the information returned by heap_page_items as integers, and we
lacked a way to make that information human-readable.
Per discussion, the function includes an option which controls if
combined flags should be decomposed or not. The default is false, to
not decompose combined flags.
The module is bumped to version 1.8.
Author: Craig Ringer, Sawada Masahiko
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan, Robert Haas, Álvaro Herrera, Moon Insung,
Amit Kapila, Michael Paquier, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsr+YEY7jeaXOb+oX+RhDyOFuTMdmHjGsBxL=igCm03J0go9Q@mail.gmail.com
The previous wording was a bit too terse, too vague on the subject of
'host' and 'hostaddr' in connection specifications, which has caused
people to waste time trying to conform to rules because of
misunderstanding the whole thing; this small change should make things
clearer.
Author: Robert Haas, stemming from Fabien Coelho's complaints
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1808201323020.13832@lancre
When building statistics, we need to decide how many rows to sample and
how accurate the resulting statistics should be. Until now, it was not
possible to explicitly define statistics target for extended statistics
objects, the value was always computed from the per-attribute targets
with a fallback to the system-wide default statistics target.
That's a bit inconvenient, as it ties together the statistics target set
for per-column and extended statistics. In some cases it may be useful
to require larger sample / higher accuracy for extended statics (or the
other way around), but with this approach that's not possible.
So this commit introduces a new command, allowing to specify statistics
target for individual extended statistics objects, overriding the value
derived from per-attribute targets (and the system default).
ALTER STATISTICS stat_name SET STATISTICS target_value;
When determining statistics target for an extended statistics object we
first look at this explicitly set value. When this value is -1, we fall
back to the old formula, looking at the per-attribute targets first and
then the system default. This means the behavior is backwards compatible
with older PostgreSQL releases.
Author: Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190618213357.vli3i23vpkset2xd@development
Reviewed-by: Kirk Jamison, Dean Rasheed
When using COMMIT AND CHAIN or ROLLBACK AND CHAIN not in an explicit
transaction block, the previous implementation would leave a
transaction block active in the ROLLBACK case but not the COMMIT case.
To fix for now, error out when using these commands not in an explicit
transaction block. This restriction could be lifted if a sensible
definition and implementation is found.
Bug: #15977
Author: fn ln <emuser20140816@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
As a result of some long-ago quick hacks, the SIMILAR TO operator
and the corresponding flavor of substring() interpreted "ESCAPE NULL"
as selecting the default escape character '\'. This is both
surprising and not per spec: the standard is clear that these
functions should return NULL for NULL input.
Additionally, because of inconsistency of the strictness markings
of 3-argument substring() and similar_escape(), the planner could not
inline the SQL definition of substring(), resulting in a substantial
performance penalty compared to the underlying POSIX substring()
function.
The simplest fix for this would be to change the strictness marking
of similar_escape(), but if we do that we risk breaking existing views
that depend on that function. Hence, leave similar_escape() as-is
as a compatibility function, and instead invent a new function
similar_to_escape() that comes in two strict variants.
There are a couple of other behaviors in this area that are also
not per spec, but they are documented and seem generally at least
as sane as the spec's definition, so leave them alone. But improve
the documentation to describe them fully.
Patch by me; thanks to Álvaro Herrera and Andrew Gierth for review
and discussion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14047.1557708214@sss.pgh.pa.us
detoast.c/h contain functions required to detoast a datum, partially
or completely, plus a few other utility functions for examining the
size of toasted datums.
toast_internals.c/h contain functions that are used internally to the
TOAST subsystem but which (mostly) do not need to be accessed from
outside.
heaptoast.c/h contains code that is intrinsically specific to the
heap AM, either because it operates on HeapTuples or is based on the
layout of a heap page.
detoast.c and toast_internals.c are placed in
src/backend/access/common rather than src/backend/access/heap. At
present, both files still have dependencies on the heap, but that will
be improved in a future commit.
Patch by me, reviewed and tested by Prabhat Sabu, Thomas Munro,
Andres Freund, and Álvaro Herrera.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZv-=2iWM4jcw5ZhJeL18HF96+W1yJeYrnGMYdkFFnEpQ@mail.gmail.com
Clarify in the help output and documentation that -n, -t etc. take a
"pattern" rather than a "schema" or "table" etc. This was especially
confusing now that the new pg_dumpall --exclude-database option was
documented with "pattern" and the others not, even though they all
behave the same.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b85f3fa1-b350-38d1-1893-4f7911bd7310%402ndquadrant.com
Document that the tablespace sizes are in units of kilobytes. Make
the pg_basebackup source code a bit clearer about this, too.
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander <magnus@hagander.net>
The list of configure options has grown long, and there was next
to no organization to it, never mind any indication of which options
were interesting to most people. Break it into several sub-sections
to provide a bit of structure, and add some introductory text where
it seems helpful to point people to particular options.
I failed to resist the temptation to do a small amount of
word-smithing on some of the option descriptions, too.
But mostly this is reorganization and addition of intro text.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6384.1559917369@sss.pgh.pa.us
Section 16.2 pointed to platform-specific FAQ files that we removed
way back in 8.4. Section 16.7 contained a bunch of information about
AIX and HPUX bugs that were squashed decades ago, plus discussions of
old compiler versions that are certainly moot now that we require C99
support. Since we're obviously not maintaining this stuff carefully,
just remove it. The HPUX sub-section seems like it can go away
entirely, since everything it said that was still applicable was
redundant with material elsewhere in the chapter.
In passing, I couldn't resist the temptation to do a small amount
of copy-editing on nearby text.
Back-patch to v12, since this stuff is surely obsolete in any
branch that requires C99.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15538.1567042743@sss.pgh.pa.us
Give it an explanatory para like the other default roles have.
Don't imply that it can send any signal whatever.
In passing, reorder the table entries and explanatory paras
for the default roles into some semblance of consistency.
Ian Barwick, tweaked a bit by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/89907e32-76f3-7282-a89c-ea19c722fe5d@2ndquadrant.com
Section 4.2.7 says that unless otherwise specified, built-in
aggregates ignore rows in which any input is null. This is
not true of the JSON aggregates, but it wasn't documented.
Fix that.
Of the other entries in table 9.55, some were explicit about
ignoring nulls, and some weren't; for consistency and
self-contained-ness, make them all say it explicitly.
Per bug #15884 from Tim Möhlmann. Back-patch to all supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15884-c32d848f787fcae3@postgresql.org
This adds a section for heap-related functions. These were previously
mixed with functions having a more general purpose, leading to
confusion. While on it, add a query example for fsm_page_contents.
Backpatch down to 10, where b5e3942 introduced the subsections for
function types in pageinspect documentation.
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoDyM7E1+cK3-aWejxKTGC-wVVP2B+RnJhN6inXyeRmqzw@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 10
Previously, async.c got rid of duplicate notifications by scanning
the list of pending events to compare each one to the proposed new
event. This works okay for very small numbers of distinct events,
but degrades as O(N^2) for many events. We can improve matters by
using a hash table to probe for duplicates. So as not to add a
lot of overhead for the simple cases that the code did handle well
before, create the hash table only once a (sub)transaction has
queued more than 16 distinct notify events.
A downside is that we now have to do per-event work to propagate
a successful subtransaction's notify events up to its parent.
(But this isn't significant unless the subtransaction had many
events, in which case the O(N^2) behavior would have been in
play already, so we still come out ahead.)
We can make some lemonade out of this lemon, though: since we must
examine each event anyway, it's now possible to de-duplicate events
fully, rather than skipping that for events merged up from
subtransactions. Hence, remove the old weasel wording in notify.sgml
about whether de-duplication happens or not, and adjust the test
case in async-notify.spec that exhibited the old behavior.
While at it, rearrange the definition of struct Notification to make
it more compact and require just one palloc per event, rather than
two or three. This saves space when there are a lot of events,
in fact more than enough to buy back the space needed for the hash
table.
Patch by me, based on discussions around a different patch
submitted by Filip Rembiałkowski.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/17822.1564186806@sss.pgh.pa.us
VACUUM's reference page had this text, but ANALYZE's didn't. That's
a clear oversight given that section 5.7 explicitly delegates the
responsibility to define permissions requirements to the individual
commands' man pages.
Per gripe from Isaac Morland. Back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAMsGm5fp3oBUs-2iRfii0iEO=fZuJALVyM2zJLhNTjG34gpAVQ@mail.gmail.com
Commit aa27977fe2 introduced this
restriction for pg_temp.function_name(arg); do likewise for types
created in temporary schemas. Programs that this breaks should add
"pg_temp." schema qualification or switch to arg::type_name syntax.
Back-patch to 9.4 (all supported versions).
Reviewed by Tom Lane. Reported by Tom Lane.
Security: CVE-2019-10208
This reverts commit 88bdbd3f74.
As committed, statement sampling used the existing duration threshold
(log_min_duration_statement) when decide which statements to sample.
The issue is that even the longest statements are subject to sampling,
and so may not end up logged. An improvement was proposed, introducing
a second duration threshold, but it would not be backwards compatible.
So we've decided to revert this feature - the separate threshold should
be part of the feature itself.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRDS8tQ3Wviw9%3DAvODyUciPSrGeMhJi_WPE%2BEB8%2B4gLL-Q%40mail.gmail.com
The tests collate.icu.utf8 and collate.linux.utf8 were previously only
run when explicitly selected via EXTRA_TESTS. They require a UTF8
database, because the error messages in the expected files refer to
that, and they use some non-ASCII characters in the tests. Since
users can select any locale and encoding for the regression test run,
it was not possible to include these tests automatically.
To fix, use psql's \if facility to check various prerequisites such as
platform and the server encoding and quit the tests at the very
beginning if the configuration is not adequate. We then need to
maintain alternative expected files for these tests, but they are very
tiny and never need to change after this.
These two tests are now run automatically as part of the regression
tests.
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/052295c2-a2e1-9a21-bd36-8fbff8686cf3%402ndquadrant.com
The table has not been updated for some commands introduced in recent
releases, so refresh it. While on it, reorder entries alphabetically.
Backpatch all the way down for all the commands which have gone
missing.
Reported-by: Jeremy Smith
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15883-afff0ea3cc2dbbb6@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 9.4
When doing a schema-level or a database-level operation, a list of
relations to build is created which gets processed in parallel using
multiple connections, based on the recent refactoring for parallel slots
in src/bin/scripts/. System catalogs are processed first in a
serialized fashion to prevent deadlocks, followed by the rest done in
parallel.
This new option is not compatible with --system as reindexing system
catalogs in parallel can lead to deadlocks, and with --index as there is
no conflict handling for indexes rebuilt in parallel depending in the
same relation.
Author: Julien Rouhaud
Reviewed-by: Sergei Kornilov, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOBaU_YrnH_Jqo46NhaJ7uRBiWWEcS40VNRQxgFbqYo9kApUsg@mail.gmail.com
Make the directory where the pg_upgrade binary resides the default for
new bindir, as running the pg_upgrade binary from where the new
cluster is installed is a very common scenario. Setting this as the
defauly bindir for the new cluster will remove the need to provide it
explicitly via -B in many cases.
To support directories being missing from option parsing, extend the
directory check with a missingOk mode where the path must be filled at
a later point before being used. Also move the exec_path check to
earlier in setup to make sure we know the new cluster bindir when we
scan for required executables.
This removes the exec_path from the OSInfo struct as it is not used
anywhere.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9328.1552952117@sss.pgh.pa.us
Turn most mentions of libpq functions into links. At id attributes to
most libpq functions, where not existing yet, so that they can be
linked to. (In a handful of cases there were problems with the PDF
processing toolchain, so those instances were not changed.)
Author: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/alpine.DEB.2.21.1905121032330.27203@lancre
When making an xref to a varlistentry, the stylesheets use the first
<term> as the link text. In the cases fixed here, the <term> element
contained extra whitespace that ended up being part of the link text,
which looked strange in the output in some cases. This whitespace is
significant, so remove it since we don't want it.
The ids for linking to libpq functions were previously all lower-case.
Change to mixed-case, matching the actual function name, for easier
readability in the source. The output isn't changed in a significant
way, since the ids are converted to lower or upper case for file names
and anchors.
Using pg_receivewal with synchronous_commit = remote_apply set in the
backend is incompatible if pg_receivewal is a synchronous standby as it
never applies WAL, so document this problem and solutions to it.
Backpatch to 9.6, where remote_apply has been added.
Author: Robert Haas, Jesper Pedersen
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe, Álvaro Herrera, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1427a2d3-1e51-9335-1931-4f8853d90d5e@redhat.com
Backpatch-through: 9.6
Change the defaults for the pg_hba.conf generated by initdb to "peer"
for local (if supported, else "md5") and "md5" for host.
(Changing from "md5" to SCRAM is left as a separate exercise.)
"peer" is currently not supported on AIX, HP-UX, and Windows. Users
on those operating systems will now either have to provide a password
to initdb or choose a different authentication method when running
initdb.
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/bec17f0a-ddb1-8b95-5e69-368d9d0a3390%40postgresql.org
16828d5 has improved ALTER TABLE so as a column addition does not
require a rewrite for a non-NULL default with constant expressions, but
one spot in the documentation did not get updated consistently.
The documentation also now clarifies the fact that this does not apply
if the expression is volatile, where a table rewrite is still required.
Reported-by: Daniel Westermann
Author: Ian Barwick
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Daniel Westermann
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/DB6PR0902MB2184C7D5645CF15D75EB7957D2CF0@DB6PR0902MB2184.eurprd09.prod.outlook.com
Backpatch-through: 11
Now that commit fec0778c8 drew a clear line between public and private
fields in SPITupleTable, it seems pretty silly that the count of valid
tuples isn't on the public side of that line. The reason why not was
that there wasn't such a count. For reasons lost in the mists of time,
spi.c preferred to keep a count of remaining free entries in the array.
But that seems pretty pointless: it's unlike the way we handle similar
code everywhere else, and it involves extra subtractions that surely
outweigh having to do a comparison rather than test-for-zero to check
for array-full.
Hence, rearrange so that this code does the expansible array logic
the same as everywhere else, with a count of valid entries alongside
the allocated array length. And document the count as public.
I looked for core-code callers where it would make sense to start
relying on tuptable->numvals rather than the separate SPI_processed
variable. Right now there don't seem to be places where it'd be
a win to do so without more code restructuring than I care to
undertake today. In principle, though, having SPITupleTables be
fully self-contained should be helpful down the line.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16852.1563395722@sss.pgh.pa.us
The documentation mentioned that data checksums cannot be changed after
initialization, which is not true as pg_checksums can do that with its
--enable option introduced in v12. This simply removes the sentence
telling so.
Reported-by: Basil Bourque
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15909-e9d74271f1647472@postgresql.org
Backpatch-through: 12
The fields that we consider public are "tupdesc" and "vals", which
historically are in the middle of the struct. Move them to the front
(this should be perfectly safe to do in HEAD) and add comments to make
it quite clear which fields are public or not.
Also adjust spi.sgml's documentation of the struct to match.
That doc had bit-rotted somewhat, as it was missing some fields.
(Arguably we should just remove all the private fields from the docs,
but for now I refrained.)
Daniel Gustafsson, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0D19F836-B743-4340-B6A2-F148CA3DD1F0@yesql.se
At least on Fedora and RHEL, it's not in the same RPM that's needed
for building sepgsql itself. Today is the second or third time I've
had to rediscover how to install that, so let's document it this time.
This is numbered take 7, and addresses a set of issues around:
- Fixes for typos and incorrect reference names.
- Removal of unneeded comments.
- Removal of unreferenced functions and structures.
- Fixes regarding variable name consistency.
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/10bfd4ac-3e7c-40ab-2b2e-355ed15495e8@gmail.com
This adds a built-in function to generate UUIDs.
PostgreSQL hasn't had a built-in function to generate a UUID yet,
relying on external modules such as uuid-ossp and pgcrypto to provide
one. Now that we have a strong random number generator built-in, we
can easily provide a version 4 (random) UUID generation function.
This patch takes the existing function gen_random_uuid() from pgcrypto
and makes it a built-in function. The pgcrypto implementation now
internally redirects to the built-in one.
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/6a65610c-46fc-2323-6b78-e8086340a325@2ndquadrant.com
Index-based calculation of this operator is exact. So, signature of
gist_bbox_distance() function is changes so that caller is responsible for
setting *recheck flag.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/f71ba19d-d989-63b6-f04a-abf02ad9345d%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Nikita Glukhov
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Alexander Korotkov
This addresses a couple of issues in the code:
- Typos and inconsistencies in comments and function declarations.
- Removal of unreferenced function declarations.
- Removal of unnecessary compile flags.
- A cleanup error in regressplans.sh.
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0c991fdf-2670-1997-c027-772a420c4604@gmail.com
The code for conversions SQL_ASCII <-> MULE_INTERNAL and
SQL_ASCII <-> UTF8 was unreachable, because we long ago changed
the wrapper functions pg_do_encoding_conversion() et al so that
they have hard-wired behaviors for conversions involving SQL_ASCII.
(At least some of those fast paths date back to 2002, though it
looks like we may not have been totally consistent about this until
later.) Given the lack of complaints, nobody is dissatisfied with
this state of affairs. Hence, let's just remove the unreachable code.
Also, change CREATE CONVERSION so that it rejects attempts to
define such conversions. Since we consider that SQL_ASCII represents
lack of knowledge about the encoding in use, such a conversion would
be semantically dubious even if it were reachable.
Adjust a couple of regression test cases that had randomly decided
to rely on these conversion functions rather than any other ones.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/41163.1559156593@sss.pgh.pa.us
This is like \echo except that the text is sent to stderr not stdout.
In passing, fix a pre-existing bug in \echo and \qecho: per documentation
the -n switch should only be recognized when it is the first argument,
but actually any argument matching "-n" was treated as a switch.
(Should we back-patch that?)
David Fetter (bug fix by me), reviewed by Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190421183115.GA4311@fetter.org
The main change is a new stemmer for Greek. There are minor changes
in the Danish and French stemmers.
Author: Panagiotis Mavrogiorgos <pmav99@gmail.com>
In commit 18555b132 we tentatively established a rule that regression
tests should use names containing "regression" for databases, and names
starting with "regress_" for all other globally-visible object names, so
as to circumscribe the side-effects that "make installcheck" could have
on an existing installation.
This commit adds a simple enforcement mechanism for that rule: if the code
is compiled with ENFORCE_REGRESSION_TEST_NAME_RESTRICTIONS defined, it
will emit a warning (not an error) whenever a database, role, tablespace,
subscription, or replication origin name is created that doesn't obey the
rule. Running one or more buildfarm members with that symbol defined
should be enough to catch new violations, at least in the regular
regression tests. Most TAP tests wouldn't notice such warnings, but
that's actually fine because TAP tests don't execute against an existing
server anyway.
Since it's already the case that running src/test/modules/ tests in
installcheck mode is deprecated, we can use that as a home for tests
that seem unsafe to run against an existing server, such as tests that
might have side-effects on existing roles. Document that (though this
commit doesn't in itself make it any less safe than before).
Update regress.sgml to define these restrictions more clearly, and
to clean up assorted lack-of-up-to-date-ness in its descriptions of
the available regression tests.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16638.1468620817@sss.pgh.pa.us
When a partitioned tables contains foreign tables as partitions, it is
not possible to implement unique or primary key indexes -- but when
regular indexes are created, there is no reason to do anything other
than ignoring such partitions. We were raising errors upon encountering
the foreign partitions, which is unfriendly and doesn't protect against
any actual problems.
Relax this restriction so that index creation is allowed on partitioned
tables containing foreign partitions, becoming a no-op on them. (We may
later want to redefine this so that the FDW is told to create the
indexes on the foreign side.) This applies to CREATE INDEX, as well as
ALTER TABLE / ATTACH PARTITION and CREATE TABLE / PARTITION OF.
Backpatch to 11, where indexes on partitioned tables were introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15724-d5a58fa9472eef4f@postgresql.org
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
a96c41f has introduced the option for heap, but it still lacked the
variant to control the behavior for toast relations.
While on it, refactor the tests so as they stress more scenarios with
the various values that vacuum_index_cleanup can use. It would be
useful to couple those tests with pageinspect to check that pages are
actually cleaned up, but this is left for later.
Author: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoCqs8iN04RX=i1KtLSaX5RrTEM04b7NHYps4+rqtpWNEg@mail.gmail.com
The description is ended part way and PASSING clause is not implemented yet.
But the variables might be passed as parameters to several jsonpath functions.
So, complete the description based on the current implementation, leaving
description of PASSING clause in TODO.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKPRHz%2BxOuQSSvkuB1mCQjedd%2BB2B1Vnkrq0E-pLmoXyTO%2Bz9Q%40mail.gmail.com
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov
The SVG output produced by external tools needs some postprocessing.
This is implemented by this new XSL stylesheet.
Issues are:
- SVG produced by Ditaa does not add a viewBox attribute to the svg
element, needed to make the image scalable.
- SVG produced by Graphviz uses a stroke="transparent" attribute,
which is not valid SVG. It appears to mostly work, but FOP
complains.
Other tweaks can be added over time.
This reverts 7dc78d8ef3 and
29046c44f3, which applied these fixes
manually.
Regular per-column statistics are stored in pg_statistics catalog, which
is however rather difficult to read, so we also have pg_stats view with
a human-reablable version of the data.
For extended statistic the catalog was fairly easy to read, so we did
not have such human-readable view so far. Commit 9b6babfa2d however did
split the catalog into two, which makes querying harder. Furthermore,
we want to show the multi-column MCV list in a way similar to per-column
stats (and not as a bytea value).
This commit introduces pg_stats_ext view, joining the two catalogs and
massaging the data to produce human-readable output similar to pg_stats.
It also considers RLS and access privileges - the data is shown only when
the user has access to all columns the extended statistic is defined on.
Bumped CATVERSION due to adding new system view.
Author: Dean Rasheed, with improvements by me
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCUhT9rt7Ui%3DVdx4N%3D%3DVV5XOK5dsXfnGgVOz_JhAicB%3DZA%40mail.gmail.com
Since extended statistic got introduced in PostgreSQL 10, there was a
single catalog pg_statistic_ext storing both the definitions and built
statistic. That's however problematic when a user is supposed to have
access only to the definitions, but not to user data.
Consider for example pg_dump on a database with RLS enabled - if the
pg_statistic_ext catalog respects RLS (which it should, if it contains
user data), pg_dump would not see any records and the result would not
define any extended statistics. That would be a surprising behavior.
Until now this was not a pressing issue, because the existing types of
extended statistic (functional dependencies and ndistinct coefficients)
do not include any user data directly. This changed with introduction
of MCV lists, which do include most common combinations of values.
The easiest way to fix this is to split the pg_statistic_ext catalog
into two - one for definitions, one for the built statistic values.
The new catalog is called pg_statistic_ext_data, and we're maintaining
a 1:1 relationship with the old catalog - either there are matching
records in both catalogs, or neither of them.
Bumped CATVERSION due to changing system catalog definitions.
Author: Dean Rasheed, with improvements by me
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEZATCUhT9rt7Ui%3DVdx4N%3D%3DVV5XOK5dsXfnGgVOz_JhAicB%3DZA%40mail.gmail.com
Fixes some problems introduced by 6e5f8d489a:
* When reusing conninfo data from the previous connection in \connect,
the host address should only be reused if it was specified as
hostaddr; if it wasn't, then 'host' is resolved afresh. We were
reusing the same IP address, which ignores a possible DNS change
as well as any other addresses that the name resolves to than the
one that was used in the original connection.
* PQhost, PQhostaddr: Don't present user-specified hostaddr when we have
an inet_net_ntop-produced equivalent address. The latter has been
put in canonical format, which is cleaner (so it produces "127.0.0.1"
when given "host=2130706433", for example).
* Document the hostaddr-reusing aspect of \connect.
* Fix some code comments
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reported-by: Noah Misch
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190527203713.GA58392@gust.leadboat.com
datatype.sgml failed to explain that boolin() accepts any unique
prefix of the basic input strings. Indeed it was actively misleading
because it called out a few minimal prefixes without mentioning that
there were more valid inputs.
I also felt that it wasn't doing anybody any favors by conflating
SQL key words, valid Boolean input, and string literals containing
valid Boolean input. Rewrite in hopes of reducing the confusion.
Per bug #15836 from Yuming Wang, as diagnosed by David Johnston.
Back-patch to supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15836-656fab055735f511@postgresql.org
A few questionable partitioning designs have been cropping up lately
around the mailing lists. Generally, these cases have been partitioning
using too many partitions which have caused performance or OOM problems for
the users.
Since we have very little else to guide users into good design, here we
add a new section to the partitioning documentation with some best
practise guidelines for good design.
Reviewed-by: Justin Pryzby, Amit Langote, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f-2rx+E9mG3xrCVHupefMjAp1+tpczQa9SEOZWyU7fjEA@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 10
json_to_record(), when an output column is declared as type json or jsonb,
should emit the corresponding field of the input JSON object. But it got
this slightly wrong when the field is just a string literal: it failed to
escape the contents of the string. That typically resulted in syntax
errors if the string contained any double quotes or backslashes.
jsonb_to_record() handles such cases correctly, but I added corresponding
test cases for it too, to prevent future backsliding.
Improve the documentation, as it provided only a very hand-wavy
description of the conversion rules used by these functions.
Per bug report from Robert Vollmert. Back-patch to v10 where the
error was introduced (by commit cf35346e8).
Note that PG 9.4 - 9.6 also get this case wrong, but differently so:
they feed the de-escaped contents of the string literal to json[b]_in.
That behavior is less obviously wrong, so possibly it's being depended on
in the field, so I won't risk trying to make the older branches behave
like the newer ones.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/D6921B37-BD8E-4664-8D5F-DB3525765DCD@vllmrt.net
Removing shared memory and semaphores in response to server start
failure often masks the real problem, a live process associated with the
data directory; see commit 5a907404b5.
Since 9.6, it's rarely necessary to kill subprocesses manually. (When
it is necessary, that commit's HINT will say as much, in all supported
versions.)
Continuous operation cannot be achieved without applying this technique,
so it needs to be properly described.
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reported-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8756.1556302759@sss.pgh.pa.us
Support of CHECK OPTION for updatable views has been added in 9.4, but
the documentation of information_schema never got the call even if the
information displayed is correct.
Author: Gilles Darold
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/75d07704-6c74-4f26-656a-10045c01a17e@darold.net
Backpatch-through: 9.4
This makes the tool consistent with the option set of oid2name, which
has been historically using -f for filenodes, and has more recently
gained long options and --filenode via 1aaf532.
Reported-by: Peter Eisentraut
Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/97045260-fb9e-e145-a950-cf7d28c4eaea@2ndquadrant.com
This got forgotten in f56f8f which has added foreign key support for
partitioned tables. In passing, add a mention about caveats applying to
tables partitioned using inheritance regarding indexes and foreign keys.
Author: Paul A Jungwirth
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CA+renyUuSmYgmZjKc_DfUNVZ0uttF91-FwhDVW3F7WEPj0jL5w@mail.gmail.com
Commit 41b54ba78e allowed not only VACUUM but also ANALYZE options
to take a boolean argument. But it forgot to update the documentation
for ANALYZE. This commit adds the descriptions about those ANALYZE
boolean options into the documentation.
This patch also updates tab-completion for ANALYZE boolean options.
Reported-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwHTUt-kuwgiwe8f0AvTnB+ySqJWh95jvmh-qcoKW9YA9g@mail.gmail.com
Define the meanings of the POSIX-spec character classes in line,
rather than referring to the ctype(3) man page. That man page
doesn't even exist on many modern systems, and if it does exist
it probably says the wrong things about non-ASCII characters.
Also document our non-POSIX-spec "ascii" character class.
Also, point out here that this behavior is controlled by collation or
LC_CTYPE, since the existing text explaining that is pretty far away.
Per gripe from Geert Lobbestael. Given the lack of prior complaints,
I'm not excited about back-patching this.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/155837022049.1359.2948065118562813468@wrigleys.postgresql.org
It appears that some variants of .** jsonpath accessor are undocumented. In
particular undocumented variants are:
.**{level}
.**{lower_level to upper_level}
.**{lower_level to last}
This commit adds missing documentation for them.
SQL's regular-expression substring() function is defined to have a
pattern argument that's separated into three subpatterns by escape-
double-quote markers; the function result is the part of the input
matching the second subpattern. The standard makes it clear that
if there is ambiguity about how to match the input to the subpatterns,
the first and third subpatterns should be taken to match the smallest
possible amount of text (i.e., they're "non greedy", in the terms of
our regex code). We were not doing it that way: the first subpattern
would eat the largest possible amount of text, causing the function
result to be shorter than what the spec requires.
Fix that by attaching explicit greediness quantifiers to the
subpatterns. (This depends on the regex fix in commit 8a29ed053;
before that, this didn't reliably change the regex engine's behavior.)
Also, by adding parentheses around each subpattern, we ensure that
"|" (OR) in the subpatterns behave sanely. Previously, "|" in the
first or third subpatterns didn't work.
This patch also makes the function throw error if you write more than
two escape-double-quote markers, and do something sane if you write
just one, and document that behavior. Previously, an odd number of
markers led to a confusing complaint about unbalanced parentheses,
while extra pairs of markers were just ignored. (Note that the spec
requires exactly two markers, but we've historically allowed there
to be none, and this patch preserves the old behavior for that case.)
In passing, adjust some substring() test cases that didn't really
prove what they said they were testing for: they used patterns
that didn't match the data string, so that the output would be
NULL whether or not the function was really strict.
Although this is certainly a bug fix, changing the behavior in back
branches seems undesirable: applications could perhaps be depending on
the old behavior, since it's not obviously wrong unless you read the
spec very closely. Hence, no back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5bb27a41-350d-37bf-901e-9d26f5592dd0@charter.net
Per previous convention (see
ace397e9d2), drop SQL:2008 and only keep
the latest two standards and SQL-92.
Note: SQL:2016-2 lists a large number of non-reserved keywords that
are really just information_schema column names related to new
features. Those kinds of thing have not previously been listed as
keywords, and this was apparently done here by mistake, since these
keywords have been removed again in post-2016 working drafts. So in
order to avoid bloating the keywords table unnecessarily, I have
omitted these erroneous keywords here.
An upcoming HEAD-only patch will standardize the terminology around
ItemIdData variables/line pointers, ending the practice of referring to
them as "item pointers". Make the "Database Page Layout" docs
consistent with the new policy. The term "item identifier" is already
used in the same section, so stick with that.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=c=MZQjUzde3o9+2PLAPuHTpVZPPdYxN=E4ndQ2--8ew@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: All supported branches.
Previously it's documented that use of replication functions is
restricted to superusers. This is true for the functions which
use replication origin, but not for pg_logicl_emit_message() and
functions which use replication slot. For example, not only
superusers but also users with REPLICATION privilege is allowed
to use the functions for replication slot. This commit fixes
the documentation for the privileges required for those replication
functions.
Back-patch to 9.4 (all supported versions).
Author: Matsumura Ryo
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/03040DFF97E6E54E88D3BFEE5F5480F74ABA6E16@G01JPEXMBYT04
Word "singleton" is hard for user understanding, especially taking into account
there is only one place it's used in the docs and there is even no definition.
Use more evident wording instead.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/23737.1556550645%40sss.pgh.pa.us
This commit adds new parameter to VACUUM command, TRUNCATE,
which specifies that VACUUM should attempt to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table and allow the disk space
for the truncated pages to be returned to the operating system.
This parameter, if specified, overrides the vacuum_truncate
reloption. If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.
Author: Fujii Masao
Reviewed-by: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoD+qtrSDL=GSma4Wd3kLYLeRC0hPna-YAdkDeV4z156vg@mail.gmail.com
The SQL keywords table in the documentation had until now been
generated by some ad hoc scripting outside the source tree once for
each major release. This changes it to an automated process.
We have the PostgreSQL keywords available in a parseable format in
parser/kwlist.h. For the relevant SQL standard versions, keep the
keyword lists in new text files. A new script
generate-keywords-table.pl pulls it all together and produces a
DocBook table.
The final output in the documentation should be identical after this
change.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/07daeadd-8c82-0d95-5e19-e350502cb749%402ndquadrant.com
This feature was using a process local map to track the first few blocks
in the relation. The map was reset each time we get the block with enough
freespace. It was discussed that it would be better to track this map on
a per-relation basis in relcache and then invalidate the same whenever
vacuum frees up some space in the page or when FSM is created. The new
design would be better both in terms of API design and performance.
List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:
06c8a5090e Improve code comments in b0eaa4c51b.
13e8643bfc During pg_upgrade, conditionally skip transfer of FSMs.
6f918159a9 Add more tests for FSM.
9c32e4c350 Clear the local map when not used.
29d108cdec Update the documentation for FSM behavior..
08ecdfe7e5 Make FSM test portable.
b0eaa4c51b Avoid creation of the free space map for small heap relations.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190416180452.3pm6uegx54iitbt5@alap3.anarazel.de
The interaction of these parameters was a bit confused/confusing,
and in fact v11 entirely misses the opportunity to apply partition
constraints when a partition is accessed directly (rather than
indirectly from its parent).
In HEAD, establish the principle that enable_partition_pruning controls
partition pruning and nothing else. When accessing a partition via its
parent, we do partition pruning (if enabled by enable_partition_pruning)
and then there is no need to consider partition constraints in the
constraint_exclusion logic. When accessing a partition directly, its
partition constraints are applied by the constraint_exclusion logic,
only if constraint_exclusion = on.
In v11, we can't have such a clean division of these GUCs' effects,
partly because we don't want to break compatibility too much in a
released branch, and partly because the clean coding requires
inheritance_planner to have applied partition pruning to a partitioned
target table, which it doesn't in v11. However, we can tweak things
enough to cover the missed case, which seems like a good idea since
it's potentially a performance regression from v10. This patch keeps
v11's previous behavior in which enable_partition_pruning overrides
constraint_exclusion for an inherited target table, though.
In HEAD, also teach relation_excluded_by_constraints that it's okay to use
inheritable constraints when trying to prune a traditional inheritance
tree. This might not be thought worthy of effort given that that feature
is semi-deprecated now, but we have enough infrastructure that it only
takes a couple more lines of code to do it correctly.
Amit Langote and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9813f079-f16b-61c8-9ab7-4363cab28d80@lab.ntt.co.jp
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/29069.1555970894@sss.pgh.pa.us
This fixes a couple of grammar mistakes, typos and inconsistencies in
the documentation. Particularly, the configuration parsing allows only
"kB" to mean kilobyte but there were references in the docs to "KB".
Some instances of the latter are still in the code comments. Some
parameter values were mentioned with "Minus-one", and using directly
"-1" with proper markups is more helpful to the reader.
Some of these have been pointed out by Justin, and some others are
things I bumped into.
Author: Justin Pryzby, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190330224333.GQ5815@telsasoft.com
Recently added guidance on adding SVG images to the documentation
sources lacks advice on making the images responsive when rendered
in a variety of media types and viewports. Add some.
Patch by Jonathan Katz with some editorialization by me.
Author: Jonathan Katz
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6358ae6f-7191-a02b-e7b5-68050636ae71@postgresql.org
The documentation includes a section about index maintenance and
reindexing, mentioning a set of steps based on CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY
and ALTER TABLE (for constraint dependencies) to emulate REINDEX
CONCURRENTLY. Now that REINDEX CONCURRENTLY is supported, let's just
directly mention it instead.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmEL168t6w29aKrKXtpq9-apcmp0HC7K-fKt6ZgLXV6Dg@mail.gmail.com
Commit ca4103025d left a few loose ends. The most important one
(broken pg_dump output) is already fixed by virtue of commit
3b23552ad8, but some things remained:
* When ALTER TABLE rewrites tables, the indexes must remain in the
tablespace they were originally in. This didn't work because
index recreation during ALTER TABLE runs manufactured SQL (yuck),
which runs afoul of default_tablespace in competition with the parent
relation tablespace. To fix, reset default_tablespace to the empty
string temporarily, and add the TABLESPACE clause as appropriate.
* Setting a partitioned rel's tablespace to the database default is
confusing; if it worked, it would direct the partitions to that
tablespace regardless of default_tablespace. But in reality it does
not work, and making it work is a larger project. Therefore, throw
an error when this condition is detected, to alert the unwary.
Add some docs and tests, too.
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_1c260nOt_vBJ067AZ3JXptXVRohDVMLEBmudX1YEx-A@mail.gmail.com
Commit 3d956d9562 added support for update row movement in postgres_fdw.
This patch fixes the following issues introduced by that commit:
* When a remote partition chosen to insert routed rows into was also an
UPDATE subplan target rel that would be updated later, the UPDATE that
used a direct modification plan modified those routed rows incorrectly
because those routed rows were visible to the later UPDATE command.
The right fix for this would be to have some way in postgres_fdw in
which the later UPDATE command ignores those routed rows, but it seems
hard to do so with the current infrastructure. For now throw an error
in that case.
* When a remote partition chosen to insert routed rows into was also an
UPDATE subplan target rel, fmstate created for the UPDATE that used a
non-direct modification plan was mistakenly overridden by another
fmstate created for inserting those routed rows into the partition.
This caused 1) server crash when the partition would be updated later,
and 2) resource leak when the partition had been already updated. To
avoid that, adjust the treatment of the fmstate for the inserting. As
for #1, since we would also have the incorrectness issue as mentioned
above, error out in that case as well.
Update the docs to mention that postgres_fdw currently does not handle
the case where a remote partition chosen to insert a routed row into is
also an UPDATE subplan target rel that will be updated later.
Author: Amit Langote and Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote
Backpatch-through: 11 where row movement in postgres_fdw was added
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/21e7eaa4-0d4d-20c2-a1f7-c7e96f4ce440@lab.ntt.co.jp
This commit adds the description that "non-exclusive" pg_start_backup
and pg_stop_backup can be executed even during recovery. Previously
it was wrongly documented that those functions are not allowed to be
executed during recovery.
Back-patch to 9.6 where non-exclusive backup API was added.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwEuAYrEX7Yhmf2MCrTK81HDkkg-JqsOUh8zw6+zYC5zzw@mail.gmail.com
The GSSAPI encryption patch neglected to update the protocol
documentation to describe how to set up a GSSAPI encrypted connection
from a client to the server, so fix that by adding the appropriate
documentation to protocol.sgml.
The tests added for encryption support were overly long and couldn't be
run in parallel due to race conditions; this was largely because each
test was setting up its own KDC to perform the tests. Instead, merge
the authentication tests and the encryption tests into the original
test, where we only create one KDC to run the tests with. Also, have
the tests check what the server's opinion is of the connection and if it
was GSS authenticated or encrypted using the pg_stat_gssapi view.
In passing, fix the libpq label for GSSENC-Mode to be consistent with
the "PGGSSENCMODE" environment variable.
Missing protocol documentation pointed out by Michael Paquier.
Issues with the tests pointed out by Tom Lane and Peter Eisentraut.
Refactored tests and added documentation by me.
Reviewed by Robbie Harwood (protocol documentation) and Michael Paquier
(rework of the tests).
* Remove one unnecessary pg_class join in SQL command. Not needed,
because we use a regclass cast instead.
* Doc: refer to "partitioned relations" rather than specifically tables,
since indexes are also displayed.
* Rename "On table" column to "Table", for consistency with \di.
Author: Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190407212525.GB10080@telsasoft.com
Returning 0 could falsely indicate that there is no problem. NULL
correctly indicates that there is no information about potential
problems.
Also return 0 as numbackends instead of NULL for shared objects (as no
connection can be made to a shared object only).
Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Robert Treat <rob@xzilla.net>
Per discussion with others, allowing REINDEX INDEX CONCURRENTLY to work
for invalid indexes when working directly on them can have a lot of
value to unlock situations with invalid indexes without having to use a
dance involving DROP INDEX followed by an extra CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY (which would not work for indexes with constraint
dependency anyway). This also does not create extra bloat on the
relation involved as this works on individual indexes, so let's enable
it.
Note that REINDEX TABLE CONCURRENTLY still bypasses invalid indexes as
we don't want to bloat the number of indexes defined on a relation in
the event of multiple and successive failures of REINDEX CONCURRENTLY.
More regression tests are added to cover those behaviors, using an
invalid index created with CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.
Reported-by: Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, Álvaro Herrera
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190411134947.GA22043@alvherre.pgsql
Turn on the previously disabled automatic scaling of images in HTML
output. To avoid images looking too large on nowadays-normal screens,
restrict the width to 75% on such screens.
Some work is still necessary because SVG images without a viewBox
still won't scale, but that will a separate patch.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6d2442d1-84a2-36ef-e014-b6d1ece8a139%40postgresql.org
This adds a row to the pg_stat_database view with datoid 0 and datname
NULL for those objects that are not in a database. This was added
particularly for checksums, but we were already tracking more satistics
for these objects, just not returning it.
Also add a checksum_last_failure column that holds the timestamptz of
the last checksum failure that occurred in a database (or in a
non-dataabase file), if any.
Author: Julien Rouhaud <rjuju123@gmail.com>
Explain that it is not enforced that querying a generated column
returns data that is consistent with the data that was stored. This
is similar to the note about constraints nearby.
Reported-by: Amit Langote <amitlangote09@gmail.com>
vacuum_truncate controls whether vacuum tries to truncate off
any empty pages at the end of the table. Previously vacuum always
tried to do the truncation. However, the truncation could cause
some problems; for example, ACCESS EXCLUSIVE lock needs to
be taken on the table during the truncation and can cause
the query cancellation on the standby even if hot_standby_feedback
is true. Setting this reloption to false can be helpful to avoid
such problems.
Author: Tsunakawa Takayuki
Reviewed-By: Julien Rouhaud, Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier, Kirk Jamison and Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAHGQGwE5UqFqSq1=kV3QtTUtXphTdyHA-8rAj4A=Y+e4kyp3BQ@mail.gmail.com
The new command lists partitioned relations (tables and/or indexes),
possibly with their sizes, possibly including partitioned partitions;
their parents (if not top-level); if indexes show the tables they belong
to; and their descriptions.
While there are various possible improvements to this, having it in this
form is already a great improvement over not having any way to obtain
this report.
Author: Pavel Stěhule, with help from Mathias Brossard, Amit Langote and
Justin Pryzby.
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Mathias Brossard, Melanie Plageman,
Michaël Paquier, Álvaro Herrera
This uses the same infrastructure that the CREATE INDEX progress
reporting uses. Add a column to pg_stat_progress_create_index to
report the OID of the index being worked on. This was not necessary
for CREATE INDEX, but it's useful for REINDEX.
Also edit the phase descriptions a bit to be more consistent with the
source code comments.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/ef6a6757-c36a-9e81-123f-13b19e36b7d7%402ndquadrant.com
Similarly to the set of parameters for keepalive, a connection parameter
for libpq is added as well as a backend GUC, called tcp_user_timeout.
Increasing the TCP user timeout is useful to allow a connection to
survive extended periods without end-to-end connection, and decreasing
it allows application to fail faster. By default, the parameter is 0,
which makes the connection use the system default, and follows a logic
close to the keepalive parameters in its handling. When connecting
through a Unix-socket domain, the parameters have no effect.
Author: Ryohei Nagaura
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Robert Haas, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Kirk
Jamison, Mikalai Keida, Takayuki Tsunakawa, Andrei Yahorau
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/EDA4195584F5064680D8130B1CA91C45367328@G01JPEXMBYT04
This allows the user to create duplicates of existing replication slots,
either logical or physical, and even changing properties such as whether
they are temporary or the output plugin used.
There are multiple uses for this, such as initializing multiple replicas
using the slot for one base backup; when doing investigation of logical
replication issues; and to select a different output plugins.
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Petr Jelinek
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAm7XX8y_tOPP6j4Nzzch12FvA1wPqiO690RCk+uYVstg@mail.gmail.com
The limitations that it is not allowed to create/attach a foreign table
as a partition of an indexed partitioned table were not documented.
Reported-By: Stepan Yankevych
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-By: Amit Langote
Backpatch-through: 11 where partitioned index was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1553869152.858391073.5f8m3n0x@frv53.fwdcdn.com
There was some confusion over the format of the error message returned
from the server during GSSAPI startup; specifically, it was expected
that a length would be returned when, in reality, at this early stage in
the startup sequence, no length is returned from the server as part of
an error message.
Correct the client-side code for dealing with error messages sent by the
server during startup by simply reading what's available into our
buffer, after we've discovered it's an error message, and then reporting
back what was returned.
In passing, also add in documentation of the environment variable
PGGSSENCMODE which was missed previously, and adjust the code to look
for the PGGSSENCMODE variable (the environment variable change was
missed in the prior GSSMODE -> GSSENCMODE commit).
Error-handling issue discovered by Peter Eisentraut, the rest were items
discovered during testing of the error handling.
Since 11, it is possible to use a non-superuser role when using an
online source cluster with pg_rewind as long as the role has proper
permissions to execute on the source all the functions used by
pg_rewind, and the documentation stated that a superuser is necessary.
Let's add at the same time all the details needed to create such a
role.
A second confusion which comes a lot from users is that it is necessary
to issue a checkpoint on a freshly-promoted standby so as its control
file has up-to-date timeline information which is used by pg_rewind to
validate the operation. Let's document that properly. This is
back-patched down to 9.5 where pg_rewind has been introduced.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Magnus Hagander
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CABUevEz5bpvbwVsYCaSMV80CBZ5-82nkMzbb+Bu=h1m=rLdn=g@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
This is intended for use mostly in test scripts for external tools,
which could do without cross-PG-version variations in error message
wording. Of course, the SQLSTATE isn't guaranteed stable either, but
it should be more so than the error message text.
Note: there's a bit of an ABI change for libpq here, but it seems
OK because if somebody compiles against a newer version of libpq-fe.h,
and then tries to pass PQERRORS_SQLSTATE to PQsetErrorVerbosity()
of an older libpq library, it will be accepted and then act like
PQERRORS_DEFAULT, thanks to the way the tests in pqBuildErrorMessage3
have historically been phrased. That seems acceptable.
Didier Gautheron, reviewed by Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJRYxuKyj4zA+JGVrtx8OWAuBfE-_wN4sUMK4H49EuPed=mOBw@mail.gmail.com
The previous convention that stdout was selected by default when nothing
is specified was just too error-prone.
After a suggestion from Andrew Gierth.
Author: Euler Taveira
Reviewed-by: Yoshikazu Imai, José Arthur Benetasso Villanova
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sgwrmhdv.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
This commit adds a new reloption, vacuum_index_cleanup, which
controls whether index cleanup is performed for a particular
relation by default. It also adds a new option to the VACUUM
command, INDEX_CLEANUP, which can be used to override the
reloption. If neither the reloption nor the VACUUM option is
used, the default is true, as before.
Masahiko Sawada, reviewed and tested by Nathan Bossart, Alvaro
Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Darafei Praliaskouski, and me.
The wording of the documentation is mostly due to me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoAt5R3DNUZSjOoXDUY=naYPUOuffVsRzuTYMz29yLzQCA@mail.gmail.com
This adds documentation about the user oriented parts of table access
methods (i.e. the default_table_access_method GUC and the USING clause
for CREATE TABLE etc), adds a basic chapter about the table access
method interface, and adds a note to storage.sgml that it's contents
don't necessarily apply for non-builtin AMs.
Author: Haribabu Kommi and Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
Query planning is affected by a number of configuration options, and it
may be crucial to know which of those options were set to non-default
values. With this patch you can say EXPLAIN (SETTINGS ON) to include
that information in the query plan. Only options affecting planning,
with values different from the built-in default are printed.
This patch also adds auto_explain.log_settings option, providing the
same capability in auto_explain module.
Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih, John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e1791b4c-df9c-be02-edc5-7c8874944be0@2ndquadrant.com
This is useful to obtain a view of the different transaction types in an
application, regardless of the durations of the statements each runs.
Author: Adrien Nayrat
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Hayato Kuroda, Andres Freund
On both the frontend and backend, prepare for GSSAPI encryption
support by moving common code for error handling into a separate file.
Fix a TODO for handling multiple status messages in the process.
Eliminate the OIDs, which have not been needed for some time.
Add frontend and backend encryption support functions. Keep the
context initiation for authentication-only separate on both the
frontend and backend in order to avoid concerns about changing the
requested flags to include encryption support.
In postmaster, pull GSSAPI authorization checking into a shared
function. Also share the initiator name between the encryption and
non-encryption codepaths.
For HBA, add "hostgssenc" and "hostnogssenc" entries that behave
similarly to their SSL counterparts. "hostgssenc" requires either
"gss", "trust", or "reject" for its authentication.
Similarly, add a "gssencmode" parameter to libpq. Supported values are
"disable", "require", and "prefer". Notably, negotiation will only be
attempted if credentials can be acquired. Move credential acquisition
into its own function to support this behavior.
Add a simple pg_stat_gssapi view similar to pg_stat_ssl, for monitoring
if GSSAPI authentication was used, what principal was used, and if
encryption is being used on the connection.
Finally, add documentation for everything new, and update existing
documentation on connection security.
Thanks to Michael Paquier for the Windows fixes.
Author: Robbie Harwood, with changes to the read/write functions by me.
Reviewed in various forms and at different times by: Michael Paquier,
Andres Freund, David Steele.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/jlg1tgq1ktm.fsf@thriss.redhat.com
Previously, while primary keys could be made on partitioned tables, it
was not possible to define foreign keys that reference those primary
keys. Now it is possible to do that.
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Jesper Pedersen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181102234158.735b3fevta63msbj@alvherre.pgsql
This uses the progress reporting infrastructure added by c16dc1aca5,
adding support for CREATE INDEX and CREATE INDEX CONCURRENTLY.
There are two pieces to this: one is index-AM-agnostic, and the other is
AM-specific. The latter is fairly elaborate for btrees, including
reportage for parallel index builds and the separate phases that btree
index creation uses; other index AMs, which are much simpler in their
building procedures, have simplistic reporting only, but that seems
sufficient, at least for non-concurrent builds.
The index-AM-agnostic part is fairly complete, providing insight into
the CONCURRENTLY wait phases as well as block-based progress during the
index validation table scan. (The index validation index scan requires
patching each AM, which has not been included here.)
Reviewers: Rahila Syed, Pavan Deolasee, Tatsuro Yamada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181220220022.mg63bhk26zdpvmcj@alvherre.pgsql
This adds a new option to pg_checksums called -P/--progress, showing
every second some information about the computation state of an
operation for --check and --enable (--disable only updates the control
file and is quick). This requires a pre-scan of the data folder so as
the total size of checksummable items can be calculated, and then it
gets compared to the amount processed.
Similarly to what is done for pg_rewind and pg_basebackup, the
information printed in the progress report consists of the current
amount of data computed and the total amount of data to compute. This
could be extended later on.
Author: Michael Banck, Bernd Helmle
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1535719851.1286.17.camel@credativ.de
On at least ZFS, it can be beneficial to create new WAL files every
time and not to bother zero-filling them. Since it's not clear which
other filesystems might benefit from one or both of those things,
add individual GUCs to control those two behaviors independently and
make only very general statements in the docs.
Author: Jerry Jelinek, with some adjustments by Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera, Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra, Robert Haas and others
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPQ5Fo00QR7LNAcd1ZjgoBi4y97%2BK760YABs0vQHH5dLdkkMA%40mail.gmail.com
Remove the code that supported zipfian distribution parameters less
than 1.0, as it had undocumented performance hazards, and it's not
clear that the case is useful enough to justify either fixing or
documenting those hazards.
Also, since the code path for parameter > 1.0 could perform badly
for values very close to 1.0, establish a minimum allowed value
of 1.001. This solution seems superior to the previous vague
documentation warning about small values not performing well.
Fabien Coelho, per a gripe from Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/b5e172e9-ad22-48a3-86a3-589afa20e8f7@2ndquadrant.com
This unifies the various ad hoc logging (message printing, error
printing) systems used throughout the command-line programs.
Features:
- Program name is automatically prefixed.
- Message string does not end with newline. This removes a common
source of inconsistencies and omissions.
- Additionally, a final newline is automatically stripped, simplifying
use of PQerrorMessage() etc., another common source of mistakes.
- I converted error message strings to use %m where possible.
- As a result of the above several points, more translatable message
strings can be shared between different components and between
frontends and backend, without gratuitous punctuation or whitespace
differences.
- There is support for setting a "log level". This is not meant to be
user-facing, but can be used internally to implement debug or
verbose modes.
- Lazy argument evaluation, so no significant overhead if logging at
some level is disabled.
- Some color in the messages, similar to gcc and clang. Set
PG_COLOR=auto to try it out. Some colors are predefined, but can be
customized by setting PG_COLORS.
- Common files (common/, fe_utils/, etc.) can handle logging much more
simply by just using one API without worrying too much about the
context of the calling program, requiring callbacks, or having to
pass "progname" around everywhere.
- Some programs called setvbuf() to make sure that stderr is
unbuffered, even on Windows. But not all programs did that. This
is now done centrally.
Soft goals:
- Reduces vertical space use and visual complexity of error reporting
in the source code.
- Encourages more deliberate classification of messages. For example,
in some cases it wasn't clear without analyzing the surrounding code
whether a message was meant as an error or just an info.
- Concepts and terms are vaguely aligned with popular logging
frameworks such as log4j and Python logging.
This is all just about printing stuff out. Nothing affects program
flow (e.g., fatal exits). The uses are just too varied to do that.
Some existing code had wrappers that do some kind of print-and-exit,
and I adapted those.
I tried to keep the output mostly the same, but there is a lot of
historical baggage to unwind and special cases to consider, and I
might not always have succeeded. One significant change is that
pg_rewind used to write all error messages to stdout. That is now
changed to stderr.
Reviewed-by: Donald Dong <xdong@csumb.edu>
Reviewed-by: Arthur Zakirov <a.zakirov@postgrespro.ru>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6a609b43-4f57-7348-6480-bd022f924310@2ndquadrant.com
This commit makes existing GIN operator classes jsonb_ops and json_path_ops
support "jsonb @@ jsonpath" and "jsonb @? jsonpath" operators. Basic idea is
to extract statements of following form out of jsonpath.
key1.key2. ... .keyN = const
The rest of jsonpath is rechecked from heap.
Catversion is bumped.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Jonathan Katz, Pavel Stehule
This moves sample scan support to below tableam. It's not optional as
there is, in contrast to e.g. bitmap heap scans, no alternative way to
perform tablesample queries. If an AM can't deal with the block based
API, it will have to throw an ERROR.
The tableam callbacks for this are block based, but given the current
TsmRoutine interface, that seems to be required.
The new interface doesn't require TsmRoutines to perform visibility
checks anymore - that requires the TsmRoutine to know details about
the AM, which we want to avoid. To continue to allow taking the
returned number of tuples account SampleScanState now has a donetuples
field (which previously e.g. existed in SystemRowsSamplerData), which
is only incremented after the visibility check succeeds.
Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
This is an SQL-standard feature that allows creating columns that are
computed from expressions rather than assigned, similar to a view or
materialized view but on a column basis.
This implements one kind of generated column: stored (computed on
write). Another kind, virtual (computed on read), is planned for the
future, and some room is left for it.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/b151f851-4019-bdb1-699e-ebab07d2f40a@2ndquadrant.com
This commit reorders the paragraphs of the Notes section in order of
importance, and clarifies better the safe uses of pg_checksums for
replication setups.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903231404280.18811@lancre
Especially, warn about the hazards of mishandling the backup_label
file. Adjust a couple of server messages to be more clear about
the hazards associated with removing backup_label files, too.
David Steele and Robert Haas, reviewed by Laurenz Albe, Martín
Marqués, Peter Eisentraut, and Magnus Hagander.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/7d85c387-000e-16f0-e00b-50bf83c22127@pgmasters.net
This adds the CONCURRENTLY option to the REINDEX command. A REINDEX
CONCURRENTLY on a specific index creates a new index (like CREATE
INDEX CONCURRENTLY), then renames the old index away and the new index
in place and adjusts the dependencies, and then drops the old
index (like DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY). The REINDEX command also has
the capability to run its other variants (TABLE, DATABASE) with the
CONCURRENTLY option (but not SYSTEM).
The reindexdb command gets the --concurrently option.
Author: Michael Paquier, Andreas Karlsson, Peter Eisentraut
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Fujii Masao, Jim Nasby, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/60052986-956b-4478-45ed-8bd119e9b9cf%402ndquadrant.com#74948a1044c56c5e817a5050f554ddee
To support building indexes over tables of different AMs, the scans to
do so need to be routed through the table AM. While moving a fair
amount of code, nearly all the changes are just moving code to below a
callback.
Currently the range based interface wouldn't make much sense for non
block based table AMs. But that seems aceptable for now.
Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
The makefile rule for the (rarely used) plain-text output postgres.txt
was still written to use lynx, but in
96b8b8b6f9, where the INSTALL file was
switched to pandoc, the rest of the makefile support for lynx was
removed, so this was broken. Rewrite the rule to also use pandoc for
postgres.txt.
Introduce a third extended statistic type, supported by the CREATE
STATISTICS command - MCV lists, a generalization of the statistic
already built and used for individual columns.
Compared to the already supported types (n-distinct coefficients and
functional dependencies), MCV lists are more complex, include column
values and allow estimation of much wider range of common clauses
(equality and inequality conditions, IS NULL, IS NOT NULL etc.).
Similarly to the other types, a new pseudo-type (pg_mcv_list) is used.
Author: Tomas Vondra
Reviewed-by: Dean Rasheed, David Rowley, Mark Dilger, Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/dfdac334-9cf2-2597-fb27-f0fb3753f435@2ndquadrant.com
Column references are not allowed in default expressions and partition
bound expressions, and are restricted as such once the transformation of
their expressions is done. However, trying to use more complex column
references can lead to confusing error messages. For example, trying to
use a two-field column reference name for default expressions and
partition bounds leads to "missing FROM-clause entry for table", which
makes no sense in their respective context.
In order to make the errors generated more useful, this commit adds more
verbose messages when transforming column references depending on the
context. This has a little consequence though: for example an
expression using an aggregate with a column reference as argument would
cause an error to be generated for the column reference, while the
aggregate was the problem reported before this commit because column
references get transformed first.
The confusion exists for default expressions for a long time, and the
problem is new as of v12 for partition bounds. Still per the lack of
complaints on the matter no backpatch is done.
The patch has been written by Amit Langote and me, and Tom Lane has
provided the improvement of the documentation for default expressions on
the CREATE TABLE page.
Author: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20190326020853.GM2558@paquier.xyz
Partial revert of commit 6260cc550b, "pgbench: add \cset and \gset
commands".
While \gset is widely considered a useful and necessary tool for user-
defined benchmarks, \cset does not have as much value, and its
implementation was considered "not to be up to project standards"
(though I, Álvaro, can't quite understand exactly how). Therefore,
remove \cset.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1903230716030.18811@lancre
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/201901101900.mv7zduch6sad@alvherre.pgsql
This uses the same progress reporting infrastructure added in commit
c16dc1aca5 and extends it to these
additional cases. We lack the ability to track the internal progress
of sorts and index builds so the information reported is
coarse-grained for some parts of the operation, but it still seems
like a significant improvement over having nothing at all.
Tatsuro Yamada, reviewed by Thomas Munro, Masahiko Sawada, Michael
Paquier, Jeff Janes, Alvaro Herrera, Rafia Sabih, and by me. A fair
amount of polishing also by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/59A77072.3090401@lab.ntt.co.jp
Add command variants COMMIT AND CHAIN and ROLLBACK AND CHAIN, which
start new transactions with the same transaction characteristics as the
just finished one, per SQL standard.
Support for transaction chaining in PL/pgSQL is also added. This
functionality is especially useful when running COMMIT in a loop in
PL/pgSQL.
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/28536681-324b-10dc-ade8-ab46f7645a5a@2ndquadrant.com
Previously we were using the SQL:2003 definition, which doesn't allow
this, but that creates a serious dump/restore gotcha: there is no
setting of xmloption that will allow all valid XML data. Hence,
switch to the 2006 definition.
Since libxml doesn't accept <!DOCTYPE> directives in the mode we
use for CONTENT parsing, the implementation is to detect <!DOCTYPE>
in the input and switch to DOCUMENT parsing mode. This should not
cost much, because <!DOCTYPE> should be close to the front of the
input if it's there at all. It's possible that this causes the
error messages for malformed input to be slightly different than
they were before, if said input includes <!DOCTYPE>; but that does
not seem like a big problem.
In passing, buy back a few cycles in parsing of large XML documents
by not doing strlen() of the whole input in parse_xml_decl().
Back-patch because dump/restore failures are not nice. This change
shouldn't break any cases that worked before, so it seems safe to
back-patch.
Chapman Flack (revised a bit by me)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAN-V+g-6JqUQEQZ55Q3toXEN6d5Ez5uvzL4VR+8KtvJKj31taw@mail.gmail.com
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump, pg_rewind and
pg_basebackup provide which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when
testing things, not to be used in a production environment.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
An offline cluster can now work with more modes in pg_checksums:
- --enable enables checksums in a cluster, updating all blocks with a
correct checksum, and updating the control file at the end.
- --disable disables checksums in a cluster, updating only the control
file.
- --check is an extra option able to verify checksums for a cluster, and
the default used if no mode is specified.
When running --enable or --disable, the data folder gets fsync'd for
durability, and then it is followed by a control file update and flush
to keep the operation consistent should the tool be interrupted, killed
or the host unplugged. If no mode is specified in the options, then
--check is used for compatibility with older versions of pg_checksums
(named pg_verify_checksums in v11 where it was introduced).
Author: Michael Banck, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Fabien Coelho, Magnus Hagander, Sergei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
This adds a flag "deterministic" to collations. If that is false,
such a collation disables various optimizations that assume that
strings are equal only if they are byte-wise equal. That then allows
use cases such as case-insensitive or accent-insensitive comparisons
or handling of strings with different Unicode normal forms.
This functionality is only supported with the ICU provider. At least
glibc doesn't appear to have any locales that work in a
nondeterministic way, so it's not worth supporting this for the libc
provider.
The term "deterministic comparison" in this context is from Unicode
Technical Standard #10
(https://unicode.org/reports/tr10/#Deterministic_Comparison).
This patch makes changes in three areas:
- CREATE COLLATION DDL changes and system catalog changes to support
this new flag.
- Many executor nodes and auxiliary code are extended to track
collations. Previously, this code would just throw away collation
information, because the eventually-called user-defined functions
didn't use it since they only cared about equality, which didn't
need collation information.
- String data type functions that do equality comparisons and hashing
are changed to take the (non-)deterministic flag into account. For
comparison, this just means skipping various shortcuts and tie
breakers that use byte-wise comparison. For hashing, we first need
to convert the input string to a canonical "sort key" using the ICU
analogue of strxfrm().
Reviewed-by: Daniel Verite <daniel@manitou-mail.org>
Reviewed-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1ccc668f-4cbc-0bef-af67-450b47cdfee7@2ndquadrant.com
LDAP servers can be advertised on a network with RFC 2782 DNS SRV
records. The OpenLDAP command-line tools automatically try to find
servers that way, if no server name is provided by the user. Teach
PostgreSQL to do the same using OpenLDAP's support functions, when
building with OpenLDAP.
For now, we assume that HAVE_LDAP_INITIALIZE (an OpenLDAP extension
available since OpenLDAP 2.0 and also present in Apple LDAP) implies
that you also have ldap_domain2hostlist() (which arrived in the same
OpenLDAP version and is also present in Apple LDAP).
Author: Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=2hAnSfhdsd6vXsM6VZVN0br-FbAZ-O+Swk18S5HkCP=A@mail.gmail.com
Teach contrib/amcheck's bt_index_parent_check() function to take
advantage of the uniqueness property of heapkeyspace indexes in support
of a new verification option: non-pivot tuples (non-highkey tuples on
the leaf level) can optionally be re-found using a new search for each,
that starts from the root page. If a tuple cannot be re-found, report
that the index is corrupt.
The new "rootdescend" verification option is exhaustive, and can
therefore make a call to bt_index_parent_check() take a lot longer.
Re-finding tuples during verification is mostly intended as an option
for backend developers, since the corruption scenarios that it alone is
uniquely capable of detecting seem fairly far-fetched.
For example, "rootdescend" verification is much more likely to detect
corruption of the least significant byte of a key from a pivot tuple in
the root page of a B-Tree that already has at least three levels.
Typically, only a few tuples on a cousin leaf page are at risk of
"getting overlooked" by index scans in this scenario. The corrupt key
in the root page is only slightly corrupt: corrupt enough to give wrong
answers to some queries, and yet not corrupt enough to allow the problem
to be detected without verifying agreement between the leaf page and the
root page, skipping at least one internal page level. The existing
bt_index_parent_check() checks never cross more than a single level.
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wz=yTWnVu+HeHGKb2AGiADL9eprn-cKYAto4MkKOuiGtRQ@mail.gmail.com
Make nbtree treat all index tuples as having a heap TID attribute.
Index searches can distinguish duplicates by heap TID, since heap TID is
always guaranteed to be unique. This general approach has numerous
benefits for performance, and is prerequisite to teaching VACUUM to
perform "retail index tuple deletion".
Naively adding a new attribute to every pivot tuple has unacceptable
overhead (it bloats internal pages), so suffix truncation of pivot
tuples is added. This will usually truncate away the "extra" heap TID
attribute from pivot tuples during a leaf page split, and may also
truncate away additional user attributes. This can increase fan-out,
especially in a multi-column index. Truncation can only occur at the
attribute granularity, which isn't particularly effective, but works
well enough for now. A future patch may add support for truncating
"within" text attributes by generating truncated key values using new
opclass infrastructure.
Only new indexes (BTREE_VERSION 4 indexes) will have insertions that
treat heap TID as a tiebreaker attribute, or will have pivot tuples
undergo suffix truncation during a leaf page split (on-disk
compatibility with versions 2 and 3 is preserved). Upgrades to version
4 cannot be performed on-the-fly, unlike upgrades from version 2 to
version 3. contrib/amcheck continues to work with version 2 and 3
indexes, while also enforcing stricter invariants when verifying version
4 indexes. These stricter invariants are the same invariants described
by "3.1.12 Sequencing" from the Lehman and Yao paper.
A later patch will enhance the logic used by nbtree to pick a split
point. This patch is likely to negatively impact performance without
smarter choices around the precise point to split leaf pages at. Making
these two mostly-distinct sets of enhancements into distinct commits
seems like it might clarify their design, even though neither commit is
particularly useful on its own.
The maximum allowed size of new tuples is reduced by an amount equal to
the space required to store an extra MAXALIGN()'d TID in a new high key
during leaf page splits. The user-facing definition of the "1/3 of a
page" restriction is already imprecise, and so does not need to be
revised. However, there should be a compatibility note in the v12
release notes.
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Heikki Linnakangas, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkVb0Kom=R+88fDFb=JSxZMFvbHVC6Mn9LJ2n=X=kS-Uw@mail.gmail.com
Aggregates have acquired a dozen or so optional attributes in recent
years for things like parallel query and moving-aggregate mode; the
lack of an OR REPLACE option to add or change these for an existing
agg makes extension upgrades gratuitously hard. Rectify.
Add support of numeric error suppression to jsonpath as it's required by
standard. This commit doesn't use PG_TRY()/PG_CATCH() in order to implement
that. Instead, it provides internal versions of numeric functions used, which
support error suppression.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com
Author: Alexander Korotkov, Nikita Glukhov
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra
SQL 2016 standards among other things contains set of SQL/JSON features for
JSON processing inside of relational database. The core of SQL/JSON is JSON
path language, allowing access parts of JSON documents and make computations
over them. This commit implements partial support JSON path language as
separate datatype called "jsonpath". The implementation is partial because
it's lacking datetime support and suppression of numeric errors. Missing
features will be added later by separate commits.
Support of SQL/JSON features requires implementation of separate nodes, and it
will be considered in subsequent patches. This commit includes following
set of plain functions, allowing to execute jsonpath over jsonb values:
* jsonb_path_exists(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]),
* jsonb_path_match(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]),
* jsonb_path_query(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]),
* jsonb_path_query_array(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]).
* jsonb_path_query_first(jsonb, jsonpath[, jsonb, bool]).
This commit also implements "jsonb @? jsonpath" and "jsonb @@ jsonpath", which
are wrappers over jsonpath_exists(jsonb, jsonpath) and jsonpath_predicate(jsonb,
jsonpath) correspondingly. These operators will have an index support
(implemented in subsequent patches).
Catversion bumped, to add new functions and operators.
Code was written by Nikita Glukhov and Teodor Sigaev, revised by me.
Documentation was written by Oleg Bartunov and Liudmila Mantrova. The work
was inspired by Oleg Bartunov.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/fcc6fc6a-b497-f39a-923d-aa34d0c588e8%402ndQuadrant.com
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Teodor Sigaev, Alexander Korotkov, Oleg Bartunov, Liudmila Mantrova
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Andrew Dunstan, Pavel Stehule, Alexander Korotkov
Previously, the SERIALIZABLE isolation level prevented parallel query
from being used. Allow the two features to be used together by
sharing the leader's SERIALIZABLEXACT with parallel workers.
An extra per-SERIALIZABLEXACT LWLock is introduced to make it safe to
share, and new logic is introduced to coordinate the early release
of the SERIALIZABLEXACT required for the SXACT_FLAG_RO_SAFE
optimization, as follows:
The first backend to observe the SXACT_FLAG_RO_SAFE flag (set by
some other transaction) will 'partially release' the SERIALIZABLEXACT,
meaning that the conflicts and locks it holds are released, but the
SERIALIZABLEXACT itself will remain active because other backends
might still have a pointer to it.
Whenever any backend notices the SXACT_FLAG_RO_SAFE flag, it clears
its own MySerializableXact variable and frees local resources so that
it can skip SSI checks for the rest of the transaction. In the
special case of the leader process, it transfers the SERIALIZABLEXACT
to a new variable SavedSerializableXact, so that it can be completely
released at the end of the transaction after all workers have exited.
Remove the serializable_okay flag added to CreateParallelContext() by
commit 9da0cc35, because it's now redundant.
Author: Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Haribabu Kommi, Robert Haas, Masahiko Sawada, Kevin Grittner
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm=0gXGYhtrVDWOTHS8SQQy_=S9xo+8oCxGLWZAOoeJ=yzQ@mail.gmail.com
If a heap on the old cluster has 4 pages or fewer, and the old cluster
was PG v11 or earlier, don't copy or link the FSM. This will shrink
space usage for installations with large numbers of small tables.
This will allow pg_upgrade to take advantage of commit b0eaa4c51b where
we have avoided creation of the free space map for small heap relations.
Author: John Naylor
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCu4cOdm3uGnNEGXivy7Gz8UWyQjynDpdkPGabQ18_zK6g%40mail.gmail.com
Commit a6417078c missed updating some comments in transam.h about
reservation of high OIDs for development purposes. Also tamp down
an over-optimistic comment there about how easy it'd be to change
FirstNormalObjectId.
Earlier, commit 09568ec3d failed to update bki.sgml for the split
between genbki.pl-assigned OIDs and those assigned during initdb.
Also fix genbki.pl so that it will complain if it overruns
that split. It's possible that doing so would have no very bad
consequences, but that's no excuse for not detecting it.
If existing CHECK or NOT NULL constraints preclude the presence
of nulls, we need not look to see whether any are present.
Sergei Kornilov, reviewed by Stephen Frost, Ildar Musin, David Rowley,
and by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/81911511895540@web58j.yandex.ru
The current tool name is too restrictive and focuses only on verifying
checksums. As more options to control checksums for an offline cluster
are planned to be added, switch to a more generic name. Documentation
as well as all past references to the tool are updated.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Fabien Coelho, Seigei Kornilov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181221201616.GD4974@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
The SQL:2016 standard adds support for the hyperbolic functions
sinh(), cosh(), and tanh(). POSIX has long required libm to
provide those functions as well as their inverses asinh(),
acosh(), atanh(). Hence, let's just expose the libm functions
to the SQL level. As with the trig functions, we only implement
versions for float8, not numeric.
For the moment, we'll assume that all platforms actually do have
these functions; if experience teaches otherwise, some autoconf
effort may be needed.
SQL:2016 also adds support for base-10 logarithm, but with the
function name log10(), whereas the name we've long used is log().
Add aliases named log10() for the float8 and numeric versions.
Lætitia Avrot
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdguG22LO=rnxDQ2DW1uzv8aQoUzyDQNJjrR4k00XSgm5w@mail.gmail.com
In the v11-era commits that taught genbki.pl to resolve symbolic
OID references in the initial catalog data, we didn't bother to
make every last reference symbolic; some of the catalogs have so
few initial rows that it didn't seem worthwhile.
However, the new project policy that OIDs assigned by new patches
should be automatically renumberable changes this calculus.
A patch that wants to add a row in one of these catalogs would have
a problem when the OID it assigns gets renumbered. Hence, do the
mop-up work needed to make all OID references in initial data be
symbolic, and establish an associated project policy that we'll
never again write a hard-wired OID reference there.
No catversion bump since the contents of postgres.bki aren't
actually changed by this commit.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmMTGMcPuph4OvsO7Ykut0AOCF_i-=eaochT0dd2BN9CQ@mail.gmail.com
This commit adds a Perl script renumber_oids.pl, which can reassign a
range of manually-assigned OIDs to someplace else by modifying OID
fields of the catalog *.dat files and OID-assigning macros in the
catalog *.h files.
Up to now, we've encouraged new patches that need manually-assigned
OIDs to use OIDs just above the range of existing OIDs. Predictably,
this leads to patches stepping on each others' toes, as whichever
one gets committed first creates an OID conflict that other patch
author(s) have to resolve manually. With the availability of
renumber_oids.pl, we can eliminate a lot of this hassle.
The new project policy, therefore, is:
* Encourage new patches to use high OIDs (the documentation suggests
choosing a block of OIDs at random in 8000..9999).
* After feature freeze in each development cycle, run renumber_oids.pl
to move all such OIDs down to lower numbers, thus freeing the high OID
range for the next development cycle.
This plan should greatly reduce the risk of OID collisions between
concurrently-developed patches. Also, if such a collision happens
anyway, we have the option to resolve it without much effort by doing
an off-schedule OID renumbering to get the first-committed patch out
of the way. Or a patch author could use renumber_oids.pl to change
their patch's assignments without much pain.
This approach does put a premium on not hard-wiring any OID values
in places where renumber_oids.pl and genbki.pl can't fix them.
Project practice in that respect seems to be pretty good already,
but a follow-on patch will sand down some rough edges.
John Naylor and Tom Lane, per an idea of Peter Geoghegan's
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzmMTGMcPuph4OvsO7Ykut0AOCF_i-=eaochT0dd2BN9CQ@mail.gmail.com
Historically guc.c has just refused examples like set work_mem = '30.1GB',
but it seems more useful for it to take that and round off the value to
some reasonable approximation of what the user said. Just rounding to
the parameter's native unit would work, but it would lead to rather
silly-looking settings, such as 31562138kB for this example. Instead
let's round to the nearest multiple of the next smaller unit (if any),
producing 30822MB.
Also, do the units conversion math in floating point and round to integer
(if needed) only at the end. This produces saner results for inputs that
aren't exact multiples of the parameter's native unit, and removes another
difference in the behavior for integer vs. float parameters.
In passing, document the ability to use hex or octal input where it
ought to be documented.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1798.1552165479@sss.pgh.pa.us
COALESCE, GREATEST and LEAST all look like functions taking variable
numbers of arguments, but in fact they are not functions, and so
VARIADIC array arguments don't work with them. Add a note to the docs
explaining this fact.
The consensus is not to try to make this work, but just to document the
limitation.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRCaAtuXuRtvXf5GmPbAVriUQrNMo7-=TXUFN025S31R_w@mail.gmail.com
pgbench's arbitrary limit of 10 arguments for SQL statements or
metacommands is far too low. Increase it to 256.
This results in a very modest increase in memory usage, not enough to
worry about.
The maximum includes the SQL statement or metacommand. This is reflected
in the comments and revised TAP tests.
Simon Riggs and Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker with some light editing by me.
Reviewed by: David Rowley and Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jJiMJOAf-dLoHuR-8GENiK+eHTY=Omw38Qx7j2g0NDTXA@mail.gmail.com
1. The PARTITION OF clause of CREATE FOREIGN TABLE was not explained in
the CREATE FOREIGN TABLE reference page. Add it.
(Postgres 10 onwards)
2. The limitation that tuple routing cannot target partitions that are
foreign tables was not documented clearly enough. Improve wording.
(Postgres 10 onwards)
3. The UPDATE tuple re-routing concurrency behavior was explained in
the DDL chapter, which doesn't seem the right place. Move it to the
UPDATE reference page instead. (Postgres 11 onwards).
Authors: Amit Langote, David Rowley.
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita.
Reported-by: Derek Hans
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAGrP7a3Xc1Qy_B2WJcgAD8uQTS_NDcJn06O5mtS_Ne1nYhBsyw@mail.gmail.com
This reverts commit bd09503e63.
Per discussion, it seems like what we should do instead is to
reduce the default value of autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay by the
same factor. That's functionally equivalent as long as the
platform can accurately service the smaller delay request, which
should be true on anything released in the last 10 years or more.
And smaller, more-closely-spaced delays are better in terms of
providing a steady I/O load.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28720.1552101086@sss.pgh.pa.us
This change makes it possible to specify sub-millisecond delays,
which work well on most modern platforms, though that was not true
when the cost-delay feature was designed.
To support this without breaking existing configuration entries,
improve guc.c to allow floating-point GUCs to have units. Also,
allow "us" (microseconds) as an input/output unit for time-unit GUCs.
(It's not allowed as a base unit, at least not yet.)
Likewise change the autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay reloption to be
floating-point; this forces a catversion bump because the layout of
StdRdOptions changes.
This patch doesn't in itself change the default values or allowed
ranges for these parameters, and it should not affect the behavior
for any already-allowed setting for them.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1798.1552165479@sss.pgh.pa.us
Similarly to B-tree, GiST index access method gets support of INCLUDE
attributes. These attributes aren't used for tree navigation and aren't
present in non-leaf pages. But they are present in leaf pages and can be
fetched during index-only scan.
The point of having INCLUDE attributes in GiST indexes is slightly different
from the point of having them in B-tree. The main point of INCLUDE attributes
in B-tree is to define UNIQUE constraint over part of attributes enabled for
index-only scan. In GiST the main point of INCLUDE attributes is to use
index-only scan for attributes, whose data types don't have GiST opclasses.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/73A1A452-AD5F-40D4-BD61-978622FF75C1%40yandex-team.ru
Author: Andrey Borodin, with small changes by me
Reviewed-by: Andreas Karlsson
This allows a login to require both that the cn of the certificate
matches (like authentication type cert) *and* that another
authentication method (such as password or kerberos) succeeds as well.
The old value of clientcert=1 maps to the new clientcert=verify-ca,
clientcert=0 maps to the new clientcert=no-verify, and the new option
erify-full will add the validation of the CN.
Author: Julian Markwort, Marius Timmer
Reviewed by: Magnus Hagander, Thomas Munro
This adds a column that counts how many checksum failures have occurred
on files belonging to a specific database. Both checksum failures
during normal backend processing and those created when a base backup
detects a checksum failure are counted.
Author: Magnus Hagander
Reviewed by: Julien Rouhaud
tuple_data_split() lacked the type of the first argument, and
heap_page_item_attrs() has reversed the first and second argument,
with the bytea argument using an incorrect name.
Author: Laurenz Albe
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8f9ab7b16daf623e87eeef5203a4ffc0dece8dfd.camel@cybertec.at
Backpatch-through: 9.6
Correctly process nodes of more types than previously. In some cases,
nodes were being ignored (nothing was output); in other cases, trying to
return them resulted in errors about unrecognized nodes. In yet other
cases, necessary escaping (of XML special characters) was not being
done. Fix all those (as far as the authors could find) and add
regression tests cases verifying the new behavior.
I (Álvaro) was of two minds about backpatching these changes. They do
seem bugfixes that would benefit most users of the affected functions;
but on the other hand it would change established behavior in minor
releases, so it seems prudent not to.
Authors: Pavel Stehule, Markus Winand, Chapman Flack
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA6J25CtAZ2TuRvxK3gat7-bBUYh0rfE2yM7Hj9GD14Dg@mail.gmail.comhttps://postgr.es/m/8BDB0627-2105-4564-AA76-7849F028B96E@winand.at
The elephant in the room as pointed out by Chapman Flack, not fixed in
this commit, is that we still have XMLTABLE operating on XPath 1.0
instead of the standard-mandated XQuery (or even its subset XPath 2.0).
Fixing that is a major undertaking, however.
We still require AccessExclusiveLock on the partition itself, because
otherwise an insert that violates the newly-imposed partition
constraint could be in progress at the same time that we're changing
that constraint; only the lock level on the parent relation is
weakened.
To make this safe, we have to cope with (at least) three separate
problems. First, relevant DDL might commit while we're in the process
of building a PartitionDesc. If so, find_inheritance_children() might
see a new partition while the RELOID system cache still has the old
partition bound cached, and even before invalidation messages have
been queued. To fix that, if we see that the pg_class tuple seems to
be missing or to have a null relpartbound, refetch the value directly
from the table. We can't get the wrong value, because DETACH PARTITION
still requires AccessExclusiveLock throughout; if we ever want to
change that, this will need more thought. In testing, I found it quite
difficult to hit even the null-relpartbound case; the race condition
is extremely tight, but the theoretical risk is there.
Second, successive calls to RelationGetPartitionDesc might not return
the same answer. The query planner will get confused if lookup up the
PartitionDesc for a particular relation does not return a consistent
answer for the entire duration of query planning. Likewise, query
execution will get confused if the same relation seems to have a
different PartitionDesc at different times. Invent a new
PartitionDirectory concept and use it to ensure consistency. This
ensures that a single invocation of either the planner or the executor
sees the same view of the PartitionDesc from beginning to end, but it
does not guarantee that the planner and the executor see the same
view. Since this allows pointers to old PartitionDesc entries to
survive even after a relcache rebuild, also postpone removing the old
PartitionDesc entry until we're certain no one is using it.
For the most part, it seems to be OK for the planner and executor to
have different views of the PartitionDesc, because the executor will
just ignore any concurrently added partitions which were unknown at
plan time; those partitions won't be part of the inheritance
expansion, but invalidation messages will trigger replanning at some
point. Normally, this happens by the time the very next command is
executed, but if the next command acquires no locks and executes a
prepared query, it can manage not to notice until a new transaction is
started. We might want to tighten that up, but it's material for a
separate patch. There would still be a small window where a query
that started just after an ATTACH PARTITION command committed might
fail to notice its results -- but only if the command starts before
the commit has been acknowledged to the user. All in all, the warts
here around serializability seem small enough to be worth accepting
for the considerable advantage of being able to add partitions without
a full table lock.
Although in general the consequences of new partitions showing up
between planning and execution are limited to the query not noticing
the new partitions, run-time partition pruning will get confused in
that case, so that's the third problem that this patch fixes.
Run-time partition pruning assumes that indexes into the PartitionDesc
are stable between planning and execution. So, add code so that if
new partitions are added between plan time and execution time, the
indexes stored in the subplan_map[] and subpart_map[] arrays within
the plan's PartitionedRelPruneInfo get adjusted accordingly. There
does not seem to be a simple way to generalize this scheme to cope
with partitions that are removed, mostly because they could then get
added back again with different bounds, but it works OK for added
partitions.
This code does not try to ensure that every backend participating in
a parallel query sees the same view of the PartitionDesc. That
currently doesn't matter, because we never pass PartitionDesc
indexes between backends. Each backend will ignore the concurrently
added partitions which it notices, and it doesn't matter if different
backends are ignoring different sets of concurrently added partitions.
If in the future that matters, for example because we allow writes in
parallel query and want all participants to do tuple routing to the same
set of partitions, the PartitionDirectory concept could be improved to
share PartitionDescs across backends. There is a draft patch to
serialize and restore PartitionDescs on the thread where this patch
was discussed, which may be a useful place to start.
Patch by me. Thanks to Alvaro Herrera, David Rowley, Simon Riggs,
Amit Langote, and Michael Paquier for discussion, and to Alvaro
Herrera for some review.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+Tgmobt2upbSocvvDej3yzokd7AkiT+PvgFH+a9-5VV1oJNSQ@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoZE0r9-cyA-aY6f8WFEROaDLLL7Vf81kZ8MtFCkxpeQSw@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CA+TgmoY13KQZF-=HNTrt9UYWYx3_oYOQpu9ioNT49jGgiDpUEA@mail.gmail.com
This clause is used to indicate the passing mode of a XML document, but
we were doing it wrong: we accepted BY REF and ignored it, and rejected
BY VALUE as a syntax error. The reality, however, is that documents are
always passed BY VALUE, so rejecting that clause was silly. Change
things so that we accept BY VALUE.
BY REF continues to be accepted, and continues to be ignored.
Author: Chapman Flack
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5C297BB7.9070509@anastigmatix.net
This introduces the concept of table access methods, i.e. CREATE
ACCESS METHOD ... TYPE TABLE and
CREATE TABLE ... USING (storage-engine).
No table access functionality is delegated to table AMs as of this
commit, that'll be done in following commits.
Subsequent commits will incrementally abstract table access
functionality to be routed through table access methods. That change
is too large to be reviewed & committed at once, so it'll be done
incrementally.
Docs will be updated at the end, as adding them incrementally would
likely make them less coherent, and definitely is a lot more work,
without a lot of benefit.
Table access methods are specified similar to index access methods,
i.e. pg_am.amhandler returns, as INTERNAL, a pointer to a struct with
callbacks. In contrast to index AMs that struct needs to live as long
as a backend, typically that's achieved by just returning a pointer to
a constant struct.
Psql's \d+ now displays a table's access method. That can be disabled
with HIDE_TABLEAM=true, which is mainly useful so regression tests can
be run against different AMs. It's quite possible that this behaviour
still needs to be fine tuned.
For now it's not allowed to set a table AM for a partitioned table, as
we've not resolved how partitions would inherit that. Disallowing
allows us to introduce, if we decide that's the way forward, such a
behaviour without a compatibility break.
Catversion bumped, to add the heap table AM and references to it.
Author: Haribabu Kommi, Andres Freund, Alvaro Herrera, Dimitri Golgov and others
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.dehttps://postgr.es/m/20160812231527.GA690404@alvherre.pgsqlhttps://postgr.es/m/20190107235616.6lur25ph22u5u5av@alap3.anarazel.dehttps://postgr.es/m/20190304234700.w5tmhducs5wxgzls@alap3.anarazel.de
The original 200 default value was set back in f425b605f4 when the cost
delay settings were first added. Hardware has improved quite a bit since
then and we've also made improvements such as sorting buffers during
checkpoints (9cd00c457e) which should result in less random writes.
This low default value was reportedly causing problems with badly
configured servers and in the absence of a native method to remove
excessive bloat from tables without incurring an AccessExclusiveLock, this
often made cleaning up the damage caused by badly configured auto-vacuums
difficult.
It seems more likely that someone will notice that auto-vacuum is running
too quickly than too slowly, so let's go all out and multiple the default
value for the setting by 10. With the default vacuum_cost_page_dirty and
autovacuum_vacuum_cost_delay (assuming a page size of 8192 bytes), this
allows autovacuum a theoretical maximum dirty write rate of around 39MB/s
instead of just 3.9MB/s.
Author: David Rowley
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_YbXC2qTMPyCbmsPiKvZYwpuQNQMohiRXLj1r=8_rYvw@mail.gmail.com
For the upcoming pluggable table access methods it's quite
inconvenient to store tuples as HeapTuples, as that'd require
converting tuples from a their native format into HeapTuples. Instead
use slots to manage epq tuples.
To fit into that scheme, change the foreign data wrapper callback
RefetchForeignRow, to store the tuple in a slot. Insist on using the
caller provided slot, so it conveniently can be stored in the
corresponding EPQ slot. As there is no in core user of
RefetchForeignRow, that change was done blindly, but we plan to test
that soon.
To avoid duplicating that work for row locks, move row locks to just
directly use the EPQ slots - it previously temporarily stored tuples
in LockRowsState.lr_curtuples, but that doesn't seem beneficial, given
we'd possibly end up with a significant number of additional slots.
The behaviour of es_epqTupleSet[rti -1] is now checked by
es_epqTupleSlot[rti -1] != NULL, as that is distinguishable from a
slot containing an empty tuple.
Author: Andres Freund, Haribabu Kommi, Ashutosh Bapat
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180703070645.wchpu5muyto5n647@alap3.anarazel.de
This option functions similarly to pg_dump's --exclude-table option, but
for database names. The option can be given once, and the argument can
be a pattern including wildcard characters.
Author: Andrew Dunstan.
Reviewd-by: Fabien Coelho and Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/43a54a47-4aa7-c70e-9ca6-648f436dd6e6@2ndQuadrant.com
Reflecting an updated parameter value requires a server restart, which
was not mentioned in the documentation and in postgresql.conf.sample.
Reported-by: Thomas Poty
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15659-0cd812f13027a2d8@postgresql.org
By default, the fallback_application_name for a physical walreceiver
is "walreceiver". This means that multiple standbys cannot be
distinguished easily on a primary, for example in pg_stat_activity or
synchronous_standby_names.
If cluster_name is set, use that for fallback_application_name in the
walreceiver. (If it's not set, it remains "walreceiver".) If someone
set cluster_name to identify their instance, we might as well use that
by default to identify the node remotely as well. It's still possible
to specify another application_name in primary_conninfo explicitly.
Reviewed-by: Euler Taveira <euler@timbira.com.br>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1257eaee-4874-e791-e83a-46720c72cac7@2ndquadrant.com
Remove some unnecessary, legacy-looking use of the PROCEDURAL keyword
before LANGUAGE. We mostly don't use this anymore, so some of these
look a bit old.
There is still some use in pg_dump, which is harder to remove because
it's baked into the archive format, so I'm not touching that.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/2330919b-62d9-29ac-8de3-58c024fdcb96@2ndquadrant.com
In previous releases, the input file of dbtoepub was postgres.xml, and
dbtoepub knows to derive the output file name postgres.epub from that
automatically. But now the intput file is postgres.sgml (since
postgres.sgml is itself an XML file and we no longer need the
intermediate postgres.xml file), but dbtoepub doesn't know how to deal
with the .sgml suffix, so the automatically derived output file name
becomes postgres.sgml.epub. Fix by adding an explicit -o option.
In commit b0eaa4c51b, we have avoided the creation of FSM for small tables.
So the functions that use FSM to compute the free space can return zero for
such tables. This was previously also possible for the cases where the
vacuum has not been triggered to update FSM.
This commit updates the comments in code and documentation to reflect this
behavior.
Author: John Naylor
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CACPNZCtba-3m1q3A8gxA_vxg=T7gQf7gMbpR4Ciy5LntY-j+0Q@mail.gmail.com
Changes made by commit 02ddd49 mean that dumps made against pre version
12 instances are no longer comparable with those made against version 12
or later instances. This makes cross-version upgrade testing fail in the
buildfarm. Experimentation has shown that the error is cured if the
dumps are made when extra_float_digits is set to 0. Hence this patch
allows for it to be explicitly set rather than relying on pg_dump's
builtin default (3 in almost all cases). This feature might have other
uses, but should not normally be used.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c76f7051-8fd3-ec10-7579-1f8842305b85@2ndQuadrant.com
So far ECPG programs had to treat binary data for bytea column as 'char' type.
But this meant converting from/to escaped format with PQunescapeBytea/
PQescapeBytea() and therefore forcing users to add unnecessary code and cost
for the conversion in runtime. By adding a dedicated datatype for bytea most of
this special handling is no longer needed.
Author: Matsumura-san ("Matsumura, Ryo" <matsumura.ryo@jp.fujitsu.com>)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/03040DFF97E6E54E88D3BFEE5F5480F737A141F9@G01JPEXMBYT04
The dblink documentation claims that an empty string is returned if there
has been no error, however OK is actually returned in that case. Also,
clarify that an async error may not be seen unless dblink_is_busy() or
dblink_get_result() have been called first.
Backpatch to all supported branches.
Reported-by: realyota
Backpatch-through: 9.4
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/153371978486.1298.2091761143788088262@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Since this was also the variant used as an example in the docs, update
the docs to use float4-misrounded-input as an example instead, since
that is now the only remaining variant file.
Historically we've always materialized the full output of a CTE query,
treating WITH as an optimization fence (so that, for example, restrictions
from the outer query cannot be pushed into it). This is appropriate when
the CTE query is INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE, or is recursive; but when the CTE
query is non-recursive and side-effect-free, there's no hazard of changing
the query results by pushing restrictions down.
Another argument for materialization is that it can avoid duplicate
computation of an expensive WITH query --- but that only applies if
the WITH query is called more than once in the outer query. Even then
it could still be a net loss, if each call has restrictions that
would allow just a small part of the WITH query to be computed.
Hence, let's change the behavior for WITH queries that are non-recursive
and side-effect-free. By default, we will inline them into the outer
query (removing the optimization fence) if they are called just once.
If they are called more than once, we will keep the old behavior by
default, but the user can override this and force inlining by specifying
NOT MATERIALIZED. Lastly, the user can force the old behavior by
specifying MATERIALIZED; this would mainly be useful when the query had
deliberately been employing WITH as an optimization fence to prevent a
poor choice of plan.
Andreas Karlsson, Andrew Gierth, David Fetter
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87sh48ffhb.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
DECLARE STATEMENT is a statement that lets users declare an identifier
pointing at a connection. This identifier will be used in other embedded
dynamic SQL statement such as PREPARE, EXECUTE, DECLARE CURSOR and so on.
When connecting to a non-default connection, the AT clause can be used in
a DECLARE STATEMENT once and is no longer needed in every dynamic SQL
statement. This makes ECPG applications easier and more efficient. Moreover,
writing code without designating connection explicitly improves portability.
Authors: Ideriha-san ("Ideriha, Takeshi" <ideriha.takeshi@jp.fujitsu.com>)
Kuroda-san ("Kuroda, Hayato" <kuroda.hayato@jp.fujitsu.com>)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m4E72940DA2BF16479384A86D54D0988A565669DF@G01JPEXMBKW04
The guideline to "not use text with <ulink> so the URL appears in
printed output" is obsolete, since the URL appears as a footnote in
printed output in that case.
Reported-by: Chapman Flack <chap@anastigmatix.net>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/5C4B1F2F.2000106@anastigmatix.net
Previously, floating-point output was done by rounding to a specific
decimal precision; by default, to 6 or 15 decimal digits (losing
information) or as requested using extra_float_digits. Drivers that
wanted exact float values, and applications like pg_dump that must
preserve values exactly, set extra_float_digits=3 (or sometimes 2 for
historical reasons, though this isn't enough for float4).
Unfortunately, decimal rounded output is slow enough to become a
noticable bottleneck when dealing with large result sets or COPY of
large tables when many floating-point values are involved.
Floating-point output can be done much faster when the output is not
rounded to a specific decimal length, but rather is chosen as the
shortest decimal representation that is closer to the original float
value than to any other value representable in the same precision. The
recently published Ryu algorithm by Ulf Adams is both relatively
simple and remarkably fast.
Accordingly, change float4out/float8out to output shortest decimal
representations if extra_float_digits is greater than 0, and make that
the new default. Applications that need rounded output can set
extra_float_digits back to 0 or below, and take the resulting
performance hit.
We make one concession to portability for systems with buggy
floating-point input: we do not output decimal values that fall
exactly halfway between adjacent representable binary values (which
would rely on the reader doing round-to-nearest-even correctly). This
is known to be a problem at least for VS2013 on Windows.
Our version of the Ryu code originates from
https://github.com/ulfjack/ryu/ at commit c9c3fb1979, but with the
following (significant) modifications:
- Output format is changed to use fixed-point notation for small
exponents, as printf would, and also to use lowercase 'e', a
minimum of 2 exponent digits, and a mandatory sign on the exponent,
to keep the formatting as close as possible to previous output.
- The output of exact midpoint values is disabled as noted above.
- The integer fast-path code is changed somewhat (since we have
fixed-point output and the upstream did not).
- Our project style has been largely applied to the code with the
exception of C99 declaration-after-statement, which has been
retained as an exception to our present policy.
- Most of upstream's debugging and conditionals are removed, and we
use our own configure tests to determine things like uint128
availability.
Changing the float output format obviously affects a number of
regression tests. This patch uses an explicit setting of
extra_float_digits=0 for test output that is not expected to be
exactly reproducible (e.g. due to numerical instability or differing
algorithms for transcendental functions).
Conversions from floats to numeric are unchanged by this patch. These
may appear in index expressions and it is not yet clear whether any
change should be made, so that can be left for another day.
This patch assumes that the only supported floating point format is
now IEEE format, and the documentation is updated to reflect that.
Code by me, adapting the work of Ulf Adams and other contributors.
References:
https://dl.acm.org/citation.cfm?id=3192369
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane, Andres Freund, Donald Dong
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87r2el1bx6.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
The current wording can confuse the reader about constraint exclusion
being available at query execution, but this only applies to partition
pruning.
Reported-by: Shouyu Luo
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Chapman Flack, Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15629-2ef8b22e61f8333f@postgresql.org
For a long time, indxpath.c has had the ability to extract derived (lossy)
index conditions from certain operators such as LIKE. For just as long,
it's been obvious that we really ought to make that capability available
to extensions. This commit finally accomplishes that, by adding another
API for planner support functions that lets them create derived index
conditions for their functions. As proof of concept, the hardwired
"special index operator" code formerly present in indxpath.c is pushed
out to planner support functions attached to LIKE and other relevant
operators.
A weak spot in this design is that an extension needs to know OIDs for
the operators, datatypes, and opfamilies involved in the transformation
it wants to make. The core-code prototypes use hard-wired OID references
but extensions don't have that option for their own operators etc. It's
usually possible to look up the required info, but that may be slow and
inconvenient. However, improving that situation is a separate task.
I want to do some additional refactorization around selfuncs.c, but
that also seems like a separate task.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15193.1548028093@sss.pgh.pa.us
Since its introduction, max_wal_senders is counted as part of
max_connections when it comes to define how many connection slots can be
used for replication connections with a WAL sender context. This can
lead to confusion for some users, as it could be possible to block a
base backup or replication from happening because other backend sessions
are already taken for other purposes by an application, and
superuser-only connection slots are not a correct solution to handle
that case.
This commit makes max_wal_senders independent of max_connections for its
handling of PGPROC entries in ProcGlobal, meaning that connection slots
for WAL senders are handled using their own free queue, like autovacuum
workers and bgworkers.
One compatibility issue that this change creates is that a standby now
requires to have a value of max_wal_senders at least equal to its
primary. So, if a standby created enforces the value of
max_wal_senders to be lower than that, then this could break failovers.
Normally this should not be an issue though, as any settings of a
standby are inherited from its primary as postgresql.conf gets normally
copied as part of a base backup, so parameters would be consistent.
Author: Alexander Kukushkin
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Petr Jelínek, Masahiko Sawada, Oleksii
Kliukin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFh8B=nBzHQeYAu0b8fjK-AF1X4+_p6GRtwG+cCgs6Vci2uRuQ@mail.gmail.com
The original setup for dependencies of partitioned objects had
serious problems:
1. It did not verify that a drop cascading to a partition-child object
also cascaded to at least one of the object's partition parents. Now,
normally a child object would share all its dependencies with one or
another parent (e.g. a child index's opclass dependencies would be shared
with the parent index), so that this oversight is usually harmless.
But if some dependency failed to fit this pattern, the child could be
dropped while all its parents remain, creating a logically broken
situation. (It's easy to construct artificial cases that break it,
such as attaching an unrelated extension dependency to the child object
and then dropping the extension. I'm not sure if any less-artificial
cases exist.)
2. Management of partition dependencies during ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION
was complicated and buggy; for example, after detaching a partition
table it was possible to create cases where a formerly-child index
should be dropped and was not, because the correct set of dependencies
had not been reconstructed.
Less seriously, because multiple partition relationships were
represented identically in pg_depend, there was an order-of-traversal
dependency on which partition parent was cited in error messages.
We also had some pre-existing order-of-traversal hazards for error
messages related to internal and extension dependencies. This is
cosmetic to users but causes testing problems.
To fix#1, add a check at the end of the partition tree traversal
to ensure that at least one partition parent got deleted. To fix#2,
establish a new policy that partition dependencies are in addition to,
not instead of, a child object's usual dependencies; in this way
ATTACH/DETACH PARTITION need not cope with adding or removing the
usual dependencies.
To fix the cosmetic problem, distinguish between primary and secondary
partition dependency entries in pg_depend, by giving them different
deptypes. (They behave identically except for having different
priorities for being cited in error messages.) This means that the
former 'I' dependency type is replaced with new 'P' and 'S' types.
This also fixes a longstanding bug that after handling an internal
dependency by recursing to the owning object, findDependentObjects
did not verify that the current target was now scheduled for deletion,
and did not apply the current recursion level's objflags to it.
Perhaps that should be back-patched; but in the back branches it
would only matter if some concurrent transaction had removed the
internal-linkage pg_depend entry before the recursive call found it,
or the recursive call somehow failed to find it, both of which seem
unlikely.
Catversion bump because the contents of pg_depend change for
partitioning relationships.
Patch HEAD only. It's annoying that we're not fixing #2 in v11,
but there seems no practical way to do so given that the problem
is exactly a poor choice of what entries to put in pg_depend.
We can't really fix that while staying compatible with what's
in pg_depend in existing v11 installations.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzkypv1R+teZrr71U23J578NnTBt2X8+Y=Odr4pOdW1rXg@mail.gmail.com
Add support function requests for estimating the selectivity, cost,
and number of result rows (if a SRF) of the target function.
The lack of a way to estimate selectivity of a boolean-returning
function in WHERE has been a recognized deficiency of the planner
since Berkeley days. This commit finally fixes it.
In addition, non-constant estimates of cost and number of output
rows are now possible. We still fall back to looking at procost
and prorows if the support function doesn't service the request,
of course.
To make concrete use of the possibility of estimating output rowcount
for SRFs, this commit adds support functions for array_unnest(anyarray)
and the integer variants of generate_series; the lack of plausible
rowcount estimates for those, even when it's obvious to a human,
has been a repeated subject of complaints. Obviously, much more
could now be done in this line, but I'm mostly just trying to get
the infrastructure in place.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15193.1548028093@sss.pgh.pa.us
Rename/repurpose pg_proc.protransform as "prosupport". The idea is
still that it names an internal function that provides knowledge to
the planner about the behavior of the function it's attached to;
but redesign the API specification so that it's not limited to doing
just one thing, but can support an extensible set of requests.
The original purpose of simplifying a function call is handled by
the first request type to be invented, SupportRequestSimplify.
Adjust all the existing transform functions to handle this API,
and rename them fron "xxx_transform" to "xxx_support" to reflect
the potential generalization of what they do. (Since we never
previously provided any way for extensions to add transform functions,
this change doesn't create an API break for them.)
Also add DDL and pg_dump support for attaching a support function to a
user-defined function. Unfortunately, DDL access has to be restricted
to superusers, at least for now; but seeing that support functions
will pretty much have to be written in C, that limitation is just
theoretical. (This support is untested in this patch, but a follow-on
patch will add cases that exercise it.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15193.1548028093@sss.pgh.pa.us
The previous ordering of these steps satisfied the nominal requirement
that set_rel_pathlist_hook could editorialize on the whole set of Paths
constructed for a base relation. In practice, though, trying to change
the set of partial paths was impossible. Adding one didn't work because
(a) it was too late to be included in Gather paths made by the core code,
and (b) calling add_partial_path after generate_gather_paths is unsafe,
because it might try to delete a path it thinks is dominated, but that
is already embedded in some Gather path(s). Nor could the hook safely
remove partial paths, for the same reason that they might already be
embedded in Gathers.
Better to call extensions first, let them add partial paths as desired,
and then gather. In v11 and up, we already doubled down on that ordering
by postponing gathering even further for single-relation queries; so even
if the hook wished to editorialize on Gather path construction, it could
not.
Report and patch by KaiGai Kohei. Back-patch to 9.6 where Gather paths
were added.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOP8fzahwpKJRTVVTqo2AE=mDTz_efVzV6Get_0=U3SO+-ha1A@mail.gmail.com
This is useful when looking at partition trees with multiple layers, and
combined with pg_partition_tree, it provides the possibility to show up
an entire tree by just knowing one member at any level.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera, Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181207014015.GP2407@paquier.xyz
Up to now postgres_fdw has been using create_foreignscan_path() to
generate not only base-relation paths, but also paths for foreign joins
and foreign upperrels. This is wrong, because create_foreignscan_path()
calls get_baserel_parampathinfo() which will only do the right thing for
baserels. It accidentally fails to fail for unparameterized paths, which
are the only ones postgres_fdw (thought it) was handling, but we really
need different APIs for the baserel and join cases.
In HEAD, the best thing to do seems to be to split up the baserel,
joinrel, and upperrel cases into three functions so that they can
have different APIs. I haven't actually given create_foreign_join_path
a different API in this commit: we should spend a bit of time thinking
about just what we want to do there, since perhaps FDWs would want to
do something different from the build-up-a-join-pairwise approach that
get_joinrel_parampathinfo expects. In the meantime, since postgres_fdw
isn't prepared to generate parameterized joins anyway, just give it a
defense against trying to plan joins with lateral refs.
In addition (and this is what triggered this whole mess) fix bug #15613
from Srinivasan S A, by teaching file_fdw and postgres_fdw that plain
baserel foreign paths still have outer refs if the relation has
lateral_relids. Add some assertions in relnode.c to catch future
occurrences of the same error --- in particular, to catch other FDWs
doing that, but also as backstop against core-code mistakes like the
one fixed by commit bdd9a99aa.
Bug #15613 also needs to be fixed in the back branches, but the
appropriate fix will look quite a bit different there, since we don't
want to assume that existing FDWs get the word right away.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15613-092be1be9576c728@postgresql.org
In commit f16241bef7, we have changed the behavior for concurrent updates
that move row to a different partition, but forgot to update the docs.
Previously when an UPDATE command causes a row to move from one partition
to another, there is a chance that another concurrent UPDATE or DELETE
misses this row. However, now we raise a serialization failure error in
such a case.
Reported-by: David Rowley
Author: David Rowley and Amit Kapila
Backpatch-through: 11 where it was introduced
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f-iVhGD4-givQWpSROaYvO3c730W8yoRMTF9Gc3craY3w@mail.gmail.com
Historically we've had each release branch include all prior branches'
notes, including minor-release changes, back to the beginning of the
project. That's basically an O(N^2) proposition, and it was starting to
catch up with us: as of HEAD the back-branch release notes alone accounted
for nearly 30% of the documentation. While there's certainly some value
in easy access to back-branch notes, this is getting out of hand.
Hence, switch over to the rule that each branch contains only its own
release notes. So as to not make older notes too hard to find, each
branch will provide URLs for the immediately preceding branches'
release notes on the project website.
There might be value in providing aggregated notes across all branches
somewhere on the website, but that's a task for another day.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cbd4aeb5-2d9c-8b84-e968-9e09393d4c83@postgresql.org
Previously, all heaps had FSMs. For very small tables, this means that the
FSM took up more space than the heap did. This is wasteful, so now we
refrain from creating the FSM for heaps with 4 pages or fewer. If the last
known target block has insufficient space, we still try to insert into some
other page before giving up and extending the relation, since doing
otherwise leads to table bloat. Testing showed that trying every page
penalized performance slightly, so we compromise and try every other page.
This way, we visit at most two pages. Any pages with wasted free space
become visible at next relation extension, so we still control table bloat.
As a bonus, directly attempting one or two pages can even be faster than
consulting the FSM would have been.
Once the FSM is created for a heap we don't remove it even if somebody
deletes all the rows from the corresponding relation. We don't think it is
a useful optimization as it is quite likely that relation will again grow
to the same size.
Author: John Naylor, Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Tested-by: Mithun C Y
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAJVSVGWvB13PzpbLEecFuGFc5V2fsO736BsdTakPiPAcdMM5tQ@mail.gmail.com
Add PG_CFLAGS, PG_CXXFLAGS, and PG_LDFLAGS variables to pgxs.mk which
will be appended or prepended to the corresponding make variables.
Notably, there was previously no way to pass custom CXXFLAGS to third
party extension module builds, COPT and PROFILE supporting only CFLAGS
and LDFLAGS.
Backpatch all the way down to ease integration with existing
extensions.
Author: Christoph Berg
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Tom Lane, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181113104005.GA32154@msg.credativ.de
Backpatch-through: 9.4
The documentation includes sections to be able to initialize and start
Postgres via a couple of commands. Some of its recommendations involve
using directly "postgres", which is inconsistent with the recommendation
given by initdb. At the same time make some other command calls more
consistent with the rest, by using an absolute path when creating a
database.
Author: Andreas Scherbaum
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck, Ryan Lambert
These two new options can be used to improve the selectivity of
relations to vacuum or analyze even further depending on the age of
respectively their transaction ID or multixact ID, so as it is possible
to prioritize tables to prevent wraparound of one or the other.
Combined with --table, it is possible to target a subset of tables to
choose as potential processing targets.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
Previously, all heaps had FSMs. For very small tables, this means that the
FSM took up more space than the heap did. This is wasteful, so now we
refrain from creating the FSM for heaps with 4 pages or fewer. If the last
known target block has insufficient space, we still try to insert into some
other page before giving up and extending the relation, since doing
otherwise leads to table bloat. Testing showed that trying every page
penalized performance slightly, so we compromise and try every other page.
This way, we visit at most two pages. Any pages with wasted free space
become visible at next relation extension, so we still control table bloat.
As a bonus, directly attempting one or two pages can even be faster than
consulting the FSM would have been.
Once the FSM is created for a heap we don't remove it even if somebody
deletes all the rows from the corresponding relation. We don't think it is
a useful optimization as it is quite likely that relation will again grow
to the same size.
Author: John Naylor with design inputs and some code contribution by Amit Kapila
Reviewed-by: Amit Kapila
Tested-by: Mithun C Y
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CAJVSVGWvB13PzpbLEecFuGFc5V2fsO736BsdTakPiPAcdMM5tQ@mail.gmail.com
Before this change FunctionCallInfoData, the struct arguments etc for
V1 function calls are stored in, always had space for
FUNC_MAX_ARGS/100 arguments, storing datums and their nullness in two
arrays. For nearly every function call 100 arguments is far more than
needed, therefore wasting memory. Arg and argnull being two separate
arrays also guarantees that to access a single argument, two
cachelines have to be touched.
Change the layout so there's a single variable-length array with pairs
of value / isnull. That drastically reduces memory consumption for
most function calls (on x86-64 a two argument function now uses
64bytes, previously 936 bytes), and makes it very likely that argument
value and its nullness are on the same cacheline.
Arguments are stored in a new NullableDatum struct, which, due to
padding, needs more memory per argument than before. But as usually
far fewer arguments are stored, and individual arguments are cheaper
to access, that's still a clear win. It's likely that there's other
places where conversion to NullableDatum arrays would make sense,
e.g. TupleTableSlots, but that's for another commit.
Because the function call information is now variable-length
allocations have to take the number of arguments into account. For
heap allocations that can be done with SizeForFunctionCallInfoData(),
for on-stack allocations there's a new LOCAL_FCINFO(name, nargs) macro
that helps to allocate an appropriately sized and aligned variable.
Some places with stack allocation function call information don't know
the number of arguments at compile time, and currently variably sized
stack allocations aren't allowed in postgres. Therefore allow for
FUNC_MAX_ARGS space in these cases. They're not that common, so for
now that seems acceptable.
Because of the need to allocate FunctionCallInfo of the appropriate
size, older extensions may need to update their code. To avoid subtle
breakages, the FunctionCallInfoData struct has been renamed to
FunctionCallInfoBaseData. Most code only references FunctionCallInfo,
so that shouldn't cause much collateral damage.
This change is also a prerequisite for more efficient expression JIT
compilation (by allocating the function call information on the stack,
allowing LLVM to optimize it away); previously the size of the call
information caused problems inside LLVM's optimizer.
Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180605172952.x34m5uz6ju6enaem@alap3.anarazel.de
Previously, \g would successfully execute the COPY command, but
the target specification if any was ignored, so that the data was
always dumped to the regular query output target. This seems like
a clear bug, so let's not just fix it but back-patch it.
While at it, adjust the documentation for \copy to recommend
"COPY ... TO STDOUT \g foo" as a plausible alternative.
Back-patch to 9.5. The problem exists much further back, but the
code associated with \g was refactored enough in 9.5 that we'd
need a significantly different patch for 9.4, and it doesn't
seem worth the trouble.
Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15dadc39-e050-4d46-956b-dcc4ed098753@manitou-mail.org
Since LISTEN is (still) disallowed, UNLISTEN must be a no-op in a
hot-standby session, and so there's no harm in allowing it. This
change allows client code to not worry about whether it's connected
to a primary or standby server when performing session-state-reset
type activities. (Note that DISCARD ALL, which includes UNLISTEN,
was already allowed, making it inconsistent to reject UNLISTEN.)
Per discussion, back-patch to all supported versions.
Shay Rojansky, reviewed by Mi Tar
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CADT4RqCf2gA_TJtPAjnGzkC3ZiexfBZiLmA-mV66e4UyuVv8bA@mail.gmail.com
Previously, only literals were allowed. This change allows general
expressions, including functions calls, which are evaluated at the
time the DDL command is executed.
Besides offering some more functionality, it simplifies the parser
structures and removes some inconsistencies in how the literals were
handled.
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Tom Lane, Amit Langote
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/9f88b5e0-6da2-5227-20d0-0d7012beaa1c@lab.ntt.co.jp/
The pgbench regression test supposed that srandom() with a specific value
would result in deterministic output from random(), as required by POSIX.
It emerges however that OpenBSD is too smart to be constrained by mere
standards, so their random() emits nondeterministic output anyway.
While a workaround does exist, what seems like a better fix is to stop
relying on the platform's srandom()/random() altogether, so that what
you get from --random-seed=N is not merely deterministic but platform
independent. Hence, use a separate pg_jrand48() random sequence in
place of random().
Also adjust the regression test case that's supposed to detect
nondeterminism so that it's more likely to detect it; the original
choice of random_zipfian parameter tended to produce the same output
all the time even if the underlying behavior wasn't deterministic.
In passing, improve pgbench's docs about random_zipfian().
Back-patch to v11 where this code was introduced.
Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4615.1547792324@sss.pgh.pa.us
Extends the COPY FROM command with a WHERE condition, which allows doing
various types of filtering while importing the data (random sampling,
condition on a data column, etc.). Until now such filtering required
either preprocessing of the input data, or importing all data and then
filtering in the database. COPY FROM ... WHERE is an easy-to-use and
low-overhead alternative for most simple cases.
Author: Surafel Temesgen
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra, Masahiko Sawada, Lim Myungkyu
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CALAY4q_DdpWDuB5-Zyi-oTtO2uSk8pmy+dupiRe3AvAc++1imA@mail.gmail.com
Commit c0d0e54084 replaced the ones in the documentation, but missed out
on the ones in the code. Replace those as well, but unlike c0d0e54084,
don't backpatch the code changes to avoid breaking translations.
Attempting to use a temporary table within a two-phase transaction is
forbidden for ages. However, there have been uncovered grounds for
a couple of other object types and commands which work on temporary
objects with two-phase commit. In short, trying to create, lock or drop
an object on a temporary schema should not be authorized within a
two-phase transaction, as it would cause its state to create
dependencies with other sessions, causing all sorts of side effects with
the existing session or other sessions spawned later on trying to use
the same temporary schema name.
Regression tests are added to cover all the grounds found, the original
report mentioned function creation, but monitoring closer there are many
other patterns with LOCK, DROP or CREATE EXTENSION which are involved.
One of the symptoms resulting in combining both is that the session
which used the temporary schema is not able to shut down completely,
waiting for being able to drop the temporary schema, something that it
cannot complete because of the two-phase transaction involved with
temporary objects. In this case the client is able to disconnect but
the session remains alive on the backend-side, potentially blocking
connection backend slots from being used. Other problems reported could
also involve server crashes.
This is back-patched down to v10, which is where 9b013dc has introduced
MyXactFlags, something that this patch relies on.
Reported-by: Alexey Bashtanov
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5d910e2e-0db8-ec06-dd5f-baec420513c3@imap.cc
Backpatch-through: 10
These have been found while cross-checking for the use of unique words
in the documentation, and a wait event was not getting generated in a way
consistent to what the documentation provided.
Author: Alexander Lakhin
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9b5a3a85-899a-ae62-dbab-1e7943aa5ab1@gmail.com
With the previous rule, if pandoc was missing, a zero-length output
file would be created without an error from make. To improve that,
write the rule as two separate commands without a pipe.
Reported-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Since approximately PostgreSQL 10, it is no longer required that
environment variables at installation time such as PERL, PYTHON, TCLSH
be "full path names", so change that phrasing in the installation
instructions. (The exact time of change appears to differ for PERL
and the others, but it works consistently in PostgreSQL 10.)
Also while we're here document the defaults for PERL and PYTHON, but
since the search list for TCLSH is so long, let's leave that out so we
don't need to maintain a copy of that list in the installation
instructions.
This value represents the default behavior of using the current
timeline. Previously, this was represented by an empty string.
(Before the removal of recovery.conf, this setting could not be chosen
explicitly but was used when recovery_target_timeline was not
mentioned at all.)
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/6dd2c23a-4162-8469-410f-bfe146e28c0c@2ndquadrant.com/
Reviewed-by: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
particular user/db/query.
The function pg_stat_statements_reset() is extended to accept userid, dbid,
and queryid as input parameters. Now, it can discard the statistics
gathered so far by pg_stat_statements corresponding to the specified
userid, dbid, and queryid. If no parameter is specified or all the
specified parameters have default value aka 0, it will discard all
statistics as per the old behavior.
The new behavior is useful to get the fresh statistics for a specific
user/database/query without resetting all the existing statistics.
Author: Haribabu Kommi, with few additional changes by me
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Amit Kapila and Fujii Masao
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGcyh-gkFswyc6C661K6cknL0XkNqVT0sQt2mFNMR4HRKA@mail.gmail.com
These commands allow assignment of values produced by queries to pgbench
variables, where they can be used by further commands. \gset terminates
a command sequence (just like a bare semicolon); \cset separates
multiple queries in a compound command, like an escaped semicolon (\;).
A prefix can be provided to the \-command and is prepended to the name
of each output column to produce the final variable name.
This feature allows pgbench scripts to react meaningfully to the actual
database contents, allowing more powerful benchmarks to be written.
Authors: Fabien Coelho, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Stephen Frost <sfrost@snowman.net>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane <tgl@sss.pgh.pa.us>
Reviewed-by: Tatsuo Ishii <ishii@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Rafia Sabih <rafia.sabih@enterprisedb.com>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.20.1607091005330.3412@sto
For a long time, plpgsql has allowed trigger functions to parse
references to OLD and NEW even if the current trigger event type didn't
assign a value to one or the other variable; but actually executing such
a reference would fail. The v11 changes to use "expanded records" for
DTYPE_REC variables changed the behavior so that the unassigned variable
now reads as a null composite value. While this behavioral change was
more or less unintentional, it seems that leaving it like this is better
than adding code and complexity to be bug-compatible with the old way.
The change doesn't break any code that worked before, and it eliminates
a gotcha that often required extra code to work around.
Hence, update the docs to say that these variables are "null" not
"unassigned" when not relevant to the event type. And add a regression
test covering the behavior, so that we'll notice if we ever break it
again.
Per report from Kristjan Tammekivi.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAABK7uL-uC9ZxKBXzo_68pKt7cECfNRv+c35CXZpjq6jCAzYYA@mail.gmail.com
runtime.sgml said that you couldn't change SysV IPC parameters on OpenBSD
except by rebuilding the kernel. That's definitely wrong in OpenBSD 6.x,
and excavation in their man pages says it changed in OpenBSD 3.3.
Update NetBSD and OpenBSD sections to recommend adjustment of the SEMMNI
and SEMMNS settings, which are painfully small by default on those
platforms. (The discussion thread contemplated recommending that
people select POSIX semaphores instead, but the performance consequences
of that aren't really clear, so I'll refrain.)
Remove pointless discussion of SEMMNU and SEMMAP from the FreeBSD
section. Minor other wordsmithing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/27582.1546928073@sss.pgh.pa.us
DISABLE_PAGE_SKIPPING is available since v9.6, and SKIP_LOCKED since
v12. They lacked equivalents for vacuumdb, so this closes the gap.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/FFE5373C-E26A-495B-B5C8-911EC4A41C5E@amazon.com
Instead of running a SQL script to create the standard conversion
functions and pg_conversion entries, put those entries into the
initial data in postgres.bki.
This shaves a few percent off the runtime of initdb, and also allows
accurate comments to be attached to the conversion functions; the
previous script labeled them with machine-generated comments that
were not quite right for multi-purpose conversion functions.
Also, we can get rid of the duplicative Makefile and MSVC perl
implementations of the generation code for that SQL script.
A functional change is that these pg_proc and pg_conversion entries
are now "pinned" by initdb. Leaving them unpinned was perhaps a
good thing back while the conversions feature was under development,
but there seems no valid reason for it now.
Also, the conversion functions are now marked as immutable, where
before they were volatile by virtue of lacking any explicit
specification. That seems like it was just an oversight.
To avoid using magic constants in pg_conversion.dat, extend
genbki.pl to allow encoding names to be converted, much as it
does for language, access method, etc names.
John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVSVGWtUqxpfAaxS88vEGvi+jKzWZb2EStu5io-UPc4p9rSJg@mail.gmail.com
This patch teaches genbki.pl to replace pg_language names by OIDs
in much the same way as it already does for pg_am names etc, and
converts pg_proc.dat to use such symbolic references in the prolang
column.
Aside from getting rid of a few more magic numbers in the initial
catalog data, this means that Gen_fmgrtab.pl no longer needs to read
pg_language.dat, since it doesn't have to know the OID of the "internal"
language; now it's just looking for the string "internal".
No need for a catversion bump, since the contents of postgres.bki
don't actually change at all.
John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVSVGWtUqxpfAaxS88vEGvi+jKzWZb2EStu5io-UPc4p9rSJg@mail.gmail.com
This removes a portion of infrastructure introduced by fe0a0b5 to allow
compilation of Postgres in environments where no strong random source is
available, meaning that there is no linking to OpenSSL and no
/dev/urandom (Windows having its own CryptoAPI). No systems shipped
this century lack /dev/urandom, and the buildfarm is actually not
testing this switch at all, so just remove it. This simplifies
particularly some backend code which included a fallback implementation
using shared memory, and removes a set of alternate regression output
files from pgcrypto.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181230063219.GG608@paquier.xyz
Previously, the SQL random() function depended on libc's random(3),
and setseed() invoked srandom(3). This results in interference between
these functions and backend-internal uses of random(3). We'd never paid
too much mind to that, but in the wake of commit 88bdbd3f7 which added
log_statement_sample_rate, the interference arguably has a security
consequence: if log_statement_sample_rate is active then an unprivileged
user could probably control which if any of his SQL commands get logged,
by issuing setseed() at the right times. That seems bad.
To fix this reliably, we need random() and setseed() to use their own
private random state variable. Standard random(3) isn't amenable to such
usage, so let's switch to pg_erand48(). It's hard to say whether that's
more or less "random" than any particular platform's version of random(3),
but it does have a wider seed value and a longer period than are required
by POSIX, so we can hope that this isn't a big downgrade. Also, we should
now have uniform behavior of random() across platforms, which is worth
something.
While at it, upgrade the per-process seed initialization method to use
pg_strong_random() if available, greatly reducing the predictability
of the initial seed value. (I'll separately do something similar for
the internal uses of random().)
In addition to forestalling the possible security problem, this has a
benefit in the other direction, which is that we can now document
setseed() as guaranteeing a reproducible sequence of random() values.
Previously, because of the possibility of internal calls of random(3),
we could not promise any such thing.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3859.1545849900@sss.pgh.pa.us
The documentation of ON DELETE and ON UPDATE uses the term "action",
which is also used on the ALTER TABLE page for other purposes. This
commit renames the term to "referential_action", which is more
consistent with the SQL specification. The new term is now used on the
documentation of both CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE for consistency.
Reported-by: Brigitte Blanc-Lafay
Author: Lætitia Avrot
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB_COdiHEVVs0uB+uYCjjYUwQ4YFFekppq+Xqv6qAM8+cd42gA@mail.gmail.com
"$user" in a search_path string is replaced by CURRENT_USER not
SESSION_USER. (It actually was SESSION_USER in the initial implementation,
but we changed it shortly later, and evidently forgot to fix the docs to
match.)
Noted by antonov@stdpr.ru
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/159151fb45d490c8d31ea9707e9ba99d@stdpr.ru
The "name" comparison operators now all support collations, making them
functionally equivalent to "text" comparisons, except for the different
physical representation of the datatype. They do, in fact, mostly share
the varstr_cmp and varstr_sortsupport infrastructure, which has been
slightly enlarged to handle the case.
To avoid changes in the default behavior of the datatype, set name's
typcollation to C_COLLATION_OID not DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID, so that
by default comparisons to a name value will continue to use strcmp
semantics. (This would have been the case for system catalog columns
anyway, because of commit 6b0faf723, but doing this makes it true for
user-created name columns as well. In particular, this avoids
locale-dependent changes in our regression test results.)
In consequence, tweak a couple of places that made assumptions about
collatable base types always having typcollation DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID.
I have not, however, attempted to relax the restriction that user-
defined collatable types must have that. Hence, "name" doesn't
behave quite like a user-defined type; it acts more like a domain
with COLLATE "C". (Conceivably, if we ever get rid of the need for
catalog name columns to be fixed-length, "name" could actually become
such a domain over text. But that'd be a pretty massive undertaking,
and I'm not volunteering.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15938.1544377821@sss.pgh.pa.us
When partitioned tables were introduced, we failed to realize that by
copying the tablespace handling for other relation kinds with no
physical storage we were causing the secondary effect that their
partitions would not automatically inherit the tablespace setting. This
is surprising and unhelpful, so change it to adopt the behavior
introduced in pg11 (commit 33e6c34c32) for partitioned indexes: the
parent relation remembers the tablespace specification, which is then
used for any new partitions that don't declare one.
Because this commit changes behavior of the TABLESPACE clause for
partitioned tables (it's no longer a no-op), it is not backpatched.
Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f9SxVzqDrGD1teosFd6jBMM0UEaa14_8mRvcWE19Tu0hA@mail.gmail.com
When we first put in collations support, we basically punted on teaching
pg_statistic, ANALYZE, and the planner selectivity functions about that.
They've just used DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID independently of the actual
collation of the data. It's time to improve that, so:
* Add columns to pg_statistic that record the specific collation associated
with each statistics slot.
* Teach ANALYZE to use the column's actual collation when comparing values
for statistical purposes, and record this in the appropriate slot. (Note
that type-specific typanalyze functions are now expected to fill
stats->stacoll with the appropriate collation, too.)
* Teach assorted selectivity functions to use the actual collation of
the stats they are looking at, instead of just assuming it's
DEFAULT_COLLATION_OID.
This should give noticeably better results in selectivity estimates for
columns with nondefault collations, at least for query clauses that use
that same collation (which would be the default behavior in most cases).
It's still true that comparisons with explicit COLLATE clauses different
from the stored data's collation won't be well-estimated, but that's no
worse than before. Also, this patch does make the first step towards
doing better with that, which is that it's now theoretically possible to
collect stats for a collation other than the column's own collation.
Patch by me; thanks to Peter Eisentraut for review.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/14706.1544630227@sss.pgh.pa.us
The cache lookup routines for foreign-data wrappers and foreign servers
are extended with an extra argument to handle a set of flags. The only
value which can be used now is to indicate if a missing object should
result in an error or not, and are designed to be extensible on need.
Those new routines are added into the existing set of user-visible
FDW APIs and documented in consequence. They will be used for future
patches to improve the SQL interface for object addresses.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAB7nPqSZxrSmdHK-rny7z8mi=EAFXJ5J-0RbzDw6aus=wB5azQ@mail.gmail.com
The timestamp generated by the standby at message transmission has been
included in the protocol since its introduction for both the status
update message and hot standby feedback message, but it has never
appeared in pg_stat_replication. Seeing this timestamp does not matter
much with a cluster which has a lot of activity, but on a mostly-idle
cluster, this makes monitoring able to react faster than the configured
timeouts.
Author: MyungKyu LIM
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1657809367.407321.1533027417725.JavaMail.jboss@ep2ml404
This restriction is implicit in the check-only-once implementation we use
for table and domain constraints, but it wasn't spelled out anywhere, nor
was there any advice about how to alter a constraint's behavior safely.
Improve that.
I was also dissatisfied with the documentation of ALTER DOMAIN VALIDATE
CONSTRAINT, which entirely failed to explain the use of that feature; and
thence decided that ALTER TABLE VALIDATE CONSTRAINT could be documented
better as well.
Perhaps we should back-patch this, along with the related commit 36d442a25,
but for now I refrained.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/12539.1544107316@sss.pgh.pa.us
Expand section 5.6 "Privileges" to include the full definition of
each privilege type, and an explanation of aclitem privilege displays,
along with some helpful summary tables. Most of this material came
out of the GRANT reference page, although some of it is new.
Adjust a bunch of links that were pointing to GRANT to point to 5.6.
Fabien Coelho and Tom Lane, reviewed by Bradley DeJong
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1807311735200.20743@lancre
The following options are added for extensions:
- TAP_TESTS, to allow an extention to run TAP tests which are the ones
present in t/*.pl. A subset of tests can always be run with the
existing PROVE_TESTS for developers.
- ISOLATION, to define a list of isolation tests.
- ISOLATION_OPTS, to pass custom options to isolation_tester.
A couple of custom Makefile rules have been accumulated across the tree
to cover the lack of facility in PGXS for a couple of releases when
using those test suites, which are all now replaced with the new flags,
without reducing the test coverage. Note that tests of contrib/bloom/
are not enabled yet, as those are proving unstable in the buildfarm.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Adam Berlin, Álvaro Herrera, Tom Lane, Nikolay Shaplov,
Arthur Zakirov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180906014849.GG2726@paquier.xyz
This allows control of the directory in which the postmaster sockets
are created for the temporary postmasters started by pg_upgrade.
The default location remains the current working directory, which is
typically fine, but if it is deeply nested then its pathname might
be too long to be a socket name.
In passing, clean up some messiness in pg_upgrade's option handling,
particularly the confusing and undocumented way that configuration-only
datadirs were handled. And fix check_required_directory's substantially
under-baked cleanup of directory pathnames.
Daniel Gustafsson, reviewed by Hironobu Suzuki, some code cleanup by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E72DD5C3-2268-48A5-A907-ED4B34BEC223@yesql.se
The source code comments documented this, but the user-facing docs, not
so much. Add a section to Appendix B that discusses it.
In passing, improve a couple other things in Appendix B --- notably,
a long-obsolete claim that time zone abbreviations are looked up in
a fixed table.
Per bug #15527 from Michael Davidson.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15527-f1be0b4dc99ebbe7@postgresql.org
This allows to set a lower log_min_duration_statement value without
incurring excessive log traffic (which reduces performance). This can
be useful to analyze workloads with lots of short queries.
Author: Adrien Nayrat
Reviewed-by: David Rowley, Vik Fearing
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c30ee535-ee1e-db9f-fa97-146b9f62caed@anayrat.info
The previous recovery.conf regime accepted multiple recovery_target*
settings and used the last one. This does not translate well to the
general GUC system. Specifically, under EXEC_BACKEND, the settings
are written out not in any particular order, so the order in which
they were originally set is not available to new processes.
Rather than redesign the GUC system, it was decided to abandon the old
behavior and only allow one recovery target setting. A second setting
will cause an error. However, it is allowed to set the same parameter
multiple times or unset a parameter and set a different one.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/27802171543235530%40iva2-6ec8f0a6115e.qloud-c.yandex.net#701a59c837ad0bf8c244344aaf3ef5a4
"\pset format csv", or --csv, selects comma-separated values table format.
This is compliant with RFC 4180, except that we aren't too picky about
whether the record separator is LF or CRLF; also, the user may choose a
field separator other than comma.
This output format is directly compatible with the server's COPY CSV
format, and will also be useful as input to other programs. It's
considerably safer for that purpose than the old recommendation to
use "unaligned" format, since the latter couldn't handle data
containing the field separator character.
Daniel Vérité, reviewed by Fabien Coelho and David Fetter, some
tweaking by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/a8de371e-006f-4f92-ab72-2bbe3ee78f03@manitou-mail.org
A set of failures in buildfarm machines are proving that this is not
quite ready yet because of another set of issues:
- MSVC scripts assume that REGRESS_OPTS can only use top_builddir. Some
test suites actually finish by using top_srcdir, like pg_stat_statements
which cause the regression tests to never run.
- Trying to enforce top_builddir does not work either when using VPATH
as this is not recognized properly.
- TAP tests of bloom are unstable on various platforms, causing various
failures.
The following options are added for extensions:
- TAP_TESTS, to allow an extention to run TAP tests which are the ones
present in t/*.pl. A subset of tests can always be run with the
existing PROVE_TESTS for developers.
- ISOLATION, to define a list of isolation tests.
- ISOLATION_OPTS, to pass custom options to isolation_tester.
A couple of custom Makefile targets have been accumulated across the
tree to cover the lack of facility in PGXS for a couple of releases when
using those test suites, which are all now replaced with the new flags,
without reducing the test coverage. This also fixes an issue with
contrib/bloom/, which had a custom target to trigger its TAP tests of
its own not part of the main check runs.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Adam Berlin, Álvaro Herrera, Tom Lane, Nikolay Shaplov,
Arthur Zakirov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180906014849.GG2726@paquier.xyz
recovery.conf settings are now set in postgresql.conf (or other GUC
sources). Currently, all the affected settings are PGC_POSTMASTER;
this could be refined in the future case by case.
Recovery is now initiated by a file recovery.signal. Standby mode is
initiated by a file standby.signal. The standby_mode setting is
gone. If a recovery.conf file is found, an error is issued.
The trigger_file setting has been renamed to promote_trigger_file as
part of the move.
The documentation chapter "Recovery Configuration" has been integrated
into "Server Configuration".
pg_basebackup -R now appends settings to postgresql.auto.conf and
creates a standby.signal file.
Author: Fujii Masao <masao.fujii@gmail.com>
Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Abhijit Menon-Sen <ams@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Sergei Kornilov <sk@zsrv.org>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/607741529606767@web3g.yandex.ru/
The documentation of CREATE/ALTER ROLE has been missing two things
related to PASSWORD:
- The password value provided needs to be quoted, some places of the
documentation marked the field with quotes, but not others, which led to
confusion.
- PASSWORD NULL was not provided consistently, with ENCRYPTED being not
compatible with it.
Reported-by: Steven Winfield
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/154282901979.1316.7418475422120496802@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Documenting INCLUDE in the section about unique indexes is confusing,
as complained of by Emilio Platzer. Furthermore, it entirely failed
to explain why you might want to use the feature. The section about
index-only scans is really the right place; it already talked about
making such things the hard way. Rewrite that text to describe INCLUDE
as the normal way to make a covering index.
Also, move that section up a couple of places, as it now seems more
important than some of the stuff we had before it. It still has to
be after expression and partial indexes, since otherwise some of it
would involve forward references.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/154031939560.30897.14677735588262722042@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Previously tables declared WITH OIDS, including a significant fraction
of the catalog tables, stored the oid column not as a normal column,
but as part of the tuple header.
This special column was not shown by default, which was somewhat odd,
as it's often (consider e.g. pg_class.oid) one of the more important
parts of a row. Neither pg_dump nor COPY included the contents of the
oid column by default.
The fact that the oid column was not an ordinary column necessitated a
significant amount of special case code to support oid columns. That
already was painful for the existing, but upcoming work aiming to make
table storage pluggable, would have required expanding and duplicating
that "specialness" significantly.
WITH OIDS has been deprecated since 2005 (commit ff02d0a05280e0).
Remove it.
Removing includes:
- CREATE TABLE and ALTER TABLE syntax for declaring the table to be
WITH OIDS has been removed (WITH (oids[ = true]) will error out)
- pg_dump does not support dumping tables declared WITH OIDS and will
issue a warning when dumping one (and ignore the oid column).
- restoring an pg_dump archive with pg_restore will warn when
restoring a table with oid contents (and ignore the oid column)
- COPY will refuse to load binary dump that includes oids.
- pg_upgrade will error out when encountering tables declared WITH
OIDS, they have to be altered to remove the oid column first.
- Functionality to access the oid of the last inserted row (like
plpgsql's RESULT_OID, spi's SPI_lastoid, ...) has been removed.
The syntax for declaring a table WITHOUT OIDS (or WITH (oids = false)
for CREATE TABLE) is still supported. While that requires a bit of
support code, it seems unnecessary to break applications / dumps that
do not use oids, and are explicit about not using them.
The biggest user of WITH OID columns was postgres' catalog. This
commit changes all 'magic' oid columns to be columns that are normally
declared and stored. To reduce unnecessary query breakage all the
newly added columns are still named 'oid', even if a table's column
naming scheme would indicate 'reloid' or such. This obviously
requires adapting a lot code, mostly replacing oid access via
HeapTupleGetOid() with access to the underlying Form_pg_*->oid column.
The bootstrap process now assigns oids for all oid columns in
genbki.pl that do not have an explicit value (starting at the largest
oid previously used), only oids assigned later by oids will be above
FirstBootstrapObjectId. As the oid column now is a normal column the
special bootstrap syntax for oids has been removed.
Oids are not automatically assigned during insertion anymore, all
backend code explicitly assigns oids with GetNewOidWithIndex(). For
the rare case that insertions into the catalog via SQL are called for
the new pg_nextoid() function can be used (which only works on catalog
tables).
The fact that oid columns on system tables are now normal columns
means that they will be included in the set of columns expanded
by * (i.e. SELECT * FROM pg_class will now include the table's oid,
previously it did not). It'd not technically be hard to hide oid
column by default, but that'd mean confusing behavior would either
have to be carried forward forever, or it'd cause breakage down the
line.
While it's not unlikely that further adjustments are needed, the
scope/invasiveness of the patch makes it worthwhile to get merge this
now. It's painful to maintain externally, too complicated to commit
after the code code freeze, and a dependency of a number of other
patches.
Catversion bump, for obvious reasons.
Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180930034810.ywp2c7awz7opzcfr@alap3.anarazel.de
The documentation claimed that an enum type requires "one or more"
labels, but since 1fd9883ff4, zero labels are also allowed.
Reported-by: Lukas Eder <lukas.eder@gmail.com>
Bug: #15356
When hostaddr is given, the actual IP address that psql is connected to
can be totally unexpected for the given host. The more verbose output
we now generate makes things clearer. Since the "host" and "hostaddr"
parts of the conninfo could come from different sources (say, one of
them is in the service specification or a URI-style conninfo and the
other is not), this is not as silly as it may first appear. This is
also definitely useful if the hostname resolves to multiple addresses.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule, Arthur Zakirov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1810261532380.27686@lancrehttps://postgr.es/m/alpine.DEB.2.21.1808201323020.13832@lancre
This didn't actually work: COPY would fail to flush the right files, and
instead would try to flush a non-existing file, causing the whole
transaction to fail.
Cope by raising an error as soon as the command is sent instead, to
avoid a nasty later surprise. Of course, it would be much better to
make it work, but we don't have a patch for that yet, and we don't know
if we'll want to backpatch one when we do.
Reported-by: Tomas Vondra
Author: David Rowley
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Steve Singer, Tomas Vondra
On some operating systems, it doesn't make sense to retry fsync(),
because dirty data cached by the kernel may have been dropped on
write-back failure. In that case the only remaining copy of the
data is in the WAL. A subsequent fsync() could appear to succeed,
but not have flushed the data. That means that a future checkpoint
could apparently complete successfully but have lost data.
Therefore, violently prevent any future checkpoint attempts by
panicking on the first fsync() failure. Note that we already
did the same for WAL data; this change extends that behavior to
non-temporary data files.
Provide a GUC data_sync_retry to control this new behavior, for
users of operating systems that don't eject dirty data, and possibly
forensic/testing uses. If it is set to on and the write-back error
was transient, a later checkpoint might genuinely succeed (on a
system that does not throw away buffers on failure); if the error is
permanent, later checkpoints will continue to fail. The GUC defaults
to off, meaning that we panic.
Back-patch to all supported releases.
There is still a narrow window for error-loss on some operating
systems: if the file is closed and later reopened and a write-back
error occurs in the intervening time, but the inode has the bad
luck to be evicted due to memory pressure before we reopen, we could
miss the error. A later patch will address that with a scheme
for keeping files with dirty data open at all times, but we judge
that to be too complicated to back-patch.
Author: Craig Ringer, with some adjustments by Thomas Munro
Reported-by: Craig Ringer
Reviewed-by: Robert Haas, Thomas Munro, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180427222842.in2e4mibx45zdth5%40alap3.anarazel.de
This hasn't been correct since 9.3 added "latex-longtable".
I left the phraseology "Unique abbreviations are allowed" alone.
It's correct as far as it goes, and we are studiously refraining
from specifying exactly what happens if you give a non-unique
abbreviation. (The answer in the back branches is "you get a
backwards-compatible choice", and the answer in HEAD will shortly
be "you get an error", but there seems no need to mention such
details here.)
Daniel Vérité
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/cb7e1caf-3ea6-450d-af28-f524903a030c@manitou-mail.org
date_trunc(field, timestamptz, zone_name) performs truncation using
the named time zone as reference, rather than working in the session
time zone as is the default behavior. It's equivalent to
date_trunc(field, timestamptz at time zone zone_name) at time zone zone_name
but it's faster, easier to type, and arguably easier to understand.
Vik Fearing and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6249ffc4-2b22-4c1b-4e7d-7af84fedd7c6@2ndquadrant.com
Change lock level for renaming index (either ALTER INDEX or implicitly
via some other commands) from AccessExclusiveLock to
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock.
One reason we need a strong lock for relation renaming is that the
name change causes a rebuild of the relcache entry. Concurrent
sessions that have the relation open might not be able to handle the
relcache entry changing underneath them. Therefore, we need to lock
the relation in a way that no one can have the relation open
concurrently. But for indexes, the relcache handles reloads specially
in RelationReloadIndexInfo() in a way that keeps changes in the
relcache entry to a minimum. As long as no one keeps pointers to
rd_amcache and rd_options around across possible relcache flushes,
which is the case, this ought to be safe.
We also want to use a self-exclusive lock for correctness, so that
concurrent DDL doesn't overwrite the rename if they start updating
while still seeing the old version. Therefore, we use
ShareUpdateExclusiveLock, which is already used by other DDL commands
that want to operate in a concurrent manner.
The reason this is interesting at all is that renaming an index is a
typical part of a concurrent reindexing workflow (CREATE INDEX
CONCURRENTLY new + DROP INDEX CONCURRENTLY old + rename back). And
indeed a future built-in REINDEX CONCURRENTLY might rely on the ability
to do concurrent renames as well.
Reviewed-by: Andrey Klychkov <aaklychkov@mail.ru>
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio de Royes Mello <fabriziomello@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/1531767486.432607658@f357.i.mail.ru
A note in ddl.sgml used to mention that run-time pruning was only
implemented for Append. When we got MergeAppend support, this was
updated to mention that MergeAppend is supported too. This is
slightly weird as it's not all that obvious what exactly isn't
supported when we mention:
<para>
Both of these behaviors are likely to be changed in a future release
of <productname>PostgreSQL</productname>.
</para>
This patch updates this to mention that ModifyTable is unsupported,
which makes the above fragment make sense again.
Author: David Rowley <david.rowley@2ndquadrant.com>
This commit fixes a set of issues with ON COMMIT actions when used on
partitioned tables and tables with inheritance children:
- Applying ON COMMIT DROP on a partitioned table with partitions or on a
table with inheritance children caused a failure at commit time, with
complains about the children being already dropped as all relations are
dropped one at the same time.
- Applying ON COMMIT DELETE on a partition relying on a partitioned
table which uses ON COMMIT DROP would cause the partition truncation to
fail as the parent is removed first.
The solution to the first problem is to handle the removal of all the
dependencies in one go instead of dropping relations one-by-one, based
on a suggestion from Álvaro Herrera. So instead all the relation OIDs
to remove are gathered and then processed in one round of multiple
deletions.
The solution to the second problem is to reorder the actions, with
truncation happening first and relation drop done after. Even if it
means that a partition could be first truncated, then immediately
dropped if its partitioned table is dropped, this has the merit to keep
the code simple as there is no need to do existence checks on the
relations to drop.
Contrary to a manual TRUNCATE on a partitioned table, ON COMMIT DELETE
does not cascade to its partitions. The ON COMMIT action defined on
each partition gets the priority.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/68f17907-ec98-1192-f99f-8011400517f5@lab.ntt.co.jp
Backpatch-through: 10
Previously it was possible to set client_min_messages to FATAL or PANIC,
which had the effect of suppressing transmission of regular ERROR messages
to the client. Perhaps that seemed like a useful option in the past, but
the trouble with it is that it breaks guarantees that are explicitly made
in our FE/BE protocol spec about how a query cycle can end. While libpq
and psql manage to cope with the omission, that's mostly because they
are not very bright; client libraries that have more semantic knowledge
are likely to get confused. Notably, pgODBC doesn't behave very sanely.
Let's fix this by getting rid of the ability to set client_min_messages
above ERROR.
In HEAD, just remove the FATAL and PANIC options from the set of allowed
enum values for client_min_messages. (This change also affects
trace_recovery_messages, but that's OK since these aren't useful values
for that variable either.)
In the back branches, there was concern that rejecting these values might
break applications that are explicitly setting things that way. I'm
pretty skeptical of that argument, but accommodate it by accepting these
values and then internally setting the variable to ERROR anyway.
In all branches, this allows a couple of tiny simplifications in the
logic in elog.c, so do that.
Also respond to the point that was made that client_min_messages has
exactly nothing to do with the server's logging behavior, and therefore
does not belong in the "When To Log" subsection of the documentation.
The "Statement Behavior" subsection is a better match, so move it there.
Jonah Harris and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/7809.1541521180@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15479-ef0f4cc2fd995ca2@postgresql.org
Add another transfer mode --clone to pg_upgrade (besides the existing
--link and the default copy), using special file cloning calls. This
makes the file transfer faster and more space efficient, achieving
speed similar to --link mode without the associated drawbacks.
On Linux, file cloning is supported on Btrfs and XFS (if formatted with
reflink support). On macOS, file cloning is supported on APFS.
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
The code added by commit c203d6cf8 causes a crash in at least one case,
where a potentially-optimizable expression index has a storage type
different from the input data type. A cursory code review turned up
numerous other problems that seem impractical to fix on short notice.
Andres argued for revert of that patch some time ago, and if additional
senior committers had been paying attention, that's likely what would
have happened, but we were not :-(
At this point we can't just revert, at least not in v11, because that would
mean an ABI break for code touching relcache entries. And we should not
remove the (also buggy) support for the recheck_on_update index reloption,
since it might already be used in some databases in the field. So this
patch just does the as-little-invasive-as-possible measure of disabling
the feature as though recheck_on_update were forced off for all indexes.
I also removed the related regression tests (which would otherwise fail)
and the user-facing documentation of the reloption.
We should undertake a more thorough code cleanup if the patch can't be
fixed, but not under the extreme time pressure of being already overdue
for 11.1 release.
Per report from Ondřej Bouda and subsequent private discussion among
pgsql-release.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181106185255.776mstcyehnc63ty@alvherre.pgsql
I removed the item about the pg_stat_statements change from
release-11.sgml, as part of a sweep to delete items already committed
in 11.0; but actually we'd best keep it to ensure that people who've
pg_upgraded their databases will take the requisite action. Also make
said action more visible by making it into its own para. Noted by
Jonathan Katz.
exec_stmt_call() tried to extract information out of a CALL statement's
argument list without using expand_function_arguments(), apparently in
the hope of saving a few nanoseconds by not processing defaulted
arguments. It got that quite wrong though, leading to crashes with
named arguments, as well as failure to enforce writability of the
argument for a defaulted INOUT parameter. Fix and simplify the logic
by using expand_function_arguments() before examining the list.
Also, move the argument-examination to just after producing the CALL
command's plan, before invoking the called procedure. This ensures
that we'll track possible changes in the procedure's argument list
correctly, and avoids a hazard of the plan cache being flushed while
the procedure executes.
Also fix assorted falsehoods and omissions in associated documentation.
Per bug #15477 from Alexey Stepanov.
Patch by me, with some help from Pavel Stehule. Back-patch to v11.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/15477-86075b1d1d319e0a@postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRA6UsujpTs9Sdwmk-R6yQykPx46wgjj+YZ7zxm4onrDyw@mail.gmail.com
As usual, the release notes for other branches will be made by cutting
these down, but put them up for community review first. Note that a
fair percentage of the entries apply only to prior branches because
their issue was already fixed in 11.0.
The solution arrived at in commit e74dd00f5 presumes that the compiler
has a suitable default -isysroot setting ... but further experience
shows that in many combinations of macOS version, XCode version, Xcode
command line tools version, and phase of the moon, Apple's compiler
will *not* supply a default -isysroot value.
We could potentially go back to the approach used in commit 68fc227dd,
but I don't have a lot of faith in the reliability or life expectancy of
that either. Let's just revert to the approach already shipped in 11.0,
namely specifying an -isysroot switch globally. As a partial response to
the concerns raised by Jakob Egger, adjust the contents of Makefile.global
to look like
CPPFLAGS = -isysroot $(PG_SYSROOT) ...
PG_SYSROOT = /path/to/sysroot
This allows overriding the sysroot path at build time in a relatively
painless way.
Add documentation to installation.sgml about how to use the PG_SYSROOT
option. I also took the opportunity to document how to work around
macOS's "System Integrity Protection" feature.
As before, back-patch to all supported versions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20840.1537850987@sss.pgh.pa.us
This has been deprecated and effectively unused for a long time.
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
spgendscan neglected to pfree all the memory allocated by spgbeginscan.
It's possible to get away with that in most normal queries, since the
memory is allocated in the executor's per-query context which is about
to get deleted anyway; but it causes severe memory leakage during
creation or filling of large exclusion-constraint indexes.
Also, document that amendscan is supposed to free what ambeginscan
allocates. The docs' lack of clarity on that point probably caused this
bug to begin with. (There is discussion of changing that API spec going
forward, but I don't think it'd be appropriate for the back branches.)
Per report from Bruno Wolff. It's been like this since the beginning,
so back-patch to all active branches.
In HEAD, also fix an independent leak caused by commit 2a6368343
(allocating memory during spgrescan instead of spgbeginscan, which
might be all right if it got cleaned up, but it didn't). And do a bit
of code beautification on that commit, too.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181024012314.GA27428@wolff.to
This new function is useful to display a full tree of partitions with a
partitioned table given in output, and avoids the need of any complex
WITH RECURSIVE query when looking at partition trees which are
deep multiple levels.
It returns a set of records, one for each partition, containing the
partition's name, its immediate parent's name, a boolean value telling
if the relation is a leaf in the tree and an integer telling its level
in the partition tree with given table considered as root, beginning at
zero for the root, and incrementing by one each time the scan goes one
level down.
Author: Amit Langote
Reviewed-by: Jesper Pedersen, Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/8d00e51a-9a51-ad02-d53e-ba6bf50b2e52@lab.ntt.co.jp
The reference to pg_attribute is switched to a link, which is more
useful for the html documentation. The conditions under which a default
value is defined for a given column are made more general.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0E8748E3-8B7D-445E-9ABA-09DA5C7345CC@yesql.se
This function is able to promote a standby with this new SQL-callable
function. Execution access can be granted to non-superusers so that
failover tools can observe the principle of least privilege.
Catalog version is bumped.
Author: Laurenz Albe
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/6e7c79b3ec916cf49742fb8849ed17cd87aed620.camel@cybertec.at
This changes the documentation, and the related structures so as
everything is consistent.
Some wait events were not listed alphabetically since their
introduction, others have been added rather randomly. Keeping all those
entries in order helps in maintenance, and helps the user looking at the
documentation.
Author: Michael Paquier, Kuntal Ghosh
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20181024002539.GI1658@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 10, only for the documentation part to avoid an ABI
breakage.
PQnotifies() is defined to just process already-read data, not try to read
any more from the socket. (This is a debatable decision, perhaps, but I'm
hesitant to change longstanding library behavior.) The documentation has
long recommended calling PQconsumeInput() before PQnotifies() to ensure
that any already-arrived message would get absorbed and processed.
However, psql did not get that memo, which explains why it's not very
reliable about reporting notifications promptly.
Also, most (not quite all) callers called PQconsumeInput() just once before
a PQnotifies() loop. Taking this recommendation seriously implies that we
should do PQconsumeInput() before each call. This is more important now
that we have "payload" strings in notification messages than it was before;
that increases the probability of having more than one packet's worth
of notify messages. Hence, adjust code as well as documentation examples
to do it like that.
Back-patch to 9.5 to match related server fixes. In principle we could
probably go back further with these changes, but given lack of field
complaints I doubt it's worthwhile.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOYf6ec-TmRYjKBXLLaGaB-jrd=mjG1Hzn1a1wufUAR39PQYhw@mail.gmail.com
When an error occurs during a benchmark run, exit with a nonzero exit
code and write a message at the end. Previously, it would just print
the error message when it happened but then proceed to print the run
summary normally and exit with status 0. To still allow
distinguishing setup from run-time errors, we use exit status 2 for
the new state, whereas existing errors during pgbench initialization
use exit status 1.
Reviewed-by: Fabien COELHO <coelho@cri.ensmp.fr>
With the PostgreSQL 11 release notes acknowledgments list, FOP reported
WARNING: Glyph "?" (0x144, nacute) not available in font "Times-Roman".
WARNING: Glyph "?" (0x15e, Scedilla) not available in font "Times-Roman".
WARNING: Glyph "?" (0x15f, scedilla) not available in font "Times-Roman".
WARNING: Glyph "?" (0x131, dotlessi) not available in font "Times-Roman".
This is because we have some new contributors whose names use letters
that we haven't used before, and apparently FOP can't handle them out
of the box.
For now, just fix this by "unaccenting" those names. In the future,
maybe this can be fixed better with a different font configuration.
There is also another warning
WARNING: Glyph "?" (0x3c0, pi) not available in font "Times-Roman".
but that existed in previous releases and is not touched here.
Set the release date. Do a bunch of copy-editing and markup improvement,
rearrange some stuff into what seemed a more sensible order, move some
things that did not seem to be in the right section.
This function lists the contents of the WAL archive status directory,
and is intended to be used by monitoring tools. Unlike pg_ls_dir(),
access to it can be granted to non-superusers so that those monitoring
tools can observe the principle of least privilege. Access is also
given by default to members of pg_monitor.
Author: Christoph Moench-Tegeder
Reviewed-by: Aya Iwata
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180930205920.GA64534@elch.exwg.net
Originally committed as 15bc038f (plus some follow-ups), this was
reverted in 28e07270 due to a problem discovered in parallel
workers. This new version corrects that problem by sending the
list of uncommitted enum values to parallel workers.
Here follows the original commit message describing the change:
To prevent possibly breaking indexes on enum columns, we must keep
uncommitted enum values from getting stored in tables, unless we
can be sure that any such column is new in the current transaction.
Formerly, we enforced this by disallowing ALTER TYPE ... ADD VALUE
from being executed at all in a transaction block, unless the target
enum type had been created in the current transaction. This patch
removes that restriction, and instead insists that an uncommitted enum
value can't be referenced unless it belongs to an enum type created
in the same transaction as the value. Per discussion, this should be
a bit less onerous. It does require each function that could possibly
return a new enum value to SQL operations to check this restriction,
but there aren't so many of those that this seems unmaintainable.
Author: Andrew Dunstan and Tom Lane, with parallel query fix by Thomas Munro
Reviewed-by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAEepm%3D0Ei7g6PaNTbcmAh9tCRahQrk%3Dr5ZWLD-jr7hXweYX3yg%40mail.gmail.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4075.1459088427%40sss.pgh.pa.us
Historically we forbade datatype-specific comparison functions from
returning INT_MIN, so that it would be safe to invert the sort order
just by negating the comparison result. However, this was never
really safe for comparison functions that directly return the result
of memcmp(), strcmp(), etc, as POSIX doesn't place any such restriction
on those library functions. Buildfarm results show that at least on
recent Linux on s390x, memcmp() actually does return INT_MIN sometimes,
causing sort failures.
The agreed-on answer is to remove this restriction and fix relevant
call sites to not make such an assumption; code such as "res = -res"
should be replaced by "INVERT_COMPARE_RESULT(res)". The same is needed
in a few places that just directly negated the result of memcmp or
strcmp.
To help find places having this problem, I've also added a compile option
to nbtcompare.c that causes some of the commonly used comparators to
return INT_MIN/INT_MAX instead of their usual -1/+1. It'd likely be
a good idea to have at least one buildfarm member running with
"-DSTRESS_SORT_INT_MIN". That's far from a complete test of course,
but it should help to prevent fresh introductions of such bugs.
This is a longstanding portability hazard, so back-patch to all supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180928185215.ffoq2xrq5d3pafna@alap3.anarazel.de
This lists the contents of a temporary directory associated to a given
tablespace, useful to get information about on-disk consumption caused
by temporary files used by a session query. By default, pg_default is
scanned, and a tablespace can be specified as argument.
This function is intended to be used by monitoring tools, and, unlike
pg_ls_dir(), access to them can be granted to non-superusers so that
those monitoring tools can observe the principle of least privilege.
Access is also given by default to members of pg_monitor.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Laurenz Albe
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/92F458A2-6459-44B8-A7F2-2ADD3225046A@amazon.com
When specified, this option allows VACUUM to skip the work on a relation
if there is a conflicting lock on it when trying to open it at the
beginning of its processing.
Similarly to autovacuum, this comes with a couple of limitations while
the relation is processed which can cause the process to still block:
- when opening the relation indexes.
- when acquiring row samples for table inheritance trees, partition trees
or certain types of foreign tables, and that a lock is taken on some
leaves of such trees.
Author: Nathan Bossart
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier, Andres Freund, Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/9EF7EBE4-720D-4CF1-9D0E-4403D7E92990@amazon.com
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171201160907.27110.74730@wrigleys.postgresql.org
I (Andres) was more than a bit hasty in committing 33001fd7a7
after last minute changes, leading to a number of problems (jit output
was only shown for JIT in parallel workers, and just EXPLAIN without
ANALYZE didn't work). Lukas luckily found these issues quickly.
Instead of combining instrumentation in in standard_ExecutorEnd(), do
so on demand in the new ExplainPrintJITSummary().
Also update a documentation example of the JIT output, changed in
52050ad8eb.
Author: Lukas Fittl, with minor changes by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAP53PkxmgJht69pabxBXJBM+0oc6kf3KHMborLP7H2ouJ0CCtQ@mail.gmail.com
Backpatch: 11, where JIT compilation was introduced
The previous commit wasn't careful enough to remove all traces of
TupleDescGetSlot().
Besides fixing the oversight of not removing TupleDescGetSlot()'s
declaration, this also removes FuncCallContext->slot. That was
documented to be for use in combination with TupleDescGetSlot(), a
cursory search over extensions finds no users, and there doesn't seem
to be convincing reasons to keep it around. If we later in the v12
release cycle find users, we can re-consider this part of the commit.
Reported-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180926000413.GC1659@paquier.xyz
We haven't touched these since text search functionality landed in core
in 2007 :-(. While the upstream project isn't a beehive of activity,
they do make additions and bug fixes from time to time. Update our
copies of these files.
Also update our documentation about how to keep things in sync, since
they're not making distribution tarballs these days. Fortunately,
their source code turns out to be a breeze to build.
Notable changes:
* The non-UTF8 version of the hungarian stemmer now works in LATIN2
not LATIN1.
* New stemmers have appeared for arabic, indonesian, irish, lithuanian,
nepali, and tamil. These all work in UTF8, and the indonesian and
irish ones also work in LATIN1.
(There are some new stemmers that I did not incorporate, mainly because
their names don't match the underlying languages, suggesting that they're
not to be considered mainstream.)
Worth noting: the upstream Nepali dictionary was contributed by
Arthur Zakirov.
initdb forced because the contents of snowball_create.sql have
changed.
Still TODO: see about updating the stopword lists.
Arthur Zakirov, minor mods and doc work by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180626122025.GA12647@zakirov.localdomain
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180219140849.GA9050@zakirov.localdomain
aclitem functions and operators have been heretofore undocumented.
Fix that. While at it, ensure the non-operator aclitem functions have
pg_description strings.
Does not seem worthwhile to back-patch.
Author: Fabien Coelho, with pg_description from John Naylor, and significant
refactoring and editorialization by me.
Reviewed by: Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/flat/alpine.DEB.2.21.1808010825490.18204%40lancre
Being able to use a value that can be changed on a connection basis is
useful with clusters distributed geographically, and makes failure
detection more flexible. A note is added in the documentation about the
use of "options" in primary_conninfo, which can be hard to grasp for
newcomers with the need of two single quotes when listing a set of
parameters.
Author: Tsunakawa Takayuki
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1FAAD3AE@G01JPEXMBYT05
JIT was disabled by default in a PG 11 in a separate commit that will
normally not appear in the PG 12 git logs. Therefore, create a PG 12
document and mention the fact that JIT is enabled by default in this
release. (A similar change in parallelism was missed in a prior
release.)
Reported-by: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180922000554.qukbhhlagpnopvko@alap3.anarazel.de
Backpatch-through: head
This eliminates some more tedium in adding new catalog entries,
specifically the need to set up an array type when adding a new
built-in data type. Now it's sufficient to assign an OID for the
array type and write it in an "array_type_oid" metadata field.
You don't have to fill the base type's typarray link explicitly, either.
No catversion bump since the contents of pg_type aren't changed.
(Well, their order might be different, but that doesn't matter.)
John Naylor, reviewed and whacked around a bit by
Dagfinn Ilmari Mannsåker, and some more by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVSVGVTb6m9pJF49b3SuA8J+T-THO9c0hxOmoyv-yGKh-FbNg@mail.gmail.com
Currently, KNN searches were supported only by GiST. SP-GiST also capable to
support them. This commit implements that support. SP-GiST scan stack is
replaced with queue, which serves as stack if no ordering is specified. KNN
support is provided for three SP-GIST opclasses: quad_point_ops, kd_point_ops
and poly_ops (catversion is bumped). Some common parts between GiST and SP-GiST
KNNs are extracted into separate functions.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/570825e8-47d0-4732-2bf6-88d67d2d51c8%40postgrespro.ru
Author: Nikita Glukhov, Alexander Korotkov based on GSoC work by Vlad Sterzhanov
Review: Andrey Borodin, Alexander Korotkov
Per discussion, JIT isn't quite mature enough to ship enabled-by-default.
I failed to resist the temptation to do a bunch of copy-editing on the
related documentation. Also, clean up some inconsistencies in which
section of config.sgml the JIT GUCs are documented in vs. what guc.c
and postgresql.config.sample had.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180914222657.mw25esrzbcnu6qlu@alap3.anarazel.de
to_timestamp()/to_date() functions were introduced mainly for Oracle
compatibility, and became very popular among PostgreSQL users. However, some
behavior of to_timestamp()/to_date() functions are both incompatible with Oracle
and confusing for our users. This behavior is related to handling of spaces and
separators in non FX (fixed format) mode. This commit reworks this behavior
making less confusing, better documented and more compatible with Oracle.
Nevertheless, there are still following incompatibilities with Oracle.
1) We don't insist that there are no format string patterns unmatched to
input string.
2) In FX mode we don't insist space and separators in format string to exactly
match input string.
3) When format string patterns are divided by mix of spaces and separators, we
don't distinguish them, while Oracle takes into account only last group of
spaces/separators.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1873520224.1784572.1465833145330.JavaMail.yahoo%40mail.yahoo.com
Author: Artur Zakirov, Alexander Korotkov, Liudmila Mantrova
Review: Amul Sul, Robert Haas, Tom Lane, Dmitry Dolgov, David G. Johnston
Commit be54b3777 failed on gmake 3.80 due to a chained conditional,
which on closer examination could be removed entirely with some
refactoring elsewhere for a net simplification and more robustness
against empty expansions. Along the way, add some more comments.
Also make explicit in the documentation and comments that built
headers are not removed by 'make clean', since we don't typically want
that for headers generated by a separate ./configure step, and it's
much easier to add your own 'distclean' rule or use EXTRA_CLEAN than
to try and override a deletion rule in pgxs.mk.
Per buildfarm member prariedog and comments by Michael Paquier, though
all the actual changes are my fault.
Since the fixes for CVE-2018-1058, we've advised people to schema-qualify
function references in order to fix failures in code that executes under
a minimal search_path setting. However, that's insufficient to make the
single-argument form of unaccent() work, because it looks up the "unaccent"
text search dictionary using the search path.
The most expedient answer seems to be to remove the search_path dependency
by making it look in the same schema that the unaccent() function itself
is declared in. This will definitely work for the normal usage of this
function with the unaccent dictionary provided by the extension.
It's barely possible that there are people who were relying on the
search-path-dependent behavior to select other dictionaries with the same
name; but if there are any such people at all, they can still get that
behavior by writing unaccent('unaccent', ...), or possibly
unaccent('unaccent'::text::regdictionary, ...) if the lookup has to be
postponed to runtime.
Per complaint from Gunnlaugur Thor Briem. Back-patch to all supported
branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAPs+M8LCex6d=DeneofdsoJVijaG59m9V0ggbb3pOH7hZO4+cQ@mail.gmail.com
Commit df163230b overlooked the case that an out-of-tree extension
might need to build its header files (e.g. via ./configure). If it is
also doing a VPATH build, the HEADERS_* rules in the original commit
would then fail to find the files, since they would be looking only
under $(srcdir) and not in the build directory.
Fix by adding HEADERS_built and HEADERS_built_$(MODULE) which behave
like DATA_built in that they look in the build dir rather than the
source dir (and also make the files dependencies of the "all" target).
No Windows support appears to be needed for this, since it is only
relevant to out-of-tree builds (no support exists in Mkvcbuild.pm to
build extension header files in any case).
pg_get_object_address and pg_identify_object_as_address are supposed
to be inverses, but they disagreed as to the names of the arguments
representing the textual form of an object address. Moreover, the
documented argument names didn't agree with reality at all, either
for these functions or pg_identify_object.
In HEAD and v11, I think we can get away with renaming the input
arguments of pg_get_object_address to match the outputs of
pg_identify_object_as_address. In theory that might break queries
using named-argument notation to call pg_get_object_address, but
it seems really unlikely that anybody is doing that, or that they'd
have much trouble adjusting if they were. In older branches, we'll
just live with the lack of consistency.
Aside from fixing the documentation of these functions to match reality,
I couldn't resist the temptation to do some copy-editing.
Per complaint from Jean-Pierre Pelletier. Back-patch to 9.5 where these
functions were introduced. (Before v11, this is a documentation change
only.)
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CANGqjDnWH8wsTY_GzDUxbt4i=y-85SJreZin4Hm8uOqv1vzRQA@mail.gmail.com
The previous description was unclear. Also add a third example, change
use of time zone acronyms to more verbose descriptions, and add a
mention that using 'time' with AT TIME ZONE uses the current time zone
rules.
Backpatch-through: 9.3
It's been true for a long time that we expect names of table and domain
constraints to be unique among the constraints of that table or domain.
However, the enforcement of that has been pretty haphazard, and it missed
some corner cases such as creating a CHECK constraint and then an index
constraint of the same name (as per recent report from André Hänsel).
Also, due to the lack of an actual unique index enforcing this, duplicates
could be created through race conditions.
Moreover, the code that searches pg_constraint has been quite inconsistent
about how to handle duplicate names if one did occur: some places checked
and threw errors if there was more than one match, while others just
processed the first match they came to.
To fix, create a unique index on (conrelid, contypid, conname). Since
either conrelid or contypid is zero, this will separately enforce
uniqueness of constraint names among constraints of any one table and any
one domain. (If we ever implement SQL assertions, and put them into this
catalog, more thought might be needed. But it'd be at least as reasonable
to put them into a new catalog; having overloaded this one catalog with
two kinds of constraints was a mistake already IMO.) This index can replace
the existing non-unique index on conrelid, though we need to keep the one
on contypid for query performance reasons.
Having done that, we can simplify the logic in various places that either
coped with duplicates or neglected to, as well as potentially improve
lookup performance when searching for a constraint by name.
Also, as per our usual practice, install a preliminary check so that you
get something more friendly than a unique-index violation report in the
case complained of by André. And teach ChooseIndexName to avoid choosing
autogenerated names that would draw such a failure.
While it's not possible to make such a change in the back branches,
it doesn't seem quite too late to put this into v11, so do so.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0c1001d4428f$0942b430$1bc81c90$@webkr.de
This column was added in commit 8224de4f42 ("Indexes with INCLUDE
columns and their support in B-tree") to ease writing the ruleutils.c
supporting code for that feature, but it turns out to be unnecessary --
we can do the same thing with just one more syscache lookup.
Even the documentation for the new column being removed in this commit
is awkward.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180902165018.33otxftp3olgtu4t@alvherre.pgsql
This table claimed that JOHAB could be used as a server encoding, which
was true originally but hasn't been true since 8.3. It also lacked
entries for EUC_JIS_2004 and SHIFT_JIS_2004.
JOHAB problem noted by Lars Kanis, the others by me.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c0f514a1-b7a9-b9ea-1c02-c34aead56c06@greiz-reinsdorf.de
Currently there are two ways to trigger log rotation in logging collector
process: call pg_rotate_logfile() SQL-function or send SIGUSR1 signal directly
to logging collector process. However, it's nice to have more suitable way
for external tools to do that, which wouldn't require SQL connection or
knowledge of logging collector pid. This commit implements triggering log
rotation by "pg_ctl logrotate" command.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180416.115435.28153375.horiguchi.kyotaro%40lab.ntt.co.jp
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Kuzmenkov, Alexander Korotkov
Using -d is odd, because we normally reserve that for a database
argument, so rename it to -v and add long version --verbose.
Also, reduce it to emit one line per file checked rather than one line
per block.
Per a complaint from Michael Banck.
Author: Yugo Nagata <nagata@sraoss.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Michael Banck <michael.banck@credativ.de>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180827113411.GA22768@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
Like oid2name, vacuumlo has been lacking consistency with other
utilities for its options:
- Connection options gain long aliases.
- Document environment variables which could be used: PGHOST, PGPORT and
PGUSER.
Documentation and code is reordered to be more consistent. A basic set
of TAP tests has been added while on it.
Author: Tatsuro Yamada
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c7e7f25c-1747-cd0f-9335-390bc97b2db5@lab.ntt.co.jp
oid2name has done little effort to keep an interface consistent with
other binary utilities:
- -H was used instead of -h/-host. This option is now marked as
deprecated, still its output is accepted to be backward-compatible.
- -P has been removed from the code, and was still documented.
- All options gain long aliases, making connection options more similar
to other binaries.
- Document environment variables which could be used: PGHOST, PGPORT and
PGUSER.
A basic set of TAP tests is added on the way, and documentation is
cleaned up to be more consistent with other things.
Author: Tatsuro Yamada
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c7e7f25c-1747-cd0f-9335-390bc97b2db5@lab.ntt.co.jp
Mention that "Latest checkpoint location" will not match in pg_upgrade
if the standby server is still running during the upgrade, which is
possible. "Match" text first appeared in PG 9.5.
Reported-by: Paul Bonaud
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c7268794-edb4-1772-3bfd-04c54585c24e@trainline.com
Backpatch-through: 9.5
In 86d78ef50e I enabled configure to check for C99 support, with the
goal of checking which platforms support C99. While there are a few
machines without C99 support among our buildfarm animals,
de-supporting them for v12 was deemed acceptable.
While not tested in aforementioned commit, the biggest increase in
minimum compiler version comes from MSVC, which gained C99 support
fairly late. The subset in MSVC 2013 is sufficient for our needs, at
this point. While that is a significant increase in minimum version,
the existing windows binaries are already built with a new enough
version.
Make configure error out if C99 support could not be detected. For
MSVC builds, increase the minimum version to 2013.
The increase to MSVC 2013 allows us to get rid of VCBuildProject.pm,
as that was only required for MSVC 2005/2008.
Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/97d4b165-192d-3605-749c-f614a0c4e783@2ndquadrant.com
Historically, we looked up the target hostname in connectDBStart, so that
PQconnectPoll did not need to do DNS name resolution. The patches that
added multiple-target-host support to libpq preserved this division of
labor; but it's really nonsensical now, because it means that if any one
of the target hosts fails to resolve in DNS, the connection fails. That
negates the no-single-point-of-failure goal of the feature. Additionally,
DNS lookups aren't exactly cheap, but the code did them all even if the
first connection attempt succeeds.
Hence, rearrange so that PQconnectPoll does the lookups, and only looks
up a hostname when it's time to try that host. This does mean that
PQconnectPoll could block on a DNS lookup --- but if you wanted to avoid
that, you should be using hostaddr, as the documentation has always
specified. It seems fairly unlikely that any applications would really
care whether the lookup occurs inside PQconnectStart or PQconnectPoll.
In addition to calling out that fact explicitly, do some other minor
wordsmithing in the docs around the multiple-target-host feature.
Since this seems like a bug in the multiple-target-host feature,
backpatch to v10 where that was introduced. In the back branches,
avoid moving any existing fields of struct pg_conn, just in case
any third-party code is looking into that struct.
Tom Lane, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4913.1533827102@sss.pgh.pa.us
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE TRIGGER and CREATE EVENT TRIGGER syntax to use FUNCTION in the
clause that specifies the function. PROCEDURE is still accepted for
compatibility.
pg_dump and ruleutils.c output is not changed yet, because that would
require a change in information_schema.sql and thus a catversion change.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
Since procedures are now a different thing from functions, change the
CREATE OPERATOR syntax to use FUNCTION in the clause that specifies the
function. PROCEDURE is still accepted for compatibility.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
Historically, the term procedure was used as a synonym for function in
Postgres/PostgreSQL. Now we have procedures as separate objects from
functions, so we need to clean up the documentation to not mix those
terms.
In particular, mentions of "trigger procedures" are changed to "trigger
functions", and access method "support procedures" are changed to
"support functions". (The latter already used FUNCTION in the SQL
syntax anyway.) Also, the terminology in the SPI chapter has been
cleaned up.
A few tests, examples, and code comments are also adjusted to be
consistent with documentation changes, but not everything.
Reported-by: Peter Geoghegan <pg@bowt.ie>
Reviewed-by: Jonathan S. Katz <jonathan.katz@excoventures.com>
This para is obsolete, first because nobody is using Solaris 7 anymore,
and second because if someone was, configure should catch the snprintf
buffer overrun problem automatically (since commit 9bed827b1), and third
because this is incorrect advice about how to manually force use of
snprintf.c anyway, and has been so at least since commit 3bc6bdf32.
The lack of complaints about it reinforces the conclusion that Solaris 7
no longer exists in the wild; so I don't feel a need to insert correct
advice instead.
Commit 5f374fe7a attempted to turn the connect_timeout from an overall
maximum time limit into a per-host limit, but it didn't do a great job of
that. The timer would only get restarted if we actually detected timeout
within connectDBComplete(), not if we changed our attention to a new host
for some other reason. In that case the old timeout continued to run,
possibly causing a premature timeout failure for the new host.
Fix that, and also tweak the logic so that if we do get a timeout,
we advance to the next available IP address, not to the next host name.
There doesn't seem to be a good reason to assume that all the IP
addresses supplied for a given host name will necessarily fail the
same way as the current one. Moreover, this conforms better to the
admittedly-vague documentation statement that the timeout is "per
connection attempt". I changed that to "per host name or IP address"
to be clearer. (Note that reconnections to the same server, such as for
switching protocol version or SSL status, don't get their own separate
timeout; that was true before and remains so.)
Also clarify documentation about the interpretation of connect_timeout
values less than 2.
This seems like a bug, so back-patch to v10 where this logic came in.
Tom Lane, reviewed by Fabien Coelho
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5735.1533828184@sss.pgh.pa.us
5262f7a4fc have introduced parallel index scan. In order to estimate the
number of parallel workers, it adds extra argument to amcostestimate() index
access method API function. However, this extra argument was missed in the
documentation. This commit fixes that.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4128fdb4-8b63-2e05-38f6-3125f8c27263%40lab.ntt.co.jp
Author: Tatsuro Yamada, Alexander Korotkov
Backpatch-through: 10
Since commit 3b8f6e75f, failure to do this would lead to
submake-generated-headers not doing anything, so that references to
generated or symlinked headers would fail. Previous to that, the
omission only led to temp-install not doing anything, which apparently
affects many fewer people (doesn't anybody use "make check" in their
build rules??). Hence, backpatch to v11 but not further.
Per complaints from Christoph Berg, Jakob Egger, and others.
A database owner running a database-level REINDEX has the possibility to
also do the operation on shared system catalogs without being an owner
of them, which allows him to block resources it should not have access
to. The same goes for a schema owner. For example, PostgreSQL would go
unresponsive and even block authentication if a lock is waited for
pg_authid. This commit makes sure that a user running a REINDEX SYSTEM,
DATABASE or SCHEMA only works on the following relations:
- The user is a superuser
- The user is the table owner
- The user is the database/schema owner, only if the relation worked on
is not shared.
Robert has worded most the documentation changes, and I have coded the
core part.
Reported-by: Lloyd Albin, Jeremy Schneider
Author: Michael Paquier, Robert Haas
Reviewed by: Nathan Bossart, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152512087100.19803.12733865831237526317@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180805211059.GA2185@paquier.xyz
Backpatch-through: 11- as the current behavior has been around for a
very long time and could be disruptive for already released branches.
The amcheck documentation incorrectly claimed that its example query
verifies every catalog index in the database. In fact, the query only
verifies the 10 largest indexes (as determined by pg_class.relpages).
Adjust the description accordingly.
Backpatch: 10-, where contrib/amcheck was introduced.
There are some problems with the tls-unique channel binding type. It's not
supported by all SSL libraries, and strictly speaking it's not defined for
TLS 1.3 at all, even though at least in OpenSSL, the functions used for it
still seem to work with TLS 1.3 connections. And since we had no
mechanism to negotiate what channel binding type to use, there would be
awkward interoperability issues if a server only supported some channel
binding types. tls-server-end-point seems feasible to support with any SSL
library, so let's just stick to that.
This removes the scram_channel_binding libpq option altogether, since there
is now only one supported channel binding type.
This also removes all the channel binding tests from the SSL test suite.
They were really just testing the scram_channel_binding option, which
is now gone. Channel binding is used if both client and server support it,
so it is used in the existing tests. It would be good to have some tests
specifically for channel binding, to make sure it really is used, and the
different combinations of a client and a server that support or doesn't
support it. The current set of settings we have make it hard to write such
tests, but I did test those things manually, by disabling
HAVE_BE_TLS_GET_CERTIFICATE_HASH and/or
HAVE_PGTLS_GET_PEER_CERTIFICATE_HASH.
I also removed the SCRAM_CHANNEL_BINDING_TLS_END_POINT constant. This is a
matter of taste, but IMO it's more readable to just use the
"tls-server-end-point" string.
Refactor the checks on whether the SSL library supports the functions
needed for tls-server-end-point channel binding. Now the server won't
advertise, and the client won't choose, the SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS variant, if
compiled with an OpenSSL version too old to support it.
In the passing, add some sanity checks to check that the chosen SASL
mechanism, SCRAM-SHA-256 or SCRAM-SHA-256-PLUS, matches whether the SCRAM
exchange used channel binding or not. For example, if the client selects
the non-channel-binding variant SCRAM-SHA-256, but in the SCRAM message
uses channel binding anyway. It's harmless from a security point of view,
I believe, and I'm not sure if there are some other conditions that would
cause the connection to fail, but it seems better to be strict about these
things and check explicitly.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/ec787074-2305-c6f4-86aa-6902f98485a4%40iki.fi
Remove description of commit 1944cdc98, which has now been back-patched
so it's not relevant to v11 any longer. Add descriptions of other
recent commits that seemed worth mentioning.
I marked the update as stopping at 2018-07-30, because it's unclear
whether d06eebce5 will be allowed to stay in v11, and I didn't feel like
putting effort into writing a description of it yet. If it does stay,
I think it will deserve mention in the Source Code section.
The example output of pg_replication_slot is wrong. Correct it and make
the output stable by explicitly listing columns to output.
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180731.190909.42582169.horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp
Before v10, we always searched ~/.pgpass using the host parameter,
and nothing else, to match to the "hostname" field of ~/.pgpass.
(However, null host or host matching DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR was replaced by
"localhost".) In v10, this got broken by commit 274bb2b38, repaired by
commit bdac9836d, and broken again by commit 7b02ba62e; in the code
actually shipped, we'd search with hostaddr if both that and host were
specified --- though oddly, *not* if only hostaddr were specified.
Since this is directly contrary to the documentation, and not
backwards-compatible, it's clearly a bug.
However, the change wasn't totally without justification, even though it
wasn't done quite right, because the pre-v10 behavior has arguably been
buggy since we added hostaddr. If hostaddr is specified and host isn't,
the pre-v10 code will search ~/.pgpass for "localhost", and ship that
password off to a server that most likely isn't local at all. That's
unhelpful at best, and could be a security breach at worst.
Therefore, rather than just revert to that old behavior, let's define
the behavior as "search with host if provided, else with hostaddr if
provided, else search for localhost". (As before, a host name matching
DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR is replaced by localhost.) This matches the
behavior of the actual connection code, so that we don't pick up an
inappropriate password; and it allows useful searches to happen when
only hostaddr is given.
While we're messing around here, ensure that empty elements within a
host or hostaddr list select the same behavior as a totally-empty
field would; for instance "host=a,,b" is equivalent to "host=a,/tmp,b"
if DEFAULT_PGSOCKET_DIR is /tmp. Things worked that way in some cases
already, but not consistently so, which contributed to the confusion
about what key ~/.pgpass would get searched with.
Update documentation accordingly, and also clarify some nearby text.
Back-patch to v10 where the host/hostaddr list functionality was
introduced.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/30805.1532749137@sss.pgh.pa.us
This allows out-of-tree PLs and similar code to get access to
definitions needed to work with extension data types.
The following existing modules now install headers: contrib/cube,
contrib/hstore, contrib/isn, contrib/ltree, contrib/seg.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/87y3euomjh.fsf%40news-spur.riddles.org.uk
Move out of the concurrency control chapter, where mostly only user
table locks are discussed, and move to CREATE COLLATION reference page.
Author: Amit Langote <Langote_Amit_f8@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Author: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
As written, this policy constrained only the post-image not the pre-image
of rows, meaning that users could delete other users' rows or take
ownership of such rows, contrary to what the docs claimed would happen.
We need two separate policies to achieve the documented effect.
While at it, try to explain what's happening a bit more fully.
Per report from Олег Самойлов. Back-patch to 9.5 where this was added.
Thanks to Stephen Frost for off-list discussion.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3298321532002010@sas1-2b3c3045b736.qloud-c.yandex.net
This allows querying the SSL implementation used on the server side.
It's analogous to using PQsslAttribute(conn, "library") in libpq.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
Commit 5770172cb0 documented secure schema
usage, and that advice suffices for using unqualified names securely.
Document, in typeconv-func primarily, the additional issues that arise
with qualified names. Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).
Reviewed by Jonathan S. Katz.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180721012446.GA1840594@rfd.leadboat.com
Until now shadowed_variables was the only plpgsql check supported by
plpgsql.extra_warnings and plpgsql.extra_errors. This patch introduces
two new checks - strict_multi_assignment and too_many_rows. Unlike
shadowed_variables, these new checks are enforced at run-time.
strict_multi_assignment checks that commands allowing multi-assignment
(for example SELECT INTO) have the same number of sources and targets.
too_many_rows checks that queries with an INTO clause return one row
exactly.
These checks are aimed at cases that are technically valid and allowed,
but are often a sign of a bug. Therefore those checks are expected to
be enabled primarily in development and testing environments.
Author: Pavel Stehule
Reviewed-by: Stephen Frost, Tomas Vondra
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAFj8pRA2kKRDKpUNwLY0GeG1OqOp+tLS2yQA1V41gzuSz-hCng@mail.gmail.com
As benchmarks show, using libc's string-to-integer conversion is
pretty slow. At least part of the reason for that is that strtol[l]
have to be more generic than what largely is required inside pg.
This patch considerably speeds up int2/int4 input (int8 already was
already using hand-rolled code).
Most of the existing pg_atoi callers have been converted. But as one
requires pg_atoi's custom delimiter functionality, and as it seems
likely that there's external pg_atoi users, it seems sensible to just
keep pg_atoi around.
Author: Andres Freund
Reviewed-By: Robert Haas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171208214437.qgn6zdltyq5hmjpk@alap3.anarazel.de
Previously a lot of the error messages referenced the type in the
error message itself. That requires that the message is translated
separately for each type.
Note that currently a few smallint cases continue to reference the
integer, rather than smallint, type. A later patch will create a
separate routine for 16bit input.
Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180707200158.wpqkd7rjr4jxq5g7@alap3.anarazel.de
The initial version of the included-index-column feature stated that
included columns couldn't be the same as any key column of the index.
While it'd be pretty silly to do that, since the included column would be
entirely redundant, we've never prohibited redundant index columns before
so it's not very consistent to do so here. Moreover, the prohibition
was itself badly implemented, so that it failed to reject columns that
were effectively identical but not spelled quite alike, as reported by
Aditya Toshniwal.
(Moreover, it's not hard to imagine that for some non-btree index types,
such cases would be non-silly anyhow: the index might use a lossy
representation for key columns but be able to support retrieval of the
original form of included columns.)
Hence, let's just drop the prohibition.
In passing, do some copy-editing on the documentation for the
included-column feature.
Yugo Nagata; documentation and test corrections by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAM9w-_mhBCys4fQNfaiQKTRrVWtoFrZ-wXmDuE9Nj5y-Y7aDKQ@mail.gmail.com
A collection of typos I happened to spot while reading code, as well as
grepping for common mistakes.
Backpatch to all supported versions, as applicable, to avoid conflicts
when backporting other commits in the future.
It's more logical this way, since the new ordering matches the way the
tables are created; but in any case, the previous location of PARTITION OF
did not appear carefully chosen anyway (since it didn't match the
location in which it appears in the synopsys either, which is what we
normally do.)
In the PARTITION BY stanza, add a link to the partitioning section in
the DDL chapter, too.
Suggested-by: David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKFQuwY4Ld7ecxL_KAmaxwt0FUu5VcPPN2L4dh+3BeYbrdBa5g@mail.gmail.com
Update links that resulted in redirects. Most are changes from http to
https, but there are also some other minor edits. (There are still some
redirects where the target URL looks less elegant than the one we
currently have. I have left those as is.)
lca_inner() wasn't prepared for the possibility of getting no inputs.
Fix that, and make some cosmetic improvements to the code while at it.
Also, I thought the documentation of this function as returning the
"longest common prefix" of the paths was entirely misleading; it really
returns a path one shorter than the longest common prefix, for the typical
definition of "prefix". Don't use that term in the docs, and adjust the
examples to clarify what really happens.
This has been broken since its beginning, so back-patch to all supported
branches.
Per report from Hailong Li. Thanks to Pierre Ducroquet for diagnosing
and for the initial patch, though I whacked it around some and added
test cases.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/5b0d8e4f-f2a3-1305-d612-e00e35a7be66@qunar.com
Now that the documentation sources are in XML rather than SGML, some of
the documentation about the editor, or more specifically Emacs, setup
needs updating. The updated instructions recommend using nxml-mode,
which works mostly out of the box, with some small tweaks in
emacs.samples and .dir-locals.el.
Also remove some obsolete stuff in .dir-locals.el. I did, however,
leave the sgml-mode settings in there so that someone using Emacs
without emacs.samples gets those settings when editing a *.sgml file.
Starting and aborting transactions in security definer procedures
doesn't work. StartTransaction() insists that the security context
stack is empty, so this would currently cause a crash, and
AbortTransaction() resets it. This could be made to work by
reorganizing the code, but right now we just prohibit it.
Reported-by: amul sul <sulamul@gmail.com>
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAAJ_b96Gupt_LFL7uNyy3c50-wbhA68NUjiK5%3DrF6_w%3Dpq_T%3DQ%40mail.gmail.com
Explain that you can use any integer expression for the "count" in
pl/pgsql's versions of FETCH/MOVE, unlike the SQL versions which only
allow a constant.
Remove the duplicate version of this para under MOVE. I don't see
a good reason to maintain two identical paras when we just said that
MOVE works exactly like FETCH.
Per Pavel Stehule, though I didn't use his text.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAFj8pRAcvSXcNdUGx43bOK1e3NNPbQny7neoTLN42af+8MYWEA@mail.gmail.com
Commit ff4f88916 adjusted the code to enforce the SQL spec's requirement
that a window using GROUPS mode must have an ORDER BY clause. But I missed
that the documentation explicitly said you didn't have to have one.
Also minor wordsmithing in the window-function section of select.sgml.
Per Masahiko Sawada, though I didn't use his patch.
Such replication slots are physical slots freshly created without WAL
being reserved, which is the default behavior, which have not been used
yet as WAL consumption resources to retain WAL. This prevents advancing
a slot to a position older than any WAL available, which could falsify
calculations for WAL segment recycling.
This also cleans up a bit the code, as ReplicationSlotRelease() would be
called on ERROR, and improves error messages.
Reported-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund, Álvaro Herrera, Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180626071305.GH31353@paquier.xyz
PostgreSQL nowadays offers some kind of dynamic shared memory feature on
all supported platforms. Having the choice of "none" prevents us from
relying on DSM in core features. So this patch removes the choice of
"none".
Author: Kyotaro Horiguchi <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
This is an option consistent with what pg_dump and pg_basebackup provide
which is useful for leveraging the I/O effort when testing things, not
to be used in a production environment.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Heikki Linnakangas
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180325122607.GB3707@paquier.xyz
If a view references a foreign table, and the foreign table has a
BEFORE INSERT trigger, then it's possible for a tuple inserted or
updated through the view to be changed such that it violates the
view's WITH CHECK OPTION constraint.
Before this commit, postgres_fdw handled this case inconsistently. A
RETURNING clause on the INSERT or UPDATE statement targeting the view
would cause the finally-inserted tuple to be read back, and the WITH
CHECK OPTION violation would throw an error. But without a RETURNING
clause, postgres_fdw would not read the final tuple back, and WITH
CHECK OPTION would not throw an error for the violation (or may throw
an error when there is no real violation). AFTER ROW triggers on the
foreign table had a similar effect as a RETURNING clause on the INSERT
or UPDATE statement.
To fix, this commit retrieves the attributes needed to enforce the
WITH CHECK OPTION constraint along with the attributes needed for the
RETURNING clause (if any) from the remote side. Thus, the WITH CHECK
OPTION constraint is always evaluated against the final tuple after
any triggers on the remote side.
This fix may be considered inconsistent with CHECK constraints
declared on foreign tables, which are not enforced locally at all
(because the constraint is on a remote object). The discussion
concluded that this difference is reasonable, because the WITH CHECK
OPTION is a constraint on the local view (not any remote object);
therefore it only makes sense to enforce its WITH CHECK OPTION
constraint locally.
Author: Etsuro Fujita
Reviewed-by: Arthur Zakirov, Stephen Frost
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/7eb58fab-fd3b-781b-ac33-f7cfec96021f%40lab.ntt.co.jp
When performing pg_rewind, the presence of a read-only file which is not
accessible for writes will cause a failure while processing. This can
cause the control file of the target data folder to be truncated,
causing it to not be reusable with a successive run.
Also, when pg_rewind fails mid-flight, there is likely no way to be able
to recover the target data folder anyway, in which case a new base
backup is the best option. A note is added in the documentation as
well about.
Reported-by: Christian H.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Andrew Dunstan
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180104200633.17004.16377%40wrigleys.postgresql.org
Prefer to use phrases like "child" instead of "partition" when
describing the legacy inheritance-based partitioning. The word
"partition" now has a fixed meaning for the built-in partitioning, so
keeping it out of the documentation of the old method makes things
clearer.
Author: Justin Pryzby <pryzby@telsasoft.com>
This section once started out small but has now grown quite a bit and
needs a bit of structure.
Rewrite as list, add documentation of EXCLUDING, and improve the
documentation of INCLUDING ALL instead of just listing all the options
again.
per report from Yugo Nagata that EXCLUDING was not documented, that part
reviewed by Daniel Gustafsson, most of the rewrite was by me
This has been visibly a forgotten spot in the first implementation of
wait events for I/O added by 249cf07, and what has been missing is a
fsync call for WAL segments which is a wrapper reacting on the value of
GUC wal_sync_method.
Reported-by: Konstantin Knizhnik
Author: Konstantin Knizhnik
Reviewed-by: Craig Ringer, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/4a243897-0ad8-f471-aa40-242591f2476e@postgrespro.ru
When these programs call pg_catalog.set_config, they need to check for
PGRES_TUPLES_OK instead of PGRES_COMMAND_OK. Fix for
5770172cb0.
Reported-by: Ideriha, Takeshi <ideriha.takeshi@jp.fujitsu.com>
search.cpan.org has been EOL'd, with metacpan.org being the official
replacement to which URLs now redirect. Update links to match the new
URL. Also update links to CPAN to use https as it will redirect from
http.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/B74C0219-6BA9-46E1-A524-5B9E8CD3BDB3@yesql.se
The backup history file has been no longer necessary for recovery
since the version 9.0. It's now basically just for informational purpose.
But previously the documentations still described that a recovery
requests the backup history file to proceed. The commit fixes this
documentation bug.
Back-patch to all supported versions.
Author: Yugo Nagata
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180626174752.0ce505e3.nagata@sraoss.co.jp
Upper limits for vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor GUC and reloption
were initially set to 100.0 in 857f9c36. However, after further
discussion, it appears that some users like to disable B-tree cleanup
index scan completely (assuming there are no deleted pages).
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor is used barely to protect against
stalled index statistics. And after detailed consideration it appears
that risk of stalled index statistics is low. And it would be nice to
allow advanced users setting higher values of
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor. So, set upper limit for these
GUC and reloption to DBL_MAX.
Author: Alexander Korotkov
Reviewed-by: Masahiko Sawada
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC8Q8tJCb%3DgxhzcV7T6ctx7PY-Ux1oA-AsTJc6cAVNsQiYcCzA%40mail.gmail.com
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor was located in autovacuum group of
GUCs. However, it affects not only autovacuum, but also manually run
VACUUM. It appears that "client connection defaults" group of GUCs
is more appropriate for vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor, because
vacuum_*_age options are already located there.
Also, vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor was missed in
postgresql.conf.sample. So, add it there with appropriate comment.
Author: Masahiko Sawada with minor editorization by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoArsoXMLKudXSKN679FRzs6oubEchM53bHwn8Tp%3D2boNg%40mail.gmail.com
Pavel Stehule's original patch had support for default namespace, but I
ripped it out before commit -- hence the docs were correct when written,
and I broke them by omission :-(. Remove the offending phrase.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/1550C5E5-FC70-4493-A226-AA137D831E8D@yesql.se
PostgreSQL 11 introduces compress method for SP-GiST opclasses. That
was mistakenly interpreted as compression support for SP-GiST while
actually that allows lossy representation of leaf keys.
Author: Alexander Korotkov, based on proposal by Darafei Praliaskouski
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAC8Q8tKbYmNdiyWr7hE4GfMY4fbqHKkFziKgrUuWHH6HJQs3og%40mail.gmail.com
Since their introduction, partition trees have been a bit lossy
regarding temporary relations. Inheritance trees respect the following
patterns:
1) a child relation can be temporary if the parent is permanent.
2) a child relation can be temporary if the parent is temporary.
3) a child relation cannot be permanent if the parent is temporary.
4) The use of temporary relations also imply that when both parent and
child need to be from the same sessions.
Partitions share many similar patterns with inheritance, however the
handling of the partition bounds make the situation a bit tricky for
case 1) as the partition code bases a lot of its lookup code upon
PartitionDesc which does not really look after relpersistence. This
causes for example a temporary partition created by session A to be
visible by another session B, preventing this session B to create an
extra partition which overlaps with the temporary one created by A with
a non-intuitive error message. There could be use-cases where mixing
permanent partitioned tables with temporary partitions make sense, but
that would be a new feature. Partitions respect 2), 3) and 4) already.
It is a bit depressing to see those error checks happening in
MergeAttributes() whose purpose is different, but that's left as future
refactoring work.
Back-patch down to 10, which is where partitioning has been introduced,
except that default partitions do not apply there. Documentation also
includes limitations related to the use of temporary tables with
partition trees.
Reported-by: David Rowley
Author: Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Ashutosh Bapat, Amit Langote, Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f94Ojk0og9GMkRHGt8wHTW=ijq5KzJKuoBoqWLwSVwGmw@mail.gmail.com
Postgres has traditionally considered the syntactic forms f(x) and x.f
to be equivalent, allowing tricks such as writing a function and then
using it as though it were a computed-on-demand column. However, our
behavior when both interpretations are feasible left something to be
desired: we always chose the column interpretation. This could lead
to very surprising results, as in a recent bug report from Neil Conway.
It also created a dump-and-reload hazard, since what was a function
call in a dumped view could get interpreted as a column reference
at reload, if a matching column name had been added to the underlying
table since the view was created.
What seems better, in ambiguous situations, is to prefer the choice
matching the syntactic form of the reference. This seems much less
astonishing in general, and it fixes the dump/reload hazard.
Although this could be called a bug fix, there have been few complaints
and there's some small risk of breaking applications that depend on the
old behavior, so no back-patch. It does seem reasonable to slip it
into v11, though.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOW5sYa3Wp7KozCuzjOdw6PiOYPi6D=VvRybtH2S=2C0SVmRmA@mail.gmail.com
On Windows, it is sometimes important for corresponding malloc() and
free() calls to be made from the same DLL, since some build options can
result in multiple allocators being active at the same time. For that
reason we already provided PQfreemem(). This commit adds a similar
function for freeing string results allocated by the pgtypes library.
Author: Takayuki Tsunakawa
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro Horiguchi
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/0A3221C70F24FB45833433255569204D1F8AD5D6%40G01JPEXMBYT05
Documentation of word_similarity() and strict_word_similarity() functions
contains some vague wordings which could confuse users. This patch makes
those wordings more clear. word_similarity() was introduced in PostgreSQL 9.6,
and corresponding part of documentation needs to be backpatched.
Author: Bruce Momjian, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180526165648.GB12510%40momjian.us
Backpatch: 9.6, where word_similarity() was introduced
kern.ipc.shm_use_phys is not a sysctl on OpenBSD, and SEMMAP is not
a kernel configuration option. These were probably copy pasteos from
when the documentation had a single paragraph for *BSD.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
OFFSET <x> ROWS FETCH FIRST <y> ROWS ONLY syntax is supposed to accept
<simple value specification>, which includes parameters as well as
literals. When this syntax was added all those years ago, it was done
inconsistently, with <x> and <y> being different subsets of the
standard syntax.
Rectify that by making <x> and <y> accept the same thing, and allowing
either a (signed) numeric literal or a c_expr there, which allows for
parameters, variables, and parenthesized arbitrary expressions.
Per bug #15200 from Lukas Eder.
Backpatch all the way, since this has been broken from the start.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/877enz476l.fsf@news-spur.riddles.org.uk
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/152647780335.27204.16895288237122418685@wrigleys.postgresql.org
An xref to a <para>'s ID isn't very helpful because paras don't have
names. This causes a warning while building PDFs, though for some
reason not while building HTML. The link arguably went to the wrong
place, too.
To fix, introduce a sub-section we can reference.
The "l" (ell) width spec means something in the corresponding scanf usage,
but not here. While modern POSIX says that applying "l" to "f" and other
floating format specs is a no-op, SUSv2 says it's undefined. Buildfarm
experience says that some old compilers emit warnings about it, and at
least one old stdio implementation (mingw's "ANSI" option) actually
produces wrong answers and/or crashes.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/21670.1526769114@sss.pgh.pa.us
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/c085e1da-0d64-1c15-242d-c921f32e0d5c@dunslane.net
The description of the index property backward_scan was incorrect and
misleading; rectify.
Backpatch to 9.6 where the amutils functionality was introduced.
Explain partition pruning more thoroughly, in a section above the one
that explains constraint exclusion, since the new feature is the one
that will be used more extensively from now on. Move some of the
material from the constraint exclusion subsection to the one on
partition pruning, so that we can explain the legacy method by
explaining the differences with the new one instead of repeating it.
Author: David Rowley, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Amit Langote, David G. Johnston, Justin Pryzby
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f8PECxEi1YQ9nhVtshtfOMHUzAMm_Zp4gGCOCnMPjEKJA@mail.gmail.com
I get "WARNING: nested link may be undefined in output: <xref @linkend =
'pgbench'> nested inside parent element link" from this.
Also remove some trailing whitespace.
- Change vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor GUC to PGC_USERSET.
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor GUC was defined as PGC_SIGHUP. But this
GUC affects not only autovacuum. So it might be useful to change it from user
session in order to influence manually runned VACUUM.
- Add missing tab-complete support for vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor
reloption.
- Fix condition for B-tree index cleanup.
Zero value of vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor means that user wants B-tree
index cleanup to be never skipped.
- Documentation and comment improvements
Authors: Justin Pryzby, Alexander Korotkov, Liudmila Mantrova
Reviewed by: all authors and Robert Haas
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20180502023025.GD7631%40telsasoft.com
The set of functions that need parallel-safety adjustments isn't the
same in 9.6 as 10, so I shouldn't have blindly back-patched that list.
Adjust as needed. Also, provide examples of the commands to issue.
There shouldn't be a line break between two adjacent tags, because that
will appear as whitespace in the output. (The rendering engine might in
turn collapse that whitespace away, so it might not actually make a
difference, but it's more correct this way.)
Mark Dilger pointed out that the bootstrap parser does not allow
any of its keywords to appear as column values unless they're quoted,
and proposed dealing with that by quoting such values in genbki.pl.
Looking closer, though, we also have that problem with respect to table,
column, and type names appearing in the .bki file: the parser would fail
if any of those matched any of its keywords. While so far there have
been no conflicts (that I've heard of), this seems like a booby trap
waiting to catch somebody. Rather than clutter genbki.pl with enough
quoting logic to handle all that, let's make the bootstrap parser grow
up a little bit and treat its keywords as unreserved.
Experimentation shows that it's fairly easy to do so with the exception
of _null_, which I don't have a big problem with keeping as a reserved
word. The only change needed is that we can't have the "close" command
take an optional table name: it has to either require or forbid the
table name to avoid shift/reduce conflicts. genbki.pl has historically
always included the table name, so I took that option.
The implementation has bootscanner.l passing forward the string value
of each keyword, in case bootparse.y needs that. This avoids needing to
know the precise spelling of each keyword in bootparse.y, which is good
because that's not always obvious from the token name.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/3024FC91-DB6D-4732-B31C-DF772DF039A0@gmail.com
Use the same code we already applied in duplicate_oids and unused_oids
to let this script find Catalog.pm without help. This removes the need
to supply a -I switch in most cases.
Also, mark the script executable, again to follow the precedent of
duplicate_oids and unused_oids. Now you can just do
"./reformat_dat_file.pl pg_proc.dat"
if you want to reformat only one or a few .dat files rather than all.
It'd be possible to remove the -I switches in the Makefile's convenience
targets, but I chose to leave them: they don't hurt anything, and it's
possible that in weird VPATH situations they might be of value.
Identify pg_replication_origin as a shared catalog in catalogs.sgml,
using the same boilerplate wording used for most other shared catalogs
(and tweak another place where someone had randomly deviated from
that boilerplate).
Make an example in mmgr/README more consistent with surrounding text.
Update an obsolete cross-reference in a comment in storage/block.h.
Zhuo Ql
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/44296255.1819230.1524889719001@mail.yahoo.com
In the wake of commit 5602265f7, we were doing duplicate-OID detection
quite inefficiently, by invoking duplicate_oids which does all the same
parsing of catalog headers and .dat files as genbki.pl does. That adds
under half a second on modern machines, but quite a bit more on slow
buildfarm critters, so it seems worth avoiding. Let's just extend
genbki.pl a little so it can also detect duplicate OIDs, and remove
the duplicate_oids call from the build process.
(This also means that duplicate OID detection will happen during
Windows builds, which AFAICS it didn't before.)
This makes the use-case for duplicate_oids a bit dubious, but it's
possible that people will still want to run that check without doing
a whole build run, so let's keep that script.
In passing, move down genbki.pl's creation of its temp output files
so that it doesn't happen until after we've done parsing and validation
of the input. This avoids leaving a lot of clutter around after a
failure.
John Naylor and Tom Lane
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/37D774E4-FE1F-437E-B3D2-593F314B7505@postgrespro.ru
When bt_index_parent_check() is called with the heapallindexed option,
allocate a second Bloom filter to fingerprint block numbers that appear
in the downlinks of internal pages. Use Bloom filter probes when
walking the B-Tree to detect missing downlinks. This can detect subtle
problems with page deletion/VACUUM, such as corruption caused by the bug
just fixed in commit 6db4b499.
The downlink Bloom filter is bound in size by work_mem. Its optimal
size is typically far smaller than that of the regular heapallindexed
Bloom filter, especially when the index has high fan-out.
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewer: Teodor Sigaev
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WznUzY4fWTjm1tBB3JpVz8cCfz7k_qVp5BhuPyhivmWJFg@mail.gmail.com
This controls both plan-time and execution-time new-style partition
pruning. While finer-grain control is possible (maybe using an enum GUC
instead of boolean), there doesn't seem to be much need for that.
This new parameter controls partition pruning for all queries:
trivially, SELECT queries that affect partitioned tables are naturally
under its control since they are using the new technology. However,
while UPDATE/DELETE queries do not use the new code, we make the new GUC
control their behavior also (stealing control from
constraint_exclusion), because it is more natural, and it leads to a
more natural transition to the future in which those queries will also
use the new pruning code.
Constraint exclusion still controls pruning for regular inheritance
situations (those not involving partitioned tables).
Author: David Rowley
Review: Amit Langote, Ashutosh Bapat, Justin Pryzby, David G. Johnston
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAKJS1f_0HwsxJG9m+nzU+CizxSdGtfe6iF_ykPYBiYft302DCw@mail.gmail.com
Previously, you could partition by a boolean column as long as you
spelled the bound values as string literals, for instance FOR VALUES
IN ('t'). The trouble with this is that ruleutils.c printed that as
FOR VALUES IN (TRUE), which is reasonable syntax but wasn't accepted by
the grammar. That results in dump-and-reload failures for such cases.
Apply a minimal fix that just causes TRUE and FALSE to be converted to
strings 'true' and 'false'. This is pretty grotty, but it's too late for
a more principled fix in v11 (to say nothing of v10). We should revisit
the whole issue of how partition bound values are parsed for v12.
Amit Langote
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/e05c5162-1103-7e37-d1ab-6de3e0afaf70@lab.ntt.co.jp
Change things around so that proper quoting of values interpolated into
the BKI data by initdb is the responsibility of initdb, not something
we half-heartedly handle by putting double quotes into the raw BKI data.
(Note: experimentation shows that it still doesn't work to put a double
quote into the initial superuser username, but that's the fault of
inadequate quoting while interpolating the name into SQL scripts;
the BKI aspect of it works fine now.)
Having done that, we can remove the special-case handling of values
that look like "something" from genbki.pl, and instead teach it to
escape double --- and single --- quotes properly. This removes the
nowhere-documented need to treat those specially in the BKI source
data; whatever you write will be passed through unchanged into the
inserted data value, modulo Perl's rules about single-quoted strings.
Add documentation explaining the (pre-existing) handling of backslashes
in the BKI data.
Per an earlier discussion with John Naylor.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVSVGUNao=-Q2-vAN3PYcdF5tnL5JAHwGwzZGuYHtq+Mk_9ng@mail.gmail.com
They were accidentally excluded when reverting the backend online
checksum functionality, and since they weren't built the incorrect
reference to a removed section also did not trigger a problem.
Author: Christoph Berg
Make it clear that a cluster has to be shut down cleanly before
pg_verify_checksum can be run against it.
Author: Michael Paquier
Review: Daniel Gustafsson
This option makes no sense when the cluster checksum state cannot be
changed, and should have been removed in the revert.
Author: Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Michael Paquier
This reverts commits d204ef6377,
83454e3c2b and a few more commits thereafter
(complete list at the end) related to MERGE feature.
While the feature was fully functional, with sufficient test coverage and
necessary documentation, it was felt that some parts of the executor and
parse-analyzer can use a different design and it wasn't possible to do that in
the available time. So it was decided to revert the patch for PG11 and retry
again in the future.
Thanks again to all reviewers and bug reporters.
List of commits reverted, in reverse chronological order:
f1464c5380 Improve parse representation for MERGE
ddb4158579 MERGE syntax diagram correction
530e69e59b Allow cpluspluscheck to pass by renaming variable
01b88b4df5 MERGE minor errata
3af7b2b0d4 MERGE fix variable warning in non-assert builds
a5d86181ec MERGE INSERT allows only one VALUES clause
4b2d44031f MERGE post-commit review
4923550c20 Tab completion for MERGE
aa3faa3c7a WITH support in MERGE
83454e3c2b New files for MERGE
d204ef6377 MERGE SQL Command following SQL:2016
Author: Pavan Deolasee
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier
In particular, the requirement to have SELECT privilege for the initial
table copy was previously not documented.
Author: Shinoda, Noriyoshi <noriyoshi.shinoda@hpe.com>
Commit 372728b0d created some problems for usages like building a
subdirectory without having first done "make all" at the top level,
or for proceeding directly to "make install" without "make all".
The only reasonably clean way to fix this seems to be to force the
submake-generated-headers rule to fire in *any* "make all" or "make
install" command anywhere in the tree. To avoid lots of redundant work,
as well as parallel make jobs possibly clobbering each others' output, we
still need to be sure that the rule fires only once in a recursive build.
For that, adopt the same MAKELEVEL hack previously used for "temp-install".
But try to document it a bit better.
The submake-errcodes mechanism previously used in src/port/ and src/common/
is subsumed by this, so we can get rid of those special cases. It was
inadequate for src/common/ anyway after the aforesaid commit, and it always
risked parallel attempts to build errcodes.h.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/E1f5FAB-0006LU-MB@gemulon.postgresql.org
In its original form, reformat_dat_file.pl smashed consecutive blank
lines to a single blank line, which was helpful for mopping up excess
whitespace during the bootstrap data format conversion. But going
forward, there seems little reason to do that; if developers want to
put in multiple blank lines, let 'em. This makes it conform to the
documentation I (tgl) wrote, too.
In passing, clean up some sloppy markup choices in bki.sgml.
John Naylor
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28827.1523039259@sss.pgh.pa.us
This reverts the backend sides of commit 1fde38beaa.
I have, at least for now, left the pg_verify_checksums tool in place, as
this tool can be very valuable without the rest of the patch as well,
and since it's a read-only tool that only runs when the cluster is down
it should be a lot safer.
Historically, the initial catalog data to be installed during bootstrap
has been written in DATA() lines in the catalog header files. This had
lots of disadvantages: the format was badly underdocumented, it was
very difficult to edit the data in any mechanized way, and due to the
lack of any abstraction the data was verbose, hard to read/understand,
and easy to get wrong.
Hence, move this data into separate ".dat" files and represent it in a way
that can easily be read and rewritten by Perl scripts. The new format is
essentially "key => value" for each column; while it's a bit repetitive,
explicit labeling of each value makes the data far more readable and less
error-prone. Provide a way to abbreviate entries by omitting field values
that match a specified default value for their column. This allows removal
of a large amount of repetitive boilerplate and also lowers the barrier to
adding new columns.
Also teach genbki.pl how to translate symbolic OID references into
numeric OIDs for more cases than just "regproc"-like pg_proc references.
It can now do that for regprocedure-like references (thus solving the
problem that regproc is ambiguous for overloaded functions), operators,
types, opfamilies, opclasses, and access methods. Use this to turn
nearly all OID cross-references in the initial data into symbolic form.
This represents a very large step forward in readability and error
resistance of the initial catalog data. It should also reduce the
difficulty of renumbering OID assignments in uncommitted patches.
Also, solve the longstanding problem that frontend code that would like to
use OID macros and other information from the catalog headers often had
difficulty with backend-only code in the headers. To do this, arrange for
all generated macros, plus such other declarations as we deem fit, to be
placed in "derived" header files that are safe for frontend inclusion.
(Once clients migrate to using these pg_*_d.h headers, it will be possible
to get rid of the pg_*_fn.h headers, which only exist to quarantine code
away from clients. That is left for follow-on patches, however.)
The now-automatically-generated macros include the Anum_xxx and Natts_xxx
constants that we used to have to update by hand when adding or removing
catalog columns.
Replace the former manual method of generating OID macros for pg_type
entries with an automatic method, ensuring that all built-in types have
OID macros. (But note that this patch does not change the way that
OID macros for pg_proc entries are built and used. It's not clear that
making that match the other catalogs would be worth extra code churn.)
Add SGML documentation explaining what the new data format is and how to
work with it.
Despite being a very large change in the catalog headers, there is no
catversion bump here, because postgres.bki and related output files
haven't changed at all.
John Naylor, based on ideas from various people; review and minor
additional coding by me; previous review by Alvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJVSVGWO48JbbwXkJz_yBFyGYW-M9YWxnPdxJBUosDC9ou_F0Q@mail.gmail.com
This rectifies an oversight in commit 8224de4f4, by adding a new
property 'can_include' for pg_indexam_has_property, and adjusting the
results of pg_index_column_has_property to give more appropriate
results for INCLUDEd columns.
Allow the cluster to be optionally init'd with read access for the
group.
This means a relatively non-privileged user can perform a backup of the
cluster without requiring write privileges, which enhances security.
The mode of PGDATA is used to determine whether group permissions are
enabled for directory and file creates. This method was chosen as it's
simple and works well for the various utilities that write into PGDATA.
Changing the mode of PGDATA manually will not automatically change the
mode of all the files contained therein. If the user would like to
enable group access on an existing cluster then changing the mode of all
the existing files will be required. Note that pg_upgrade will
automatically change the mode of all migrated files if the new cluster
is init'd with the -g option.
Tests are included for the backend and all the utilities which operate
on the PG data directory to ensure that the correct mode is set based on
the data directory permissions.
Author: David Steele <david@pgmasters.net>
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier, with discussion amongst many others.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/ad346fe6-b23e-59f1-ecb7-0e08390ad629%40pgmasters.net
Existing partition pruning is only able to work at plan time, for query
quals that appear in the parsed query. This is good but limiting, as
there can be parameters that appear later that can be usefully used to
further prune partitions.
This commit adds support for pruning subnodes of Append which cannot
possibly contain any matching tuples, during execution, by evaluating
Params to determine the minimum set of subnodes that can possibly match.
We support more than just simple Params in WHERE clauses. Support
additionally includes:
1. Parameterized Nested Loop Joins: The parameter from the outer side of the
join can be used to determine the minimum set of inner side partitions to
scan.
2. Initplans: Once an initplan has been executed we can then determine which
partitions match the value from the initplan.
Partition pruning is performed in two ways. When Params external to the plan
are found to match the partition key we attempt to prune away unneeded Append
subplans during the initialization of the executor. This allows us to bypass
the initialization of non-matching subplans meaning they won't appear in the
EXPLAIN or EXPLAIN ANALYZE output.
For parameters whose value is only known during the actual execution
then the pruning of these subplans must wait. Subplans which are
eliminated during this stage of pruning are still visible in the EXPLAIN
output. In order to determine if pruning has actually taken place, the
EXPLAIN ANALYZE must be viewed. If a certain Append subplan was never
executed due to the elimination of the partition then the execution
timing area will state "(never executed)". Whereas, if, for example in
the case of parameterized nested loops, the number of loops stated in
the EXPLAIN ANALYZE output for certain subplans may appear lower than
others due to the subplan having been scanned fewer times. This is due
to the list of matching subnodes having to be evaluated whenever a
parameter which was found to match the partition key changes.
This commit required some additional infrastructure that permits the
building of a data structure which is able to perform the translation of
the matching partition IDs, as returned by get_matching_partitions, into
the list index of a subpaths list, as exist in node types such as
Append, MergeAppend and ModifyTable. This allows us to translate a list
of clauses into a Bitmapset of all the subpath indexes which must be
included to satisfy the clause list.
Author: David Rowley, based on an earlier effort by Beena Emerson
Reviewers: Amit Langote, Robert Haas, Amul Sul, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi,
Jesper Pedersen
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAOG9ApE16ac-_VVZVvv0gePSgkg_BwYEV1NBqZFqDR2bBE0X0A@mail.gmail.com
This patch introduces INCLUDE clause to index definition. This clause
specifies a list of columns which will be included as a non-key part in
the index. The INCLUDE columns exist solely to allow more queries to
benefit from index-only scans. Also, such columns don't need to have
appropriate operator classes. Expressions are not supported as INCLUDE
columns since they cannot be used in index-only scans.
Index access methods supporting INCLUDE are indicated by amcaninclude flag
in IndexAmRoutine. For now, only B-tree indexes support INCLUDE clause.
In B-tree indexes INCLUDE columns are truncated from pivot index tuples
(tuples located in non-leaf pages and high keys). Therefore, B-tree indexes
now might have variable number of attributes. This patch also provides
generic facility to support that: pivot tuples contain number of their
attributes in t_tid.ip_posid. Free 13th bit of t_info is used for indicating
that. This facility will simplify further support of index suffix truncation.
The changes of above are backward-compatible, pg_upgrade doesn't need special
handling of B-tree indexes for that.
Bump catalog version
Author: Anastasia Lubennikova with contribition by Alexander Korotkov and me
Reviewed by: Peter Geoghegan, Tomas Vondra, Antonin Houska, Jeff Janes,
David Rowley, Alexander Korotkov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/56168952.4010101@postgrespro.ru
Jsonb has a complex nature so there isn't best-for-everything way to convert it
to tsvector for full text search. Current to_tsvector(json(b)) suggests to
convert only string values, but it's possible to index keys, numerics and even
booleans value. To solve that json(b)_to_tsvector has a second required
argument contained a list of desired types of json fields. Second argument is
a jsonb scalar or array right now with possibility to add new options in a
future.
Bump catalog version
Author: Dmitry Dolgov with some editorization by me
Reviewed by: Teodor Sigaev
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/CA+q6zcXJQbS1b4kJ_HeAOoOc=unfnOrUEL=KGgE32QKDww7d8g@mail.gmail.com
Update the built-in logical replication system to make use of the
previously added logical decoding for TRUNCATE support. Add the
required truncate callback to pgoutput and a new logical replication
protocol message.
Publications get a new attribute to determine whether to replicate
truncate actions. When updating a publication via pg_dump from an older
version, this is not set, thus preserving the previous behavior.
Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Marco Nenciarini <marco.nenciarini@2ndquadrant.it>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Add a new WAL record type for TRUNCATE, which is only used when
wal_level >= logical. (For physical replication, TRUNCATE is already
replicated via SMGR records.) Add new callback for logical decoding
output plugins to receive TRUNCATE actions.
Author: Simon Riggs <simon@2ndquadrant.com>
Author: Marco Nenciarini <marco.nenciarini@2ndquadrant.it>
Author: Peter Eisentraut <peter.eisentraut@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Petr Jelinek <petr.jelinek@2ndquadrant.com>
Reviewed-by: Andres Freund <andres@anarazel.de>
Reviewed-by: Alvaro Herrera <alvherre@alvh.no-ip.org>
Also enable this for postgres_fdw.
Etsuro Fujita, based on an earlier patch by Amit Langote. The larger
patch series of which this is a part has been reviewed by Amit
Langote, David Fetter, Maksim Milyutin, Álvaro Herrera, Stephen Frost,
and me. Minor documentation changes to the final version by me.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/29906a26-da12-8c86-4fb9-d8f88442f2b9@lab.ntt.co.jp
This provides a newer version of adminpack which works with the newly
added default roles to support GRANT'ing to non-superusers access to
read and write files, along with related functions (unlinking files,
getting file length, renaming/removing files, scanning the log file
directory) which are supported through adminpack.
Note that new versions of the functions are required because an
environment might have an updated version of the library but still have
the old adminpack 1.0 catalog definitions (where EXECUTE is GRANT'd to
PUBLIC for the functions).
This patch also removes the long-deprecated alternative names for
functions that adminpack used to include and which are now included in
the backend, in adminpack v1.1. Applications using the deprecated names
should be updated to use the backend functions instead. Existing
installations which continue to use adminpack v1.0 should continue to
function until/unless adminpack is upgraded.
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231191939.GR2416%40tamriel.snowman.net
This patch adds new default roles named 'pg_read_server_files',
'pg_write_server_files', 'pg_execute_server_program' which
allow an administrator to GRANT to a non-superuser role the ability to
access server-side files or run programs through PostgreSQL (as the user
the database is running as). Having one of these roles allows a
non-superuser to use server-side COPY to read, write, or with a program,
and to use file_fdw (if installed by a superuser and GRANT'd USAGE on
it) to read from files or run a program.
The existing misc file functions are also changed to allow a user with
the 'pg_read_server_files' default role to read any files on the
filesystem, matching the privileges given to that role through COPY and
file_fdw from above.
Reviewed-By: Michael Paquier
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171231191939.GR2416%40tamriel.snowman.net
This makes it possible to turn checksums on in a live cluster, without
the previous need for dump/reload or logical replication (and to turn it
off).
Enabling checkusm starts a background process in the form of a
launcher/worker combination that goes through the entire database and
recalculates checksums on each and every page. Only when all pages have
been checksummed are they fully enabled in the cluster. Any failure of
the process will revert to checksums off and the process has to be
started.
This adds a new WAL record that indicates the state of checksums, so
the process works across replicated clusters.
Authors: Magnus Hagander and Daniel Gustafsson
Review: Tomas Vondra, Michael Banck, Heikki Linnakangas, Andrey Borodin
Error-tolerant conversion function with web-like syntax for search query,
it simplifies constraining search engine with close to habitual interface for
users.
Bump catalog version
Authors: Victor Drobny, Dmitry Ivanov with editorization by me
Reviewed by: Aleksander Alekseev, Tomas Vondra, Thomas Munro, Aleksandr Parfenov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/fe931111ff7e9ad79196486ada79e268@postgrespro.ru
Vacuum of index consists from two stages: multiple (zero of more) ambulkdelete
calls and one amvacuumcleanup call. When workload on particular table
is append-only, then autovacuum isn't intended to touch this table. However,
user may run vacuum manually in order to fill visibility map and get benefits
of index-only scans. Then ambulkdelete wouldn't be called for indexes
of such table (because no heap tuples were deleted), only amvacuumcleanup would
be called In this case, amvacuumcleanup would perform full index scan for
two objectives: put recyclable pages into free space map and update index
statistics.
This patch allows btvacuumclanup to skip full index scan when two conditions
are satisfied: no pages are going to be put into free space map and index
statistics isn't stalled. In order to check first condition, we store
oldest btpo_xact in the meta-page. When it's precedes RecentGlobalXmin, then
there are some recyclable pages. In order to check second condition we store
number of heap tuples observed during previous full index scan by cleanup.
If fraction of newly inserted tuples is less than
vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor, then statistics isn't considered to be
stalled. vacuum_cleanup_index_scale_factor can be defined as both reloption and GUC (default).
This patch bumps B-tree meta-page version. Upgrade of meta-page is performed
"on the fly": during VACUUM meta-page is rewritten with new version. No special
handling in pg_upgrade is required.
Author: Masahiko Sawada, Alexander Korotkov
Review by: Peter Geoghegan, Kyotaro Horiguchi, Alexander Korotkov, Yura Sokolov
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/CAD21AoAX+d2oD_nrd9O2YkpzHaFr=uQeGr9s1rKC3O4ENc568g@mail.gmail.com
The prefix operator along with SP-GiST indexes can be used as an alternative
for LIKE 'word%' commands and it doesn't have a limitation of string/prefix
length as B-Tree has.
Bump catalog version
Author: Ildus Kurbangaliev with some editorization by me
Review by: Arthur Zakirov, Alexander Korotkov, and me
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20180202180327.222b04b3@wp.localdomain
Add a new contrib module jsonb_plperl that provides a transform between
jsonb and PL/Perl. jsonb values are converted to appropriate Perl types
such as arrays and hashes, and vice versa.
Author: Anthony Bykov <a.bykov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <a.alekseev@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
When base backups are run over the replication protocol (for example
using pg_basebackup), verify the checksums of all data blocks if
checksums are enabled. If checksum failures are encountered, log them
as warnings but don't abort the backup.
This becomes the default behaviour in pg_basebackup (provided checksums
are enabled on the server), so add a switch (-k) to disable the checks
if necessary.
Author: Michael Banck
Reviewed-By: Magnus Hagander, David Steele
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228180856.GE13784@nighthawk.caipicrew.dd-dns.de
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.
MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
DO NOTHING;
MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.
MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.
MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.
Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.
This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.
Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich
Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewer: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.comhttps://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
MERGE performs actions that modify rows in the target table
using a source table or query. MERGE provides a single SQL
statement that can conditionally INSERT/UPDATE/DELETE rows
a task that would other require multiple PL statements.
e.g.
MERGE INTO target AS t
USING source AS s
ON t.tid = s.sid
WHEN MATCHED AND t.balance > s.delta THEN
UPDATE SET balance = t.balance - s.delta
WHEN MATCHED THEN
DELETE
WHEN NOT MATCHED AND s.delta > 0 THEN
INSERT VALUES (s.sid, s.delta)
WHEN NOT MATCHED THEN
DO NOTHING;
MERGE works with regular and partitioned tables, including
column and row security enforcement, as well as support for
row, statement and transition triggers.
MERGE is optimized for OLTP and is parameterizable, though
also useful for large scale ETL/ELT. MERGE is not intended
to be used in preference to existing single SQL commands
for INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE since there is some overhead.
MERGE can be used statically from PL/pgSQL.
MERGE does not yet support inheritance, write rules,
RETURNING clauses, updatable views or foreign tables.
MERGE follows SQL Standard per the most recent SQL:2016.
Includes full tests and documentation, including full
isolation tests to demonstrate the concurrent behavior.
This version written from scratch in 2017 by Simon Riggs,
using docs and tests originally written in 2009. Later work
from Pavan Deolasee has been both complex and deep, leaving
the lead author credit now in his hands.
Extensive discussion of concurrency from Peter Geoghegan,
with thanks for the time and effort contributed.
Various issues reported via sqlsmith by Andreas Seltenreich
Authors: Pavan Deolasee, Simon Riggs
Reviewers: Peter Geoghegan, Amit Langote, Tomas Vondra, Simon Riggs
Discussion:
https://postgr.es/m/CANP8+jKitBSrB7oTgT9CY2i1ObfOt36z0XMraQc+Xrz8QB0nXA@mail.gmail.comhttps://postgr.es/m/CAH2-WzkJdBuxj9PO=2QaO9-3h3xGbQPZ34kJH=HukRekwM-GZg@mail.gmail.com
Since commit 7012b132d0, postgres_fdw
has been able to push down the toplevel aggregation operation to the
remote server. Commit e2f1eb0ee3 made
it possible to break down the toplevel aggregation into one
aggregate per partition. This commit lets postgres_fdw push down
aggregation in that case just as it does at the top level.
In order to make this work, this commit adds an additional argument
to the GetForeignUpperPaths FDW API. A matching argument is added
to the signature for create_upper_paths_hook. Third-party code using
either of these will need to be updated.
Also adjust create_foreignscan_plan() so that it picks up the correct
set of relids in this case.
Jeevan Chalke, reviewed by Ashutosh Bapat and by me and with some
adjustments by me. The larger patch series of which this patch is a
part was also reviewed and tested by Antonin Houska, Rajkumar
Raghuwanshi, David Rowley, Dilip Kumar, Konstantin Knizhnik, Pascal
Legrand, and Rafia Sabih.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=V64_xhstVHie0Rz=KPEQnLJMZt_e314P0jaT_oJ9MR8A@mail.gmail.com
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=XPWujjmj5zUaBTGDoB38CemwcPmjkRy0qOcsQj_V+2sQ@mail.gmail.com
Add a new, optional, capability to bt_index_check() and
bt_index_parent_check(): check that each heap tuple that should have an
index entry does in fact have one. The extra checking is performed at
the end of the existing nbtree checks.
This is implemented by using a Bloom filter data structure. The
implementation performs set membership tests within a callback (the same
type of callback that each index AM registers for CREATE INDEX). The
Bloom filter is populated during the initial index verification scan.
Reusing the CREATE INDEX infrastructure allows the new verification
option to automatically benefit from the heap consistency checks that
CREATE INDEX already performs. CREATE INDEX does thorough sanity
checking of HOT chains, so the new check actually manages to detect
problems in heap-only tuples.
Author: Peter Geoghegan
Reviewed-By: Pavan Deolasee, Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAH2-Wzm5VmG7cu1N-H=nnS57wZThoSDQU+F5dewx3o84M+jY=g@mail.gmail.com
Previously there was no way in the standby side to find out the host and port
of the sender server that the walreceiver was currently connected to when
multiple hosts and ports were specified in primary_conninfo. For that purpose,
this patch adds sender_host and sender_port columns into pg_stat_wal_receiver
view. They report the host and port that the active replication connection
currently uses.
Bump catalog version.
Author: Haribabu Kommi
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier and me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAJrrPGcV_aq8=cdqkFhVDJKEnDQ70yRTTdY9RODzMnXNrCz2Ow@mail.gmail.com
Previously, committing or aborting inside a cursor loop was prohibited
because that would close and remove the cursor. To allow that,
automatically convert such cursors to holdable cursors so they survive
commits or rollbacks. Portals now have a new state "auto-held", which
means they have been converted automatically from pinned. An auto-held
portal is kept on transaction commit or rollback, but is still removed
when returning to the main loop on error.
This supports all languages that have cursor loop constructs: PL/pgSQL,
PL/Python, PL/Perl.
Reviewed-by: Ildus Kurbangaliev <i.kurbangaliev@postgrespro.ru>
As promised in earlier commits, this adds documentation about the new
build options, the new GUCs, about the planner logic when JIT is used,
and the benefits of JIT in general.
Also adds a more implementation oriented README.
I'm sure we're going to want to expand this further, but I think this
is a reasonable start.
Author: Andres Freund, with contributions by Thomas Munro
Reviewed-By: Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
The target cluster that was rewound needs to perform recovery from
the checkpoint created at failover, which leads it to remove or recreate
some files and directories that may have been copied from the source
cluster. So pg_rewind can skip synchronizing such files and directories,
and which reduces the amount of data transferred during a rewind
without changing the usefulness of the operation.
Author: Michael Paquier
Reviewed-by: Anastasia Lubennikova, Stephen Frost and me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180205071022.GA17337@paquier.xyz
So far, a nested CALL or DO in PL/pgSQL would not establish a context
where transaction control statements were allowed. This fixes that by
handling CALL and DO specially in PL/pgSQL, passing the atomic/nonatomic
execution context through and doing the required management around
transaction boundaries.
Reviewed-by: Tomas Vondra <tomas.vondra@2ndquadrant.com>
Add a new contrib module jsonb_plpython that provide a transform between
jsonb and PL/Python. jsonb values are converted to appropriate Python
types such as dicts and lists, and vice versa.
Author: Anthony Bykov <a.bykov@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Aleksander Alekseev <a.alekseev@postgrespro.ru>
Reviewed-by: Nikita Glukhov <n.gluhov@postgrespro.ru>
Currently adding a column to a table with a non-NULL default results in
a rewrite of the table. For large tables this can be both expensive and
disruptive. This patch removes the need for the rewrite as long as the
default value is not volatile. The default expression is evaluated at
the time of the ALTER TABLE and the result stored in a new column
(attmissingval) in pg_attribute, and a new column (atthasmissing) is set
to true. Any existing row when fetched will be supplied with the
attmissingval. New rows will have the supplied value or the default and
so will never need the attmissingval.
Any time the table is rewritten all the atthasmissing and attmissingval
settings for the attributes are cleared, as they are no longer needed.
The most visible code change from this is in heap_attisnull, which
acquires a third TupleDesc argument, allowing it to detect a missing
value if there is one. In many cases where it is known that there will
not be any (e.g. catalog relations) NULL can be passed for this
argument.
Andrew Dunstan, heavily modified from an original patch from Serge
Rielau.
Reviewed by Tom Lane, Andres Freund, Tomas Vondra and David Rowley.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/31e2e921-7002-4c27-59f5-51f08404c858@2ndQuadrant.com
If the value of an index expression is unchanged after UPDATE,
allow HOT updates where previously we disallowed them, giving
a significant performance boost in those cases.
Particularly useful for indexes such as JSON->>field where the
JSON value changes but the indexed value does not.
Submitted as "surjective indexes" patch, now enabled by use
of new "recheck_on_update" parameter.
Author: Konstantin Knizhnik
Reviewer: Simon Riggs, with much wordsmithing and some cleanup
Previously, PQhost didn't return the connected host details when the
connection type was CHT_HOST_ADDRESS (i.e., via hostaddr). Instead, it
returned the complete host connection parameter (which could contain
multiple hosts) or the default host details, which was confusing and
arguably incorrect.
Change this to return the actually connected host or hostaddr
irrespective of the connection type. When hostaddr but no host was
specified, hostaddr is now returned. Never return the original host
connection parameter, and document that PQhost cannot be relied on
before the connection is established.
PQport is similarly changed to always return the active connection port
and never the original connection parameter.
Author: Hari Babu <kommi.haribabu@gmail.com>
Reviewed-by: Michael Paquier <michael@paquier.xyz>
Reviewed-by: Kyotaro HORIGUCHI <horiguchi.kyotaro@lab.ntt.co.jp>
Reviewed-by: David G. Johnston <david.g.johnston@gmail.com>
Setting random could increase reproducibility of test in some cases. Patch
suggests three providers for seed: time (default), strong random
generator (if available) and unsigned constant. Seed could be set from
command line or enviroment variable.
Author: Fabien Coelho
Reviewed by: Chapman Flack
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/20160407082711.q7iq3ykffqxcszkv@alap3.anarazel.de
Commit eb7ed3f306 enabled unique constraints on partitioned tables,
but one thing that was not working properly is INSERT/ON CONFLICT.
This commit introduces a new node keeps state related to the ON CONFLICT
clause per partition, and fills it when that partition is about to be
used for tuple routing.
Author: Amit Langote, Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Etsuro Fujita, Pavan Deolasee
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20180228004602.cwdyralmg5ejdqkq@alvherre.pgsql
Section 10.5 didn't say explicitly that multiple UNIONs are resolved
pairwise. Since the resolution algorithm is described as taking any
number of inputs, readers might well think that a query like
"select x union select y union select z" would be resolved by
considering x, y, and z in one resolution step. But that's not what
happens (and I think that behavior is per SQL spec). Add an example
clarifying this point.
Per bug #15129 from Philippe Beaudoin.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152196085023.32649.9916472370480121694@wrigleys.postgresql.org
This adds a new option --wal-segsize (analogous to initdb) that changes
the WAL segment size in pg_control.
Author: Nathan Bossart <bossartn@amazon.com>
We were running out of good single-letter options for some upcoming
pg_resetwal functionality, so add long options to create more
possibilities. Add to pg_controldata as well for symmetry.
based on patch by Bossart, Nathan <bossartn@amazon.com>
Clarify that the -l option takes a file name, not an "address", and that
that might be different from the LSN if nondefault WAL segment sizes are
used.
Extension scripts begin execution with pg_catalog at the front of the
search path, so type names reliably refer to pg_catalog. Remove these
superfluous qualifications. Earlier <programlisting> of this <sect1>
already omitted them. Back-patch to 9.3 (all supported versions).
Previously, FOR EACH ROW triggers were not allowed in partitioned
tables. Now we allow AFTER triggers on them, and on trigger creation we
cascade to create an identical trigger in each partition. We also clone
the triggers to each partition that is created or attached later.
This means that deferred unique keys are allowed on partitioned tables,
too.
Author: Álvaro Herrera
Reviewed-by: Peter Eisentraut, Simon Riggs, Amit Langote, Robert Haas,
Thomas Munro
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20171229225319.ajltgss2ojkfd3kp@alvherre.pgsql
VACUUM thought that reltuples represents the total number of tuples in
the relation, while ANALYZE counted only live tuples. This can cause
"flapping" in the value when background vacuums and analyzes happen
separately. The planner's use of reltuples essentially assumes that
it's the count of live (visible) tuples, so let's standardize on having
it mean live tuples.
Another issue is that the definition of "live tuple" isn't totally clear;
what should be done with INSERT_IN_PROGRESS or DELETE_IN_PROGRESS tuples?
ANALYZE's choices in this regard are made on the assumption that if the
originating transaction commits at all, it will happen after ANALYZE
finishes, so we should ignore the effects of the in-progress transaction
--- unless it is our own transaction, and then we should count it.
Let's propagate this definition into VACUUM, too.
Likewise propagate this definition into CREATE INDEX, and into
contrib/pgstattuple's pgstattuple_approx() function.
Tomas Vondra, reviewed by Haribabu Kommi, some corrections by me
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/16db4468-edfa-830a-f921-39a50498e77e@2ndquadrant.com
If the partition keys of input relation are part of the GROUP BY
clause, all the rows belonging to a given group come from a single
partition. This allows aggregation/grouping over a partitioned
relation to be broken down * into aggregation/grouping on each
partition. This should be no worse, and often better, than the normal
approach.
If the GROUP BY clause does not contain all the partition keys, we can
still perform partial aggregation for each partition and then finalize
aggregation after appending the partial results. This is less certain
to be a win, but it's still useful.
Jeevan Chalke, Ashutosh Bapat, Robert Haas. The larger patch series
of which this patch is a part was also reviewed and tested by Antonin
Houska, Rajkumar Raghuwanshi, David Rowley, Dilip Kumar, Konstantin
Knizhnik, Pascal Legrand, and Rafia Sabih.
Discussion: http://postgr.es/m/CAM2+6=V64_xhstVHie0Rz=KPEQnLJMZt_e314P0jaT_oJ9MR8A@mail.gmail.com
Logical decoding should not publish anything about tables created as
part of a heap rewrite during DDL. Those tables don't exist externally,
so consumers of logical decoding cannot do anything sensible with that
information. In ab28feae2b, we worked
around this for built-in logical replication, but that was hack.
This is a more proper fix: We mark such transient heaps using the new
field pg_class.relwrite, linking to the original relation OID. By
default, we ignore them in logical decoding before they get to the
output plugin. Optionally, a plugin can register their interest in
getting such changes, if they handle DDL specially, in which case the
new field will help them get information about the actual table.
Reviewed-by: Craig Ringer <craig@2ndquadrant.com>
This is an optional dependency. It'll be used for the upcoming LLVM
based just in time compilation support, which needs to wrap a few LLVM
C++ APIs so they're accessible from C..
For now test for C++ compilers unconditionally, without failing if not
present, to ensure wide buildfarm coverage. If we're bothered by the
additional test times (which are quite short) or verbosity, we can
later make the tests conditional on --with-llvm.
Author: Andres Freund
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/20170901064131.tazjxwus3k2w3ybh@alap3.anarazel.de
If a view lacks an INSTEAD OF trigger, DML on it can only work by rewriting
the command into a command on the underlying base table(s). Then we will
fire triggers attached to those table(s), not those for the view. This
seems appropriate from a consistency standpoint, but nowhere was the
behavior explicitly documented, so let's do that.
There was some discussion of throwing an error or warning if a statement
trigger is created on a view without creating a row INSTEAD OF trigger.
But a simple implementation of that would result in dump/restore ordering
hazards. Given that it's been like this all along, and we hadn't heard
a complaint till now, a documentation improvement seems sufficient.
Per bug #15106 from Pu Qun. Back-patch to all supported branches.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/152083391168.1215.16892140713507052796@wrigleys.postgresql.org
Since SSL compression is no longer recommended, turn the default in
libpq from on to off.
OpenSSL 1.1.0 and many distribution packages already turn compression
off by default, so such a server won't accept compression anyway. So
this will mainly affect users of older OpenSSL installations.
Also update the documentation to make clear that this setting is no
longer recommended.
Discussion: https://www.postgresql.org/message-id/flat/595cf3b1-4ffe-7f05-6f72-f72b7afa7993%402ndquadrant.com
This allows specifying an external command for prompting for or
otherwise obtaining passphrases for SSL key files. This is useful
because in many cases there is no TTY easily available during service
startup.
Also add a setting ssl_passphrase_command_supports_reload, which allows
supporting SSL configuration reload even if SSL files need passphrases.
Reviewed-by: Daniel Gustafsson <daniel@yesql.se>
In a top-level CALL, the values of INOUT arguments will be returned as a
result row. In PL/pgSQL, the values are assigned back to the input
arguments. In other languages, the same convention as for return a
record from a function is used. That does not require any code changes
in the PL implementations.
Reviewed-by: Pavel Stehule <pavel.stehule@gmail.com>
Autovacuum's 'workitem' request queue is of limited size, so requests
can fail if they arrive more quickly than autovacuum can process them.
Emit a log message when this happens, to provide better visibility of
this.
Backpatch to 10. While this represents an API change for
AutoVacuumRequestWork, that function is not yet prepared to deal with
external modules calling it, so there doesn't seem to be any risk (other
than log spam, that is.)
Author: Masahiko Sawada
Reviewed-by: Fabrízio Mello, Ildar Musin, Álvaro Herrera
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/CAD21AoB1HrQhp6_4rTyHN5kWEJCEsG8YzsjZNt-ctoXSn5Uisw@mail.gmail.com
We were independently checking ReservedBackends < MaxConnections and
max_wal_senders < MaxConnections, but because walsenders aren't allowed
to use superuser-reserved connections, that's really the wrong thing.
Correct behavior is to insist on ReservedBackends + max_wal_senders being
less than MaxConnections. Fix the code and associated documentation.
This has been wrong for a long time, but since the situation probably
hardly ever arises in the field (especially pre-v10, when the default
for max_wal_senders was zero), no back-patch.
Discussion: https://postgr.es/m/28271.1520195491@sss.pgh.pa.us
